IM33K50G10 - 50E - 04 - PRT - IOs MODULES PDF

Input & Output Modules
IM 33K50G10-50E
IM 33K50G10-50E
4th Edition
i
Introduction
Input/output devices are signal processing devices placed between the field equipment and
the Field Control Station in the Integrated Production Control System CENTUM VP. These de-
vices are used to perform signal conversion and input/output processing.
In this user’s manual, the following abbreviations are used for the explanations:
• All the devices connected to RIO bus interface card (RB301) are referred to “RIO.”
• Any the devices connected to ESB bus interface module (SB301) are referred to “FIO.”
n Products Explained in This User’s manual

This user’s manual explains the following products:
• Input/Output Modules
• Input/Output Module Nests
• Relay Boards
• Signal Conditioner Cards and Nests
n Organization of This User’s Manual

This user’s manual is an input/output devices hardware manual.
The contents of the user’s manual are divided into two parts, each one covering one kind of
I/O bus connection.
l PART-A Input & Output Device for RIO

Chapter Input & Output Device Configuration
A1 This chapter explains the node network topology and the configuration of input/
output devices using installation examples.
Chapter I/O Module Nests
A2 Just as there are different I/O modules that can be used depending on the function,
there are 9 types of nests that can store the modules. This chapter explains differ-
ent combinations of modules and nests that can store the modules, the wiring of
the power supply for the nests, and some restrictions.
Chapter Input & Output Modules
A3 This chapter explains the basic functions of the I/O modules and the initial setting
values of the I/O modules that must be set.
Chapter Signal Cable Wiring to I/O Modules
A4 The signal cables are connected directly to the terminals or connectors of the I/O
module nests. This chapter explains the types of input and output connections and
terminal symbols via diagrams.
Chapter Maintenance of Input & Output Devices
A5 I/O modules are equipped with status display LEDs and it is possible to inspect
them in a simple manner. In addition, the field control station status can be moni-
tored on the display. This chapter explains how to mount or remove modules.
l PART-B Input & Output Devices for FIO

Chapter Input/Output Device Configuration and Preparation before Installation
B1 This chapter explains the node network topology, the types and configuration of
node units, and how to install them.
Media No. IM 33K50G10-50E (DVD) 4th Edition : Jun. 2013 (YK) IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright © 2011 , Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii
Chapter Input/Output Devices (For FIO)
B2 This chapter explains the types and external appearances of the different I/O mod-
ules, some related accessories, and how to set up modules that require setting.
The common modules are also explained in this chapter.
Chapter Signal Cable Connection to Input/Output (For FIO)
B3 Signal cables can be connected to I/O modules either by pressure clamp terminals
or connectors. This chapter shows the correspondence between input/output chan-
nels and terminal numbers of each module via diagrams.
Chapter Maintenance of Input & Output Devices (For FIO)
B4 This chapter explains how to carry out the daily maintenance of I/O modules and
how to replace them if necessary.
Chapter Relay Boards (for FIO)
B5 Explains the relay board of the mechanical and solid-state relays.
Which is implemented with FIO.
Chapter Relay Boards (for RIO and ST compatible FIO)
B6 Explains the relay board implemented with RIO and ST compatible FIO.
Chapter Signal Conditioner Cards and Nests
B7 This chapter explains the signal conditioner cards and Nests.
IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

iii
CENTUM VP Document Map

Installation
CENTUM VP License CENTUM VP
Installation Management Security Guide
IM 33K01C10-50E IM 33K01C20-50E IM 33K01C30-50E
Engineering
Field Control Stations Function Blocks Function Blocks Function Blocks

Reference Overview Reference Vol.1 Reference Vol.2
IM 33K03E10-50E IM 33K03E21-50E IM 33K03E22-50E IM 33K03E23-50E
Function Blocks Human Interface Human Interface Engineering

Reference Vol. 3 Stations Reference Vol. 1 Stations Reference Vol. 2 Reference Vol. 1
IM 33K03E24-50E IM 33K03F21-50E IM 33K03F22-50E IM 33K03G21-50E
Consolidated Alarm
Engineering Engineering Management Software Batch Management
Reference Vol. 2 Reference Vol. 3 Reference System Reference
IM 33K03G22-50E IM 33K03G23-50E IM 33K03H20-50E IM 33K03J10-50E
SEBOL Communication with Communication with Communication

Reference Subsystems Using RIO Subsystems Using FIO Devices Reference
IM 33K03K10-50E IM 33K03L10-50E IM 33K03L20-50E IM 33K03M10-50E
Optional Functions Communication with Compliance with Generic Subsystem

Reference PROFIBUS Systems FDA: 21CFR Part 11 Gateway Reference
IM 33K03N10-50E IM 33K03P10-50E IM 33K03Q10-50E IM 33K03R10-50E
System Integration Unified Gateway Engineering Test

OPC Station Reference Station Reference Vnet/IP Guide
IM 33K03R20-50E IM 33K03R30-50E IM 33K10A10-50E IM 33K10H20-50E
Engineering CENTUM FOUNDATION fieldbus

Tutorial APCS Data Access Library Reference
IM 33K02E10-50E IM 33K15U10-50E IM 33K15P10-50E IM 33K20T10-50E
FOUNDATION fieldbus
Engineering Guide
IM 33K20T20-50E
Operation and Monitoring
HIS Operation Operating Messages
IM 33K02D10-50E IM 33K02D20-50E
Hardware
Turbomachinery
Peripherals Field Control Stations Input & Output Modules I/O Modules
IM 33K50C10-50E IM 33K50E40-50E IM 33K50G10-50E IM 33K10U10-50E
Communication Devices Migrated-FCS(FIO)
IM 33K50D10-50E IM 33K55W10-50E

Blank Page
v
Safety Precautions for Use

n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
• To protect the system controlled by the Product and the Product itself and to ensure safe
operation, please observe the safety precautions described in this Manual. Yokogawa
Electric Corporation ("YOKOGAWA") assumes no liability for safety if users fail to observe
the safety precautions and instructions when operating the Product.
• If the Product is used in a manner not specified in the User's Manuals, the protection pro-
vided by the Product may be impaired.
• If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the Product or for
the Product itself, please install it externally.
• Use only spare parts that are approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consum-
ables of the Product.
• Do not use the Product and its accessories such as power cords on devices that are not
approved by YOKOGAWA. Do not use the Product and its accessories for any purpose
other than as intended by YOKOGAWA.
• Modification of the Product is strictly prohibited.
• The following symbols are used in the Product and User's Manuals to indicate the accom-
panying safety precautions:
Indicates that caution is required for operation. This symbol is labeled on the Prod-
uct to refer the user to the User's Manuals for necessary actions or behaviors in
order to protect the operator and the equipment. In the User's Manuals, you will
find the precautions necessary to prevent physical injury or death, which may be
caused by accidents, such as electrical shocks resulting from operational mis-
takes.
Identifies a protective grounding terminal. Before using the Product, ground the
terminal.
Identifies a functional grounding terminal. Before using the Product, ground the
terminal.
Indicates an AC supply.
Indicates a DC supply.
Indicates the ON position of a power on/off switch.
Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.
n Notes on Handling User's Manuals

• Hand over the User's Manuals to your end users so that they can keep the User's Man-
uals on hand for convenient reference.
• Thoroughly read and understand the information in the User's Manuals before using the
Product.
• For the avoidance of doubt, the purpose of the User's Manuals is not to warrant that the
Product is suitable for any particular purpose but to describe the functional details of the
Product.
• Contents of the User's Manuals are subject to change without notice.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of the User's Manuals to ensure the accu-
racy of their contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, contact

vi
us or your local distributor. The User's Manuals with incorrectly ordered pages or missing
pages will be replaced.
n Warning and Disclaimer

• Except as specified in the warranty terms, YOKOGAWA shall not provide any warranty for
the Product.
• YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss incurred by either
using or not being able to use the Product.
n Notes on Hardware
l Appearance and Accessories
Check the following when you receive the Product:
• Appearance
• Standard accessories
Contact us or your local distributor in the following cases:
• The Product coating is peeling off.
• The Product itself is damaged.
• Some or any accessories are missing.
If the following label turns dirty and the information on it becomes illegible, or if the label is
peeling off, place an order for the new one with the part number T9029BX to change it.
: The label on the Products such as the power supply module.
l Model and Suffix Codes

The name plate on the Product contains the model and suffix codes. Verify the model and suf-
fix codes with those in the General Specifications (GS) to ensure that the Product matches
the order specifications. If you have any question, contact us or your local distributor.
n Documentation Conventions
l Symbol Marks
The following symbols are used throughout the User's Manuals.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to avoid physical
injury, electric shock, or death.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent dam-

ages to the software or hardware, or system failures of the
Product.
Identifies important information required to understand opera-
tions or functions.
Identifies additional information.

vii
Identifies referenced content.
In the online manuals, clicking on the reference link shown in
green displays the referenced content. This action does not ap-
ply to the reference link shown in black.
l Drawing Conventions
Drawings used in the User's Manuals may be partially emphasized or simplified for conven-
ience of description, so that the unnecessary parts are omitted from the drawings.
Drawings of the window may be slightly different from the actual screen shots with different
settings or fonts; the difference is not extended to the range that may hamper the understand-
ing of basic functionalities and operation and monitoring tasks.

Blank Page
ix
Conformity Standards and Cautions

n Conformity Standards
The Product conforms to various standards.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the standards the Product conforms to, refer to:
General Specifications (GS) for the Product
l Standards
The standards that the Product conforms to are described in the following table:
Table Info-1 Standards

Category Standard
Safety Standards(*1) (*2) [CSA]
• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.61010-1
[CE Marking] Low Voltage Directive
• EN 61010-1
EMC Standards(*2) [CE Marking] EMC Directive
• EN 55011 Class A Group 1 (*3)
• EN 61000-6-2 (*4)
• EN 61000-3-2 (*5)
• EN 61000-3-3
[C-Tick Marking]
• EN 55011 Class A Group 1 (*3)
[KC Marking]
• Korea Electromagnetic Conformity Standard
*1: For ensuring all the hardware devices to satisfy the safety standards, the dedicated breakers conforming to the following
specifications must be installed in the power supply distribution board:
• [CSA] CSA C22.2 No.5 or UL 489
• [CE Marking] EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-3
*2: For the rack-mountable devices to meet the Safety Standards and EMC Standards, the devices must be installed in a locka-
ble metal cabinet.
*3: A Class A hardware device is designed for using in an industrial environment.
*4: Regarding surge immunity, a lightning arrester or an equivalent equipment must be installed.
*5: Regarding the requirements on the limits for harmonic current emissions, the active filter circuitry or an external power supply
unit with proper harmonic filters should be used.
In relation to the CE Marking under the Low Voltage Directive and EMC Directive, the follow-
ing are the name and address of the manufacturer and the representative office in Europe:
• Manufacturer:
YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation (2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, Ja-
pan)
• Representative office in EU:
Yokogawa Europe B.V. (Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, The Netherlands)
SEE
ALSO For more information about selecting a power supply unit that enables safe usage of the Product, refer to:
“n Guidelines for Selecting a Power Supply Unit” on page xiii
For more information about selecting and wiring power cables, refer to:
"Cabling" in the CENTUM VP Installation Guidance (TI 33K01J10-50E)

x
n Installation and Maintenance Notes

l Installation Method
Please observe the following guidelines to ensure that devices meet safety and performance
requirements.
• Install rack-mountable devices in a lockable metal cabinet to meet their respective stand-
ards.
• When devices are housed in a cabinet, keep the cabinet door shut during operation.
• Ensure that all the empty slots of the devices are covered with the covers provided. Place
an order for the required covers.
• Ensure that all cables are firmly fixed with cable ties.
• Prepare a dedicated breaker in the same room as the system so that it can shut off the
power supply when an abnormality occurs. Use this breaker to turn off the power supply
for the devices of the system when a device abnormality occurs.
SEE
ALSO For more information about installation method, refer to:
B1.3, “Installation of Node Units” on page B1-11
l Requirements for Installation

When installing a device, the requirements for the device should be satisfied.
In addition, to satisfy safety standards, the device should be installed under the following con-
ditions:
Installation height: Altitude of up to 2000 m
Installation category based on IEC 61010-1: II (*1)
Pollution degree based on IEC 61010-1: 2 (*2)
*1: The installation category, also referred to as an overvoltage category, defines the standard for impulse withstand voltage. Cat-
egory II applies to the electrical device that is directly connected to the lower-voltage power supply.
The electrical device that such as AIP827 Style S2 or newer version is categorized into I. Category I applies to the electrical
device that is not directly connected to the main power supply.
*2: Pollution degree indicates the adhesion level of foreign matter in a solid, liquid, or gaseous state that can reduce dielectric
strength. Degree 2 refers to a pollution level equivalent to the general indoor environment.
SEE
ALSO For more information about installation specifications, refer to:
"■ Installation Environment Specifications" in the CENTUM VP Installation Guidance (TI 33K01J10-50E)
l Measurement Categories
The specifications for measurement input of a device are as follows:
IEC 61010-1 Measurement Category: I
The rated transient overvoltage of the measurement category I is 1500 V.
WARNING
Devices of the Product belong to measurement category I. Do not use them for measure-
ments that belong to categories II, III, and IV.

xi
The measurement categories for IEC61010-1 are as follows:
• Measurement category I
Measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to MAINS.
• Measurement category II
Measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low-voltage installation.
• Measurement category III
Measurements performed in a building installation.
• Measurement category IV
Measurements performed at the source of the low-voltage installation.
l Tightening Torque of Screws
CAUTION
The tightening torque that the Product recommends is showed in the following table. Howev-
er, if the tightening torque of the screw is specified in the User's Manuals, follow the instruc-
tions described in the User's Manuals.
Table Info-2 Table of Recommended Tightening Torque

Nominal diameter of a screw M2.6 M3 M3.5 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10
Recommended tightening tor- 0.35 0.6 0.8 1.2 2.8 3.0 12.0 24.0
que (N⋅m)
SEE
ALSO For more information about each nominal diameter of a screw, refer to:
CENTUM VP Installation Guidance (TI 33K01J10-50E)
l Power Cable Wiring
CAUTION
Connect the power cables according to the procedure specified in the User’s Manuals of the
device.
Power cables must conform to the safety standards of the country where the device is instal-
led.
SEE
ALSO For more information about power cables wiring, refer to:
• B1.4.1, “Power Supply Wiring” on page B1-15
• B7.3.2, “Power Supply Wiring” on page B7-12

xii
l Grounding
CAUTION
Ground devices according to the procedure specified in the User's Manuals of the device to
prevent electric shock and to minimize noise.
SEE
ALSO For more information about grounding, refer to:
• B1.4.2, “Grounding” on page B1-17
• B7.3.3, “Alarm Output for AC Power Supply Units and Grounding” on page B7-14
l I/O Cable Wiring
CAUTION
Wire I/O cables according to the procedure specified in the User’s Manuals.
SEE
ALSO For more information about wiring I/O cables, refer to:
• A4., “Signal Cable Wiring to I/O Modules” on page A4-1
• B3., “Signal Cable Connection to Input/Output Modules (For FIO)” on page B3-1
l Maintenance
CAUTION
• The Product maintenance should be only performed by the personnel who have under-
gone specialized training.
• When a device turns dirty, use a vacuum cleaner or a soft dry cloth to clean it.
• During maintenance, put on a wrist strap and take Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precau-
tions.
• If any existing caution label is peeling off, or dirty and illegible, place an order for the new
one with the part number T9029BX to change it.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the maintenance, refer to:
• A5., “Maintenance of Input & Output Devices” on page A5-1
• B4., “Maintenance of Input & Output Devices (For FIO)” on page B4-1

xiii
l Modules, Cards, Cables, and Connectors
CAUTION
When the power is on, only modules, cards, cables, and connectors that are allowed in the
User's Manuals can be replaced, removed, or installed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the maintenance, refer to:
• A5., “Maintenance of Input & Output Devices” on page A5-1
• B4., “Maintenance of Input & Output Devices (For FIO)” on page B4-1
l Relays
CAUTION
When replacing relays, you must follow the procedure specified in the User’s Manuals of the
device to prevent electric shock.
SEE
ALSO For more information about relays, refer to:
• A5.6, “Parts Replacement” on page A5-16
• B5.6.2, “Parts Replacement” on page B5-27
l Fuses
CAUTION
• Must use YOKOGAWA-designated fuses for replacement.
• Turn off the power supply before replacing the fuses.
SEE
ALSO For more information about fuses, refer to:
• B4.5, “Parts Replacement” on page B4-27
n Guidelines for Selecting a Power Supply Unit

Regarding the system of the Product, you must take the following precautions by using a
power supply unit to satisfy the various requirements of the EMC regulations:
• Prevent power supply problems such as power failure or short interruptions

xiv
• Protect the power supply unit against power line noise and lightning surge
• Suppress power supply harmonic current from devices
You must consult with the power supply unit suppliers, and then select and install a suitable
power supply unit with the considerations described in the following sections.
l Notices on Deciding the Output Capacity of Power Supply Unit

Please consult with the power supply unit suppliers and decide a suitable output capacity of
the power supply unit with the following considerations:
• Power consumption
Power consumed in both volt-ampere (VA) and watt (W).
• Device crest factor
Ratio of the peak value to the effective value of input current supplied to each device.
• Device inrush current
The maximum inrush current when power is turned on.
• Power failure backup time
Time required to back up the devices when power fails.
• Reserve capacity
An extra power capacity for additional devices and so on.
SEE
ALSO For more information about power consumption (VA/W) and inrush current, refer to:
l Crest Factor
The crest factor refers to the ratio of the peak value to the effective value of any input current
of a device.
Input voltage waveform
Input current waveform Approximately 5 ms

Peak value
Effective value
Peak value
Crest factor =
Effective value
Figure Info-1 Input voltage and current waveforms
Crest Factor=Peak value of the current supplied to the device / Effective value of the current
When you select a power supply unit, you need to estimate the power supply output capacity,
taking into consideration the crest factor of the input current supplied to every connected de-
vice. Estimate the device crest factors by using the following approximate values when select-
ing a power supply unit:
• 100 V system: Crest factor about 3
• 220 V system: Crest factor about 6

xv
l How to Decide the Power Supply Unit

The commonly used methods for determining the power supply unit capacity with considera-
tion of the crest factor are shown below. Note that the power supply unit capacity should be
finally decided after consulting with the power supply unit supplier:
• If the power unit crest factor is larger than the device crest factor, the power unit can be
used to its full rated capacity. However, factors such as device inrush current, backup
time, and reserve capacity must be taken into consideration separately.
• If the power unit crest factor is smaller than the device crest factor, the power unit capaci-
ty must be calculated using the following formula. Factors such as device inrush current,
backup time, and reserve capacity must be taken into consideration separately.
Power unit output capacity = Total device power consumption × Capacity coeff
icient
Capacity coefficient = Device crest factor/Power unit crest factor
l Inrush Current
When a device is turned on, the large inrush current flows in because of the momentary
charging current for capacitors. Therefore, it is the minimum requirement that the inrush cur-
rent produced by turning on some devices should not cause any voltage fluctuations that may
affect other devices. For tuning on all devices together, a soft start or switching to uninterrupti-
ble backup power should be required.
When the power is turned on, the inrush current can trip the overload protector, and then may
switch to the backup power or commercial power supply. A power supply unit that can auto-
matically and seamlessly recover the normal power supply when overloading ends should be
selected.
l Suppressing Harmonic Current

To suppress the power supply harmonic current that flows to a low-voltage distribution sys-
tem, a power supply unit or an active filter as described below should be installed between a
device and the low-voltage distribution system:
• Power supply unit that can suppress the power supply harmonic current, such as a high
power factor inverter-type uninterruptible power unit
• Active filter unit for suppressing the power supply harmonic current
For Europe, a power supply unit that can satisfy the requirements on the limits for harmonic
current emissions of the EMC Directives should be selected.
Similar to determining the output capacity of a power supply unit, the capacity of a harmonic
current suppressing unit must be determined in consultation with the power supply unit suppli-
er.

Blank Page
xvii
Copyright and Trademark Notices

n All Rights Reserved
The copyright of the programs and online manuals contained in the software medium of the
Software Product shall remain in YOKOGAWA.
You are allowed to print the required pages of the online manuals for the purposes of using or
operating the Product; however, reprinting or reproducing the entire document is strictly pro-
hibited by the Copyright Law.
Except as stated above, no part of the online manuals may be reproduced, transferred, sold,
or distributed to a third party in any manner (either in electronic or written form including, with-
out limitation, in the forms of paper documents, electronic media, and transmission via the
network). Nor it may be registered or recorded in the media such as films without permission.
n Trademark Acknowledgements
• CENTUM, ProSafe, Vnet/IP, PRM, Exaopc, and STARDOM are registered trademarks of
YOKOGAWA.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, and Vis-
ual Studio are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
• Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor-
porated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• EtherNet/IP is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA).
• in fieldbus is a registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation.
• HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
• MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
• Memocon-SC is a registered trademark of Yaskawa Electric Corporation.
• Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric SA.
• PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
• PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization.
• SIEMENS and SIMATIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd.
• SmartPlant is a registered trademark of Intergraph Corporation.
• SYSMAC is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation.
• All other company and product names mentioned in the User's Manuals are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
• We do not use TM or ® mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in the
User's Manuals.
• We do not use logos in the User's Manuals.

Blank Page
TocA-1
IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition
CONTENTS
PART-A Input & Output Device for RIO
A1. Input & Output Device Configuration...............................................A1-1
A1.1 Node Positioning and Property................................................................ A1-2
A1.2 Configuration of Input & Output Devices................................................ A1-4
A2. I/O Module Nests................................................................................A2-1
A2.1 Types of I/O Module Nests........................................................................ A2-2
A2.1.1 Model AMN11, AMN12 Nest for Analog I/O Modules.................. A2-3
A2.1.2 Model AMN21 Nest for Relay I/O Modules.................................. A2-4
A2.1.3 Model AMN31 Nest for Terminal I/O Modules..............................A2-5
A2.1.4 Model AMN32 Nest for Connector I/O Modules...........................A2-6
A2.1.5 Model AMN33 Nest for Communication Modules........................ A2-7
A2.1.6 Model AMN34 Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Modules...........
..................................................................................................... A2-8
A2.1.7 Model AMN51 Nest for Communication Cards............................ A2-9
A2.1.8 Model AMN52 Nest for Communication Module (for PROFIBUS-DP)
................................................................................................... A2-10
A2.2 Power Supply Wiring of I/O Module Nests.............................................A2-11
A2.3 Installation Restrictions for the Module Nests......................................A2-13
A2.3.1 Installation Restrictions for the Cabinet Installation Type Node..........
................................................................................................... A2-14
A2.3.2 Installation Restrictions for the 19” Rack Mountable Type Node.........
................................................................................................... A2-16
A3. Input & Output Modules.................................................................... A3-1
A3.1 Combination of I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules................................A3-2
A3.2 Types of Input & Output Modules.............................................................A3-4
A3.2.1 Analog I/O Module....................................................................... A3-5
A3.2.2 Relay I/O Module....................................................................... A3-10
A3.2.3 Multiplexer Module.....................................................................A3-12
A3.2.4 Digital I/O Module...................................................................... A3-15
A3.2.5 Communication Module............................................................. A3-18
A3.2.6 Communication Cards............................................................... A3-19
A3.2.7 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module........................................ A3-20
A3.3 Initialization Settings of I/O Modules..................................................... A3-21

TocA-2
A4. Signal Cable Wiring to I/O Modules................................................. A4-1
A4.1 Common Item for Signal Cable Connection............................................ A4-2
A4.1.1 Procedure Signal Cable Terminal Connection............................. A4-3
A4.1.2 Connection of Signal Cable (Connector Type).............................A4-4
A4.1.3 Types of Signal Cable.................................................................. A4-5
A4.2 Wiring of I/O Modules................................................................................ A4-6
A4.2.1 Wiring of Analog I/O Module........................................................ A4-7
A4.2.2 Wiring of Relay I/O Module........................................................ A4-11
A4.2.3 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (Terminal Type)............................A4-12
A4.2.4 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (Connector Type).........................A4-13
A4.2.5 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (Terminal Type)............................. A4-14
A4.2.6 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (Connector Type).......................... A4-15
A4.3 Wiring of Communication Module..........................................................A4-17
A4.3.1 RS-232C Communication Module............................................. A4-18
A4.3.2 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module...................................A4-24
A4.3.3 Wiring of Fieldbus Communication Module............................... A4-29
A4.3.4 Signal Cable Wiring to Communication Cards...........................A4-32
A4.3.5 Wiring of Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module......................... A4-35
A5. Maintenance of Input & Output Devices.......................................... A5-1
A5.1 Routine Maintenance of Input & Output Devices....................................A5-2
A5.1.1 Routine Maintenance by Checking Status Lamps....................... A5-3
A5.1.2 Inspection Using LFCS Status Display View................................A5-5
A5.2 Mounting and Demounting of NIU RIO bus Interface Slave Cards and
Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... A5-6
A5.3 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Modules..............................................A5-8
A5.3.1 Mounting and Demounting of Analog I/O Modules...................... A5-9
A5.3.2 Mounting and Demounting of Terminal Type and Connector Type I/O
Modules..................................................................................... A5-10
A5.4 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Module Nests................................... A5-12
A5.5 RIO bus Interface Slave Card..................................................................A5-14
A5.6 Parts Replacement...................................................................................A5-16
CMPL 33G06K10-11E (ANS50, AND50)........................................... CMPL A1-1

TocB-1
CONTENTS
PART-B Input & Output Device for FIO
B1. Input/Output Device Configuration and Preparation before
Installation.......................................................................................... B1-1
B1.1 Node in FCS Architecture..........................................................................B1-2
B1.2 Types and Configuration of Node Units...................................................B1-7
B1.3 Installation of Node Units........................................................................ B1-11
B1.4 Power Supply Wiring and Grounding.................................................... B1-14
B1.4.1 Power Supply Wiring..................................................................B1-15
B1.4.2 Grounding.................................................................................. B1-17
B2. Input/Output Devices (For FIO).........................................................B2-1
B2.1 Installation Restrictions and Precautions............................................... B2-2
B2.2 Types of Input/Output Devices............................................................... B2-10
B2.3 Common Section......................................................................................B2-13
B2.3.1 Power Supply Module................................................................ B2-14
B2.3.2 ESB Bus Slave Interface Module (Model SB401)......................B2-15
B2.3.3 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module (Model: ANT401,
ANT411)..................................................................................... B2-18
B2.3.4 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module (Model: ANT502, ANT512)
................................................................................................... B2-21
B2.3.5 Cable Connection...................................................................... B2-25
B2.3.6 Connecting ESB Bus Fiber-Optic Cable.................................... B2-27
B2.3.7 ER Bus Interface Master Module (Model: EB401)..................... B2-32
B2.3.8 ER Bus Interface Slave Module (Model: EB501)....................... B2-33
B2.3.9 ER Bus Cable Connection......................................................... B2-37
B2.4 Analog Input/Output Modules.................................................................B2-40
B2.5 Digital Input/Output Modules.................................................................. B2-43
B2.6 Communication Modules........................................................................ B2-44
B2.7 Accessories Related to Input/Output Modules..................................... B2-46
B2.7.1 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks............................................... B2-47
B2.7.2 KS Cable Interface Adapters..................................................... B2-49
B2.7.3 Terminal Boards......................................................................... B2-50
B3. Signal Cable Connection to Input/Output Modules (For FIO)........B3-1
B3.1 Configuration of Input/Output Module Connections.............................. B3-2

TocB-2
B3.2 How to Connect Signal Cables................................................................. B3-7
B3.2.1 Direct-Coupled Connection Using Pressure Clamp Terminals............
..................................................................................................... B3-8
B3.2.2 Connection via Connectors........................................................B3-12
B3.2.3 Connection via MIL Connectors.................................................B3-16
B3.3 Signal Cable Connection to Analog Input/Output Modules................. B3-17
B3.3.1 Analog Input Module, 16-Channel (Model: AAI141, AAI143,
AAV141, AAV142, AAV144)....................................................... B3-19
B3.3.2 Analog Input/Output Module, 8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output
(Model: AAI841, AAB841)..........................................................B3-21
B3.3.3 Analog Output Module, 16-Channel (Model: AAV542, AAI543,
AAV544)..................................................................................... B3-23
B3.3.4 Thermocouple/mV Input Module, 16-Channel, Isolated (Model:
AAT141)..................................................................................... B3-24
B3.3.5 RTD Input Module, 12-Channel, Isolated (Model: AAR181)...... B3-25
B3.3.6 Analog Input Module, 8-Channel Isolated (Model: AAI135).......B3-26
B3.3.7 Analog Input/Output Module, 8-Channel Isolated (Model: AAI835).....
................................................................................................... B3-27
B3.3.8 Pulse Input Module, 8-Channel Isolated (Model: AAP135)........B3-28
B3.3.9 TC/mV Input Module, 16-Channel Isolated (Model: AAT145)..............
................................................................................................... B3-31
B3.3.10 RTD/POT Input Module, 16-Channel Isolated (Model: AAR145)........
................................................................................................... B3-32
B3.3.11 Terminal Board Connections (Analog Input/Output Module)......B3-33
B3.4 Signal Cable Connection to Digital Input/Output Modules.................. B3-37
B3.4.1 Digital Input Module, 32-Channel (Model: ADV151, ADV157)............
................................................................................................... B3-39
B3.4.2 Digital Input Module, 16-Channel (Model: ADV141, ADV142)............
................................................................................................... B3-41
B3.4.3 Digital Output Module, 32-Channel (Model: ADV551, ADV557).........
................................................................................................... B3-42
B3.4.4 Digital Input Module, 64-Channel (Model: ADV161).................. B3-44
B3.4.5 Digital Output Module, 64-Channel (Model: ADV561)............... B3-45
B3.4.6 Digital I/O Module, 16-Channel Input/16-Channel Output (Model:
ADV851).................................................................................... B3-46
B3.4.7 Relay Output Module, 16-Channel (Model: ADR541)................B3-47
B3.4.8 Connection with a Terminal Board (Digital Input/Output Module)........
................................................................................................... B3-48
B3.5 Signal Cable Connection to Communication Modules.........................B3-51
B3.5.1 Signal Cable Connection to RS-232C Communication Module..........
................................................................................................... B3-52
B3.5.2 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module...................................B3-56
B3.5.3 Connection of Ethernet Communication Module....................... B3-60
B3.5.4 Signal Cable Connection to FOUNDATION fieldbus Communication
Module....................................................................................... B3-61
B3.5.5 Connection with Terminal Boards.............................................. B3-65

TocB-3
B3.5.6 Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
(ALP111).................................................................................... B3-67
B3.5.7 Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
(ALP121)....................................................................................B3-69
B3.6 Signal Cable Connection to I/O Module with Built-in Barrier...............B3-71
B3.6.1 Installation of Isolating Partition................................................. B3-72
B3.6.2 Cautions Regarding to Maintenance of I/O Module with Built-in
Barrier........................................................................................ B3-74
B3.6.3 Combinations of Input/Output Module and Terminal Block........ B3-78
B3.6.4 I/O Modules with Built-in Barriers (Models: ASI133, ASI533,
AST143, ASR133, ASD143 and ASD533).................................B3-79
B4. Maintenance of Input & Output Devices (For FIO)..........................B4-1
B4.1 Routine Maintenance of Input/Output Devices....................................... B4-2
B4.1.1 Inspection by Status Display LEDs.............................................. B4-3
B4.1.2 Inspection by KFCS Status Display View.....................................B4-7
B4.1.3 Inspection by FFCS-V Status Display View................................. B4-8
B4.2 Replacing Common Modules....................................................................B4-9
B4.2.1 Exchange Bus Cables................................................................B4-10
B4.2.2 Replacing Power Supply Modules..............................................B4-11
B4.2.3 Replacing ESB Bus Interface Slave Module..............................B4-12
B4.2.4 Replacing ER Bus Interface Master Module.............................. B4-13
B4.2.5 Replacing ER Bus Interface Slave Module................................ B4-14
B4.2.6 Replacing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module (Model:
ANT401, ANT411)......................................................................B4-15
B4.2.7 Replacing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module (Model:
ANT502, ANT512)..................................................................... B4-16
B4.3 Replacing Input/Output Modules............................................................B4-17
B4.3.1 Notices on Maintenance of FIO Series I/O Modules..................B4-18
B4.3.2 Notices about FIO Series Contact I/O Modules......................... B4-20
B4.3.3 How to Replace Input/Output Modules...................................... B4-21
B4.4 Exchange Node........................................................................................ B4-25
B4.5 Parts Replacement...................................................................................B4-27
B5. Relay Boards (for FIO).......................................................................B5-1
B5.1 Overview..................................................................................................... B5-2
B5.2 Handling Relay Boards..............................................................................B5-3
B5.3 Names of Individual Parts......................................................................... B5-4
B5.4 Cable Connection.......................................................................................B5-5
B5.4.1 Components.................................................................................B5-6
B5.4.2 Contact Output, Ground Wiring....................................................B5-8
B5.4.3 Wiring Field Equipment................................................................B5-9
B5.5 Circuit Diagrams...................................................................................... B5-18
B5.6 Maintenance............................................................................................. B5-22
B5.6.1 Mounting Relay Boards..............................................................B5-23
B5.6.2 Parts Replacement.................................................................... B5-27

TocB-4
B6. Relay Boards (for RIO and ST compatible FIO).............................. B6-1
B6.1 Overview..................................................................................................... B6-2
B6.2 Handling Relay Boards..............................................................................B6-3
B6.3 Names of Individual Parts......................................................................... B6-4
B6.4.1 Components.................................................................................B6-6
B6.4.2 Contact Output, Ground Wiring....................................................B6-8
B6.4.3 Wiring Field Equipment................................................................B6-9
B6.5 Cable Connection and Circuit Diagrams............................................... B6-10
B6.5.1 MRI-114 Relay Input Board........................................................ B6-11
B6.5.2 MRI-124 Relay Input Board....................................................... B6-12
B6.5.7 MRO-114 Relay Output Board................................................... B6-17
B6.5.8 MRO-124 Relay Output Board...................................................B6-18
B6.6 Maintenance............................................................................................. B6-29
B6.6.1 Mounting Relay Boards..............................................................B6-30
B7. Signal Conditioner Cards and Nests................................................B7-1
B7.1 Overview..................................................................................................... B7-2
B7.2 Signal Conditioner Cards/Nests and Name of Each Part....................... B7-5
B7.3.1 Components.................................................................................B7-9
B7.3.2 Power Supply Wiring..................................................................B7-12
B7.3.3 Alarm Output for AC Power Supply Units and Grounding......... B7-14
B7.3.4 Wiring Field Equipment..............................................................B7-16
B7.4 Maintenance............................................................................................. B7-18
B7.4.1 Mounting Signal Conditioner Nest............................................. B7-19
B7.4.2 Replacing Signal Conditioner Cards.......................................... B7-22

TocB-5
B7.5 Setting on BRAIN Terminal..................................................................... B7-29
B7.5.1 BRAIN Terminal......................................................................... B7-30
B7.5.2 Using BRAIN Terminal............................................................... B7-34
B7.5.3 Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards.................................. B7-37
B7.5.4 Setting Signal Conditioner Communication Card Parameters.............
................................................................................................... B7-46
CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E (ANB10S, ANB10D)......................................CMPL B1-1
CMPL 33Q06Q10-32E (ANR10S, ANR10D)......................................CMPL B2-1
CMPL 33K50F30-50E (ANB11S, ANB11D).......................................CMPL B3-1
CMPL 33K50F50-50E (ANT10U)....................................................... CMPL B4-1
CMPL 33Q06R90-31E (ARMxx, ARSxx)...........................................CMPL B5-1
CMPL 33Y06K50-31E (Terminal Blocks, Terminal Boards, Relay Boards)
..................................................................................................CMPL B6-1
CMPL 33Y06V10-31E (MHC, MHM).................................................. CMPL B7-1

Blank Page
<A1. Input & Output Device Configuration> A1-1
A1. Input & Output Device

Configuration
In this chapter, the Input & output devices (for RIO) used for CENTUM VP are explained.
TIP The FCS (for RIO) of CENTUM VP consists of the following models.
• PFCS-S
Field Control Station Standard Type
• PFCS-E
Field Control Station Enhanced Type
• PFCD-S
Duplexed Field Control Station Standard Type
• PFCD-E
Duplexed Field Control Station Enhanced Type
• PFCS-H
Field Control Station Compact Type
• PFCD-H
Duplexed Field Control Station Compact Type
• AFS10S/AFG10S
Field Control Unit (for RIO, 19” Rack Mountable Type)
• AFS10D/AFG10D
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, 19” Rack Mountable Type)
• AFS20S/AFG20S
Field Control Unit (for RIO, with Cabinet)
• AFS20D/AFG20D
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, with Cabinet)
Hereinafter, standard type field control stations and enhanced type field control stations (both PFCS and
PFCD) are referred to as PFCS, compact type field control stations (both PFCS and PFCD) are referred to as
SFCS. The field control stations AFS10S/AFG10S, AFS10D/AFG10D and AFS20S/AFG20S, AFS20D/
AFG20D are all referred to as LFCS2/LFCS.
The difference of AFS and AFG is that they have different sizes of main memory.

<A1.1 Node Positioning and Property> A1-2
A1.1 Node Positioning and Property

The node here stand for the communication devices that perform the processing of conver-
sion and transmission of the field process signals to the field control unit (FCU).
The terms FCU and FCS are both used in this manual, the difference between them is that
FCS include FCU and communications nodes.
n FCS Hardware Configuration and Node Positioning : LFCS2/LFCS

The FCS is a control system designed to perform regulatory or sequence controls over the
terminal devices. It has an interface function to convert process I/O signals from fields into the
data handled inside the system.
An FCS consists of an FCU which performs data processing tasks, up to 8 nodes, and a re-
mote I/O (RIO) bus that connects each node to the FCU.
FCU
RIO bus
FCS
Node 2
Node 1 Node 8
Analog I/O Contact I/O Analog I/O
Figure A1.1-1 FCS Hardware Configuration and Node Positioning
n Role and Features of the Node : LFCS2/LFCS

The node transfers process I/O signals, such as analog and digital signals, from the field to
the FCU via RIO bus cables, or vice versa, converting to data that is readable inside the FCS.
Nodes are categorized into two types: the cabinet installation type and the 19” rack mountable
type. Both types of nodes can be connected to the FCU and configured in various ways. This
allows the user to configure the FCS to meet the installation conditions of the site.
For example, an FCU and some cabinet installation type nodes may be installed in a cabinet
located in the central control room, while rack-mountable type nodes can be installed on the
floor of each plant.

<A1.1 Node Positioning and Property> A1-3
FCU
Cabinet RIO bus

Installation
Type Node
Central Control Room
19" Rack Mountable

Type Node
Optical Bus Repeater
19" Rack Mountable

Type Node
19" Rack Mountable

Type Node
19" Rack Mountable

Type Node
Figure A1.1-2 An Example of Node Configuration
n Configuring Devices of the Node : LFCS2/LFCS

The node is configured by a single node interface unit (NIU) and multiple process I/O units
(IOU).
The IOU is configured by the I/O module nest and I/O module.
Analog I/O
Analog I/O Module Module Nest
NIU
Node
IOU
Example of Analog I/O Module and Nest
Figure A1.1-3 Configuring Devices of the Node

<A1.2 Configuration of Input & Output Devices> A1-4
A1.2 Configuration of Input & Output Devices

This chapter explains how to configure the I/O devices and how to install the I/O devices.
The Cabinet Installation type I/O devices can be mounted in a cabinet; The Rack Mountable
type I/O devices can be mounted in a rack or installed in a general-purpose instrumentation
panels or mounted in a Compact Type Field Control Station.
n Cabinet Installation Type Node : LFCS2/LFCS
Cabinet Installation Type

Node Interface Unit
I/O Module Nest

IOU
I/O Module
Node
I/O Module Nest
IOU
I/O Module
Cabinet Installation Type Node Node Configuration Example
Figure A1.2-1 Cabinet Installation Type Node
The cabinets for holding I/O nodes are largely two types. The cabinet with the field control unit
(hereinafter referred to as the cabinet with FCU) and the cabinet for expansion I/O nodes. Ei-
ther type of cabinets can be put together in a row or stand-alone.
n 19” Rack Mountable Node : LFCS2/LFCS

The 19” Rack Mountable Nodes are suitable to be installed in the places like instrumentation
panels, standard cabinets or local control boxes.

I/O Module Nest

IOU
I/O Module
I/O Module Nest
IOU
I/O Module
Figure A1.2-2 Node Installation Using 19” Rack Mountable Type NIU
n Compact Type Field Control Stations : PFCS/SFCS

The Compact Type Field Control Stations are suitable to be installed in the places like instru-
mentation panels, standard cabinets or local control boxes.
The figure below shows an example of Compact FCS installed with I/O devices.

Control bus Coupler
Processor
I/O Module Nest

IOU
I/O Module
Figure A1.2-3 Installation Compact Type FCS

<A2. I/O Module Nests> A2-1
A2. I/O Module Nests

I/O module nests are box-shaped nests used for installing multiple I/O modules.

<A2.1 Types of I/O Module Nests> A2-2
A2.1 Types of I/O Module Nests

There are nine types of I/O module nests, as the table below shows.
Table A2.1-1 I/O Module Nests

Models Model Names
AMN11 Nest for Analog I/O Modules
AMN12 (*1) High-Speed Nest for Analog I/O Modules
AMN21 Nest for Relay I/O Modules
AMN31 Nest for Terminal I/O Modules
AMN32 Nest for Connector I/O Modules
AMN33 Nest for Communication I/O Modules
AMN34 Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Modules
AMN51 Nest for Communication Cards
AMN52 Nest for PROFIBUS-DP Communication Modules
*1: AMN12 is only apply to LFCS2/LFCS.

A2.1.1 Model AMN11, AMN12 Nest for Analog I/O Modules

The analog I/O module nest is a dedicated receptacle for multiple analog I/O modules.
One analog I/O module nest can accommodate up to 16 I/O modules.
Mounting Screw (4 places)
Connector
(CN1) Name Plate
Terminal Unit Cover Connector

(Front) (Rear)
Figure A2.1.1-1 External View of Analog I/O Module Nest
CN1 is an auxiliary voltage output connector used for outputting signals between 1 and 5 V
DC to a recorder. CN1 requires a dedicated cable (Model: AKB301).
This connector can be used, for example, by connecting it to a terminal block (TE16), that is
connected to a recorder, with the cable Model AKB301.
Table A2.1.1-1 List of I/O Modules Installable in Analog I/O Module Nest
Types Models Names
Analog I/O modules AAM10 Current/voltage input module (Simplified
type)
AAM11 Current/voltage input module
AAM11B Current/voltage input module (supports
BRAIN)
AAM21 mV, thermocouple, RTD input module
AAM21J mV, thermocouple, RTD input module
APM11 Pulse input module
AAM50 Current output module
AAM51 Current/voltage output module
Model AMN12 is a high-speed nest for analog I/O modules. This model can be applied in
LFCS2 and LFCS.
However, there are installation restrictions for this AMN12.
SEE
ALSO For more information about these restriction, refer to:
A2.3.2, “Installation Restrictions for the 19” Rack Mountable Type Node” on page A2-16

A2.1.2 Model AMN21 Nest for Relay I/O Modules

Relay I/O modules are installed in relay I/O module nests.
Either one of the relay input module Model ADM15R or the relay output module Model
ADM55R can be installed in this nest.
Name Plate
Figure A2.1.2-1 External View of Relay I/O Module Nest
Table A2.1.2-1 List of I/O Modules Installable in Relay I/O Module Nest
Types Models Names
Relay input module ADM15R Relay input module
Relay output module ADM55R Relay output module

A2.1.3 Model AMN31 Nest for Terminal I/O Modules

Multiplexer modules and digital I/O modules (terminal type) can be installed in the terminal I/O
module nest.
Up to two I/O modules can be installed in the nest. A combination of multiplexer modules and
digital I/O modules, however, cannot be installed in the same nest.
Name Plate
Figure A2.1.3-1 External View of Terminal I/O Module Nest
Table A2.1.3-1 List of I/O Modules Installable in Terminal I/O Module Nest
Types Models Names
Multiplexer module AMM12T Voltage input multiplexer module
AMM22M mV input multiplexer module
AMM22T Thermocouple input multiplexer module
AMM22TJ Thermocouple input multiplexer module
AMM32T RTD input multiplexer module
AMM32TJ RTD input multiplexer module
AMM42T 2-wire transmitter input multiplexer module
AMM52T Current output multiplexer module
Digital I/O module ADM11T Contact input module (16-point, terminal type)
ADM12T Contact input module (32-point, terminal type)
ADM51T Contact output module (16-point, terminal
type)
ADM52T Contact output module (32-point, terminal
type)

A2.1.4 Model AMN32 Nest for Connector I/O Modules

Voltage input Multiplexer module (connector type) and Digital I/O modules (connector type)
can be installed in the connector I/O module nest.
Up to 4 I/O modules can be installed in one nest.
Shield Connecting Name Plate

Screw Terminal
Figure A2.1.4-1 External View of Connector I/O Module Nest
Table A2.1.4-1 List of I/O Modules Installable in Connector I/O Module Nest
Types Models Names
Multiplexer module AMM12C Voltage input Multiplexer module (16 Points)
AMM22C mV input Multiplexer module (16 Points)
AMM25C Thermocouple input Multiplexer module (15
Points)
AMM32C RTD input Multiplexer module (16 Points)
AMM32CJ RTD input Multiplexer module (16 Points)
Digital I/O module ADM11C Contact input module (16 Points)
ADM12C Contact input module (32 Points)
ADM51C Contact output module (16 Points)
ADM52C Contact output module (32 Points)

A2.1.5 Model AMN33 Nest for Communication Modules

Communication modules are installed in the communication module nest.
Up to two modules can be installed in one nest.
Name Plate
(Front)
Figure A2.1.5-1 External View of Communication Module Nest
Table A2.1.5-1 List of I/O Modules Installable in Communication Module Nest

Type Model Name
Communication module ACM11 RS-232C Communication module
ACM12 RS-422/RS-485 Communication
module
ACF11 Fieldbus Communication Module

A2.1.6 Model AMN34 Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O

Modules
Multipoint control analog I/O modules are installed in the nest for multipoint control analog I/O
modules.
Up to two modules can be installed in one nest.
Shield Connecting Name Plate

Screw Terminal (Front)
Figure A2.1.6-1 External View of Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
Table A2.1.6-1 List of I/O Modules Installable in Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module Nest
Type Model Name
Multipoint control analog I/O Mod- AMC80 Multipoint control analog I/O Mod-
ule ule

A2.1.7 Model AMN51 Nest for Communication Cards

Communication card can be installed in the communication card nest.
Up to two communication modules can be installed in one nest.
n Nest for Communication Card : PFCS/SFCS
Figure A2.1.7-1 External View of Communication Cards Nest
Table A2.1.7-1 List of Communication Card in Communication Cards Nest

Models Names
ACM21 RS-232C Communication Card
ACM22 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Card
ACM71 Ethernet Communication Module

A2.1.8 Model AMN52 Nest for Communication Module (for

PROFIBUS-DP)
Communication module can be installed in the communication module nest.
Up to four communication modules can be installed in one nest.
n Nest for Communication Module (for PROFIBUS-DP) : PFCS/SFCS
Figure A2.1.8-1 External View of Communication Module Nest
Table A2.1.8-1 List of Communication Module in Communication Module Nest

Type Model Name
Communication Module ACP71 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
l Nest Configuration
The following explains the nest configuration when an ACP71 is mounted.
• The ACP71 is mounted in nest 1.
• Nest 2 will not be used.
CPU
Nest 1
Nest 3 Nest 4 Nest 5
Figure A2.1.8-2 Nest Configuration

<A2.2 Power Supply Wiring of I/O Module Nests> A2-11
A2.2 Power Supply Wiring of I/O Module Nests

This chapter describes the power supply wiring of I/O module nests.
n Power Supply Wiring of Cabinet Installation Type Node : LFCS2/

LFCS
Connect the cable connector from the power unit on the NIU to the connector on the power
distribution board.
A different connection must be made if the node has a dual-redundant installation. The figure
below shows a node that is dual-redundant. If the node is not dual-redundant, connect the ca-
ble connector from the power unit to the connector on the distribution board at the left, when
viewed from the front.
Power Distribution Board
Cabinet Installation
Type Node
Power Supply Unit
Front Rear
NIU Power
Supply
Cable
IOU
NIU Power
Supply IOU IOU
Cable
Signal Cable
Signal Cable Binding IOU IOU

(Front 9, Rear 12)
Figure A2.2-1 Power Supply Cable Connection to the Cabinet Installation Type Node (dual-redundant)

<A2.2 Power Supply Wiring of I/O Module Nests> A2-12
n Power Supply Wiring for Rack Mountable Type NIU : LFCS2/LFCS

The power supply input terminals of Rack Mountable NIU are placed in the bottom of the rack
where the I/O module nest installed. The power cable may be connected to the terminals. The
power for NIU are wired via the connector in the middle of the bracket installed inside.
Power supply unit
Power supply input connector
NIU power terminals

L N
Power input Grounding

terminal terminal
(terminal screw: M4)
Figure A2.2-2 Power Supply Wiring for Rack Mountable Type NIU
n Power Supply Wiring for Compact Type Field Control Stations :

PFCS/SFCS
The power supply input terminals of Compact Field Control Stations are placed on the power
distribution board next to the right of the bracket where the I/O module nest installed. The
power cable may be connected to the terminals.
Power input terminal
TM1
power supply unit L

Power input terminal
N
Power distribution Grounding terminal

board
(terminal screw: M4)
I/O module
Figure A2.2-3 Power Supply Wiring for Compact Type Field Control Stations

<A2.3 Installation Restrictions for the Module Nests> A2-13
A2.3 Installation Restrictions for the Module

Nests
The installation restrictions for the I/O module nests are described here.

A2.3.1 Installation Restrictions for the Cabinet Installation

Type Node
There are restrictions placed on the mounting positions when the high-speed nest for analog
I/O modules, or the multiplexer module is used.
n Installation Restrictions for the High-Speed Nest for Analog I/O

Modules Model AMN12 : LFCS2/LFCS
One analog I/O module nest Model AMN12 uses four I/O buses. If installing this type of nest,
observe the restrictions below.
IMPORTANT
• Model AMN12 must be installed in the No.1 nest of a node.
• If Model AMN12 is installed in the No.1 nest, no I/O module nest can be installed in the
nests No.2 to No.4 below.
• If Model AMN12 is installed in a cabinet installation type node, another type of I/O module
nest can be installed only in the No.5 nest at the rear of a cabinet with FCU or in an I/O
expansion cabinet.
Model AMN12 Model AMN12
No.1 Nest No.1 Nest
No.2 Nest No.2 Nest
No.3 Nest Empty No.3 Nest Empty
No.4 Nest No.4 Nest

I/O Module Nest
other than Model AMN12
No.5 Nest
Node on the Front of Node on the Rear of

Cabinet with FCU Cabinet with FCU
Figure A2.3.1-1 Installation Restrictions for the High-Speed Nest for Analog I/O Modules Model
AMN12 (cabinet installation type node)
n Installation Restrictions When Using Thermocouple Input

Multiplexer Modules : LFCS2/LFCS
Thermocouple input multiplexer modules (Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ) is easily affected by
heat radiated from analog I/O or other I/O modules. This may cause errors in the temperature
information input from the Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ module terminal. Therefore, when using
a Model AMM22T/AMN22TJ module, observe the following.

IMPORTANT
Install Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ from the bottom part of the node.
Impossible Possible
AMM22T/AMM22TJ Module
I/O Module Nests other than

AMM22T/AMM22TJ Modules
I/O Module Nests other than

AMM22T/AMM22TJ Modules
Figure A2.3.1-2 Installation Restrictions When Using Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Modules (cabi-
net installation type node)

A2.3.2 Installation Restrictions for the 19” Rack Mountable

Type Node
There are restrictions placed on the mounting positions when the high-speed nest for analog
I/O modules, or the multiplexer module is used.
n Installation Restrictions for the High-Speed Nest for Analog I/O

Modules Model AMN12 : LFCS2/LFCS
The analog I/O module high-speed nests Model AMN12 uses 4 bus lines. Therefore, when
installing the analog I/O module nest Model AMN12, observe the following.
IMPORTANT
• Always mount Model AMN12 on the No.1 nest of the node.
• Never mount Model AMN12 on the nests No.2 to No.4.
• On a 19” rack mountable type node if you mount an I/O module nest that is not Model
AMN12 together with Model AMN12, always mount it on the No.5 nest.
No.1 Nest No.2 Nest
Model AMN12
Empty
I/O Module Nest other

than Model AMN12
Empty Empty
3rd Nest 4th Nest 5th Nest
Figure A2.3.2-1 Installation Restrictions for the High-speed Nest for Analog I/O Modules Model AMN12
(19” rack mountable type node)
n Installation Restrictions When Using Thermocouple Input

Thermocouple input multiplexer modules (Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ) is easily affected by
heat radiated from analog I/O or other I/O modules. This may cause errors in the temperature
information input from the Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ module terminal. Therefore, when using
a Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ module, observe the following.

IMPORTANT
Do not install an I/O module other than the Model AMM22T/AMM22TJ module or heat-radiat-
ing device beneath the existing AMM22T/AMM22TJ module. If a heat-radiating device must
be installed beneath the AMM22T/AMM22TJ module, provide a heat shield to block heat
transmission.
Impossible Possible
AMM22T/AMM22TJ I/O Module Nest

Modules other than
AMM22T/AMM22TJ
Module
AMM22T/AMM22TJ
I/O Module Nest other than Modules Shield Plate
Heat-Radiating
Impossible Device
AMM22T/AMM22TJ
Modules
Heat-Radiating
Device
Figure A2.3.2-2 Installation Restrictions When Using Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Modules
n Connector Type IOU Cable Processing

After a cable is connected to the Connector Type IOU, run the cable below, tuck the excess
cord toward the back of the nest and to the left. To prevent a cable from touching a door fan, a
cable must be bent.
This processing is required for maintenance of card (for inserting and removing a card).

Cable processing to the lowest

space of the cabinet
(Connector type)
60 mm
Fix to clamp bar on

channel base
Figure A2.3.2-3 Connector Type IOU Cable Processing

<A3. Input & Output Modules> A3-1
A3. Input & Output Modules

The I/O modules convert the analog or digital signals from the field equipment then pass to
field control stations or vise versa to convert the signals from the field control station to the
signals for the field equipment.
The I/O module can be categorized into the following seven main types, which in turn can be
divided into complex subtypes.
• Analog I/O module
• Multipoint control analog I/O module
• Relay I/O module
• Multiplexer module
• Digital I/O module
• Communication module
• Communication card
TIP When the accuracy of the Analog Input Module (Model: AAM10, AAM11/AAM11B or AAM21/AAM21J) is to be
verified on the site, it is recommended to carry out the verification by monitoring the output voltage of the DC
Voltage/Current Standard without using the DC Voltage/Current Standard independently.

<A3.1 Combination of I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules> A3-2
A3.1 Combination of I/O Module Nests and I/O

Modules
The different types of I/O modules may be installed in different I/O module nests. The varies
combinations are possible. The allowed combinations are listed in the following table.
Table A3.1-1 List of Combinations and Max. No. Installable of I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules (1/2)
I/O Nest Model Name
(max. no. installable into the I/O Module Nests)
Models Model Names
AMN11,1
AMN21 AMN31 AMN32 AMN34
2
— Analog I/O Module
AAM10 Current/Voltage Input Module (Simplified Total of — — — —
type) 16 can
be in-
AAM11 Current/Voltage Input Module stalled — — — —
AAM11B Current/Voltage Input Module (supports — — — —
BRAIN)
AAM21 mV, Thermocouple, and RTD Input Mod- — — — —
ule
AAM21J mV, Thermocouple, and RTD Input Mod- — — — —
(*1) ule
APM11 Pulse Input Module — — — —
AAM50 Current Output Module — — — —
AAM51 Current/Voltage Output Module — — — —
AMC80 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module — — — — Total of
2
— Relay I/O Module
ADM15R Relay Input Module — Total of — — —
1
ADM55R Relay Output Module — — — —
— Multiplexer Module (16 Points, Terminal Type)
AMM12T Voltage Input Multiplexer Module ― ― Total of 2 Total of ―
2
AMM22M mV Input Multiplexer Module ― ― ―
AMM22T Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module ― ― ―
AMM22TJ Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module ― ― ―
(*2)
AMM32T RTD Input Multiplexer Module ― ― 1 ― ―
AMM32TJ RTD Input Multiplexer Module ― ― 1 ― ―
(*3)
AMM42T 2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Mod- ― ― 1 ― ―
ule
AMM52T Current Output Multiplexer Module ― ― 1 ― ―
— Multiplexer Module (16 Points, Connector Type)
AMM12C Voltage Input Multiplexer Module — — — Total of —
2(*4)
AMM22C mV Input Multiplexer Module — — — —
AMM25C Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module — — — —
(15 Points)
AMM32C RTD Input Multiplexer Module — — — —
AMM32CJ RTD Input Multiplexer Module ― ― ― ―
(*3)

<A3.1 Combination of I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules> A3-3
*1: Supports IEC584-1995 (thermocouple), and supports IEC751-1995 (RTD)
*2: Supports IEC584-1995
*3: Supports IEC751-1995
*4: Up to 4 modules can be installed in PFCS/PFCD.
Table A3.1-2 List of Combinations and Max. No. Installable of I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules (2/2)
I/O Nest Model Name
Models Model Names (max. no. installable into the I/O Module Nests)
AMN31 AMN32 AMN33 AMN51 AMN52
— Digital I/O Module
ADM11T Contact Input Module (16 Points, Termi- Total of 2 — — — —
nal Type)
ADM12T Contact Input Module (32 Points, Termi- — — — —
nal Type)
ADM51T Contact Output Module (16 Points, Ter- — — — —
minal Type)
ADM52T Contact Output Module (32 Points, Ter- — — — —
minal Type)
ADM11C Contact Input Module (16 Points, Con- — Total of 4 — — —
nector Type)
ADM12C Contact Input Module (32 Points, Con- — — — —
nector Type)
ADM51C Contact Output Module (16 Points, — — — —
Connector Type)
ADM52C Contact Output Module (32 Points, — — — —
Connector Type)
— Communication Module
ACM11 RS-232C Communication Module — — Total of 2 — —
ACM12 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Mod- — — — —
ule
ACF11 Fieldbus Communication Module — — — —
— Communication Card
ACM21 RS-232C Communication Card — — — Total of 2 —
ACM22 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Card — — — —
ACM71 Ethernet Communication Module — — — —
— Communication Module
ACP71 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module — — — — Total of 4
TIP To use the AAM11B module, an optional software package is available for sensor parameter setting.
For optional packages, please contact us.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the conditions to install I/O modules , refer to:
GS 33K55R30-50E, “I/O Module Nests, I/O Modules (for RIO).”

<A3.2 Types of Input & Output Modules> A3-4
A3.2 Types of Input & Output Modules

The I/O modules may be classified as described in the previous page. This section describes
the utilization of the different modules and the utilization of different combinations.

A3.2.1 Analog I/O Module

The analog I/O module inputs and outputs analog signals and converts signals.
Since the type and range of the I/O signals are software-specified, no control switch or knob
is found on this module.
Connector
Name Plate
Status Display Lamp Ejector
Figure A3.2.1-1 External View of the Analog I/O Module
Table A3.2.1-1 Analog I/O Module Types

Models Names
AAM10 Current/voltage input module (simplified type)
AAM11 Current/voltage input module
AAM11B Current/voltage input module (supports BRAIN)
AAM21 mV, thermocouple, RTD input module
AAM21J mV, thermocouple, RTD input module
APM11 Pulse input module
AAM50 Current output module
AAM51 Current/voltage output module
n Current/Voltage Input Modules Models AAM10

While this module mainly converts standardized input signals (1 - 5 V) or signals from the two-
wire transmitter (4 - 20 mA).
n Current/Voltage Input Modules Models AAM11/AAM11B

While this module mainly converts standardized input signals (1 - 5 V) or signals from the two-
wire transmitter (4 - 20 mA), it can accept a wide range of other types of signals.
n mV, Thermocouple and Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)

Input Module Model AAM21/AAM21J
It converts input signals from mV, thermocouple, resistance temperature detector or slide
rheostat. To use Model AAM21/AAM21J with thermocouple input, a temperature compensa-
tion module (RJC unit, a separate order) is required.
Name Plate
Figure A3.2.1-2 External View of the Temperature Compensation Module

n Current/Voltage Output Module Model AAM50

It converts and outputs the variation of current between 4 - 20 mA.
Model AAM50 can be used in dual-redundant scheme.
n Current/Voltage Output Module Model AAM51

It converts and outputs the variation of current between 4 - 20 mA or the variation in voltage
between 0 and 10 V.
Current Output mode AAM51 can be used in dual-redundant scheme.
When Models AAM50, AAM51 is set to the current output mode, a dual-redundant specifica-
tion becomes possible. When two Models AAM50, AAM51 are installed in consecutive slots
starting with an odd number (1 - 2, 3 - 4, . . . . 13 - 14, 15 - 16), both models must be set to a
dual-redundant specification. When it is dual-redundant, the outputs must be consistent, thus,
the consecutive A and C terminals must be connected (see figure below).
A short-bar for jumping the two terminals can be ordered with the parts number of A1534JT.
An AAM50 and an AAM51 cannot form a dual-redundant pair.
AMN11/AMN12
Other AAM
3A 3C
3B
AAM51
4A 4C
AAM51
4B
Other AAM
The figure shows Model AAM51

in slots 3, 4 as being dual-redundant.
Figure A3.2.1-3 Dual-Redundant Current Output
When using a SPBD standby manual station, connect the station with an AKB311 cable to
AAM50 current output module, AAM51 current/voltage Output Module to the station using an
AKB311 cable.
AAM50, AAM51 Side SPBD Side
Figure A3.2.1-4 AKB311 Cable
n Pulse Input Module Model APM11

This module receives and calculates contact pulse, voltage pulse and current pulse from
fields. It also carries out signal conversion of input signals to isolated transistor contact pul-
ses, and outputs these as an auxiliary output.

This module has an internal power supply for transmitter which is isolated from the instrument
power supply. The load resistance is set with the system generation function to be in line with
the transmitter specifications. After waveform shaping of the pulse inputs, the photo coupler
extracts the I/O isolation and outputs them.
As the Yes/No of the input filter can be selected from the system generation function, it can be
used to receive signals with a large amount of chattering, such as relay contacts.
The transistor outputs are open-collector outputs.
When the voltage level of the input signal is High, transistor output is OFF, when Low, it turns
ON.
Figures show connection of the pulse input module to the input terminal.
n Common Items
The settings for a pulse input module vary with the module type and requirements. The com-
mon items are shown as follows.
• The output signals are output via the CN1 connector of AMN11 module nest.
• Power supply of transmitter 12 V DC or 24 V DC can be selected, by entering
VTTSEL=12 or VTTSEL=24 in system generation builders. The default setting is 12.
• FIL in the drawing stands for input filter. When the pulse input signal is a dry contact
(such as from a mechanical relay) up to 10 Hz, and there is chattering or noise, turn the
filter switch ON from the system generation builder to eliminate the noise. The default set-
ting on the builder is OFF.
• RL in the drawing stands for terminating resistor. Refer to the descriptions of the circuits,
select None, 200 ohm, 510 ohm or 1 k ohm in the system generation builder.
n When Receiving No-Voltage Contact Signals (1)

For relay or transistor contacts, the wirings are shown in the figure below. The frequency is in
the range of 0 and 800 Hz. (The highest frequency varies with the actual wirings.)
Pullup Resistor
APM11
A 12 V DC/24 V DC
Transmitter
B
+
SW1 SW2 OUTPUT
C RL FIL -
Setting Items from Builder

RL: OFF (No terminating resistor)
(SW1:OFF, SW2:ON for relay contact) FIL: ON when necessary (*1)
*1: If the mechanical relay contact signal is chattering, on the system builders, the input filtering option should be
checked for filtering out the chattering.
Figure A3.2.1-5 No-Voltage Input (1)
n When Receiving No-Voltage Contact Signals (2)

To allow electric current flow in the circuit of relay or transistor contacts, the wiring can be
done as follows. (For a transistor contact, to handle the frequency that is higher than the
above figure [ No-voltage input (1) ], the wiring should be as follows.)

APM11
Transmitter
A 12 V DC/24 V DC
B
+
SW1 OUTPUT
(1 k ohm) SW2
C RL FIL -
RL: 1 k ohm
FIL: ON when necessary (*1)
(SW1: ON, SW2: ON for relay contact)
Figure A3.2.1-6 No-Voltage Input (2)
n When Receiving Voltage Pulse Signals
A 12 V DC/24 V DC
Transmitter
+ B
+
SW1 SW2 OUTPUT
- C RL FIL -

(SW1: OFF, SW2: OFF) FIL: OFF
Figure A3.2.1-7 Voltage Pulse Input
n When Receiving Current Pulse By Using the Internal Power to Drive

the Transmitter (2-wire power supply type)
Transmitter
A 12 V DC/24 V DC
B
+
SW1 SW2 OUTPUT
C RL FIL -
RL: Select One
FIL: OFF
(SW1: ON, RL selection, RL=200 ohm, 510 ohm, 1 k ohm, SW2: OFF)
Figure A3.2.1-8 2-Wire Power Supply Type
This method supplies power to the transmitter, and receives the transmitter output signals as
the current pulse signals. By using the input load resistance (select from Term. None, Term.
200 ohm, Term. 510 ohm, Term. 1 k ohm), the current signal is converted to the voltage level
pulse and receives it.

n When Receiving Voltage Pulse By Using the Internal Power to Drive

the Transmitter (3-wire power supply type)
Transmitter
A 12 V DC/24 V DC
B
+
SW1 SW2 OUTPUT
C RL FIL -

(SW1: OFF, SW2: OFF) FIL: OFF
Figure A3.2.1-9 3-Wire Power Supply Type

A3.2.2 Relay I/O Module

The relay I/O module is configured from the terminal unit and the card unit.
The relay is installed in the terminal unit, and can be replaced without disassembling the mod-
ule.
The relay input has an internal 24 V DC power supply for external supply for input. Input sig-
nals are common.
All 16 relay output points are isolated.
Both input and output modules have LED display lamps which displays the ON/OFF status.
Table A3.2.2-1 Types of Relay I/O Modules

Terminal Unit /Card Unit Names Relay I/O
Models
(*1) Module Names
ADM15R ADT16A (terminal) Relay input module
ADM15 (card)
ADM55R ADT16B (terminal) Relay output module
ADM55 (card)
*1: Terminals and cards can be ordered separately as spare parts.
Card
ADM15R
ADM15
ADM55R
ADM55
Terminal
ADT16A
ADT16B
Figure A3.2.2-1 External View of the Relay I/O Module
Status Display Lamp
RDY ADT16A
ADT16B
Name plate
Figure A3.2.2-2 Relay I/O Module Terminal
The figures below show the circuit diagrams of the relay I/O module inputs and outputs.

ADT16A ADM15
24 V DC
COM
RL1
1C 1A
1B
RL2
External
Contacts 2C 2A
2B
RL16
16C 16A
16B
Figure A3.2.2-3 Relay Input
ADT16B ADM55
Vcc
RL1 GND
1C 1A
1B
RL2
2C 2A
2B
RL16
16C 16A
16B
Figure A3.2.2-4 Relay Output

A3.2.3 Multiplexer Module

The multiplexer module, consisting of a pair of terminal or connector and card units, converts
incoming signals of up to 16 points or outputs signals between 4 and 20 mA. Acceptable input
include DC voltage, potential difference of DC voltage, and signals from the mV, thermocou-
ple, RTD, and two-wire transmitter.
Since the type and range of I/O signals are system generation function, no control switch or
knob is found on this module.
All of the multiplexer modules show below.
Table A3.2.3-1 Multiplexer Module Types

Terminal Unit /Card Unit
Models Multiplexer Module Names
Names (*1)
AMM12T AMT16M (terminal) Voltage input multiplexer module
AMM12 (card)
AMM22M AMT16M (terminal) mV input multiplexer module
AMM22J (card)
AMM22T AMT16T (terminal) Thermocouple input multiplexer module
AMM22 (card)
AMM22TJ AMT16T (terminal) Thermocouple input multiplexer module
AMM22J (card)
AMM32T AMT16R (terminal) RTD input multiplexer module
AMM32 (card)
AMM32TJ AMT16R (terminal) RTD input multiplexer module
AMM32J (card)
AMM42T AMT16M (terminal) 2-wire transmitter input multiplexer module
AMM42 (card)
AMM52T AMT16M (terminal) Output multiplexer module
AMM52 (card)
AMM12C AMC16M (connector) Voltage input multiplexer module
AMM12 (card)
AMM22C AMC16M (connector) mV input multiplexer module
AMM22J (card)
AMM25C AMC16T (connector) Thermocouple input multiplexer module
AMM22J (card)
AMM32C AMC16R (connector) RTD input multiplexer module
AMM32 (card)
AMM32CJ AMC16R (connector) RTD input multiplexer module
AMM32J (card)
*1: Terminals and cards can be ordered separately as spare parts.
There are installation restrictions when using the multiplexer module.

Card
AMM12
AMM22
AMM22J
AMM12T AMM42
AMM22M AMM52
AMM22T
AMM22TJ
AMM42T
AMM52T Terminal
AMT16T, AMT16M
Card
AMM32
AMM32T AMM32J
AMM32TJ
Terminal
AMT16R
Card
AMM12C AMM12
AMM22C AMM22J
AMM25C AMM32
AMM32C AMM32J
AMM32CJ
Connector
AMC16M, AMC16T, AMC16R
Figure A3.2.3-1 External View of the Multiplexer Module and Model Name of Each Part
RDY
RDY Status Display Lamp RDY
AMT16R
Status
Display Lamp
AMT16T
AMT16M CN1
YOKOGAWA
Name Plate
Name Plate
Figure A3.2.3-2 Multiplexer Module Terminal and Connector

SEE
ALSO For more information about the installation restrictions, refer to:
A2.3, “Installation Restrictions for the Module Nests” on page A2-13
n Setting Elements
The 2-wire transmitter input module Model AMM42T has a jumper switch to set or select the
final terminal resistance value.
Table A3.2.3-2 Final Terminal Resistance Value Selection

Final Terminal Resistance
Uses
Value
250 ohm This setting required for default setting
70 ohm This setting required when combined with MTL barrier 787S
All are set at 250 ohm at time of shipment.

The figures below show the position and setting procedure for the final terminal resistance.
AMM42
1CH
1F
2F
2CH
J4
3CH
4CH
CN2 5CH
Connector Setting of final terminal resistance
6CH value with jumper switch
J5
7CH Final terminal resistance value
is set to 250 ohm
8CH
9CH
10CH
J6
11CH
Final terminal resistance value
12CH is set to 70 ohm
13CH
14CH
J7
15CH
16CH
AMM42 Printing Board
Figure A3.2.3-3 Setting Procedure for Model AMM42 Final Terminal Resistance

A3.2.4 Digital I/O Module

The digital I/O module is configured by the card unit and either the terminal unit or connector
unit. It inputs and outputs 16 or 32 signal points and converts signals.
Since the types or I/O signals are software-set, no control switch or knob is found on this
module.
The table below shows the types of digital I/O modules.
Table A3.2.4-1 Digital I/O Module Types

Terminal Unit/Connector Unit/
Models Digital I/O Module Names
Card Unit Names (*1)
ADM11T ADT16 (terminal) Contact input module
ADM11 (card) (16-point, terminal type)
ADM12T ADT32 (terminal) Contact input module
ADM51T ADT16 (terminal) Contact output module
ADM52T ADT32 (terminal) Contact output module
ADM11C ADC16 (connector) Contact input module
ADM11 (card) (16-point, connector type)
ADM12C ADC32 (connector) Contact input module
ADM51C ADC16 (connector) Contact output module
ADM52C ADC32 (connector) Contact output module
*1: Terminals, connectors and cards can be ordered separately.
Card
ADM11
ADM12
ADM11T ADM51
ADM12T ADM52
ADM51T
ADM52T
Terminal
ADT16
ADT32
Figure A3.2.4-1 External View of the Digital I/O Module (terminal type)

RDY Status Display Lamp

1
2
3
4
5
Name Plate
Figure A3.2.4-2 Digital I/O Module Terminal (terminal type)
Card
ADM11
ADM11C ADM12
ADM12C ADM51
ADM51C ADM52
ADM52C
Connector
ADC16
ADC32
Figure A3.2.4-3 External View of the Digital I/O Module (connector type)

RDY
Status Display Lamp
CN1
YOKOGAWA
Name Plate
Figure A3.2.4-4 Digital I/O Module Connector (connector type)

A3.2.5 Communication Module

The communication module connects the subsystem (PLC etc.) to the FCS via the serial com-
munication circuit and carries out control and monitoring of them.
The Fieldbus Communication Module is used to connect fieldbus devices with fieldbus inter-
face.
A single unit or the communication module is configured of the front panel and card unit, and
cannot be disassembled.
Communication Module Name
ACM11 RS-232C Communication Module
ACM12 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module
ACF11 Fieldbus Communication Module
ACP71 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
WARNING
Restriction on the Communication Speed
At the communication speed of 19200 bps, do not combine “no parity” with “7 bits”.
RD
RD RD CT Y
Y Y
RC RC RCL
V V
SN SN SN V
D D D
TW
1
TX
+
TX
-
RX MA
+ IN
T
RX
-
SG
TM
FG 1
CN
1
-
NC
ACM11 ACM12 ACF11 ACP71
Figure A3.2.5-1 External View of the Communication Module
Status Status Status Status

Display Display Display Display
Lamps Lamps Lamps Lamps
RDY RDY RDY RDY

RCV
RDY
RCV RCV
RDY
RCV
CTL RDY
CTL MRDY
SND
SND
SND
SND
RCV RCV
SND MRUN
TW1 SND MERR
TX+
TX- For For

Signal RX+ Maintenance MAINT
Maintenance
Terminal RX-
Connector Connector
SG
TM1
D-sub 9pin
FG
CN1 +
+ Connector
D-sub 25pin -
-
Connector Signal NC
Terminal
NC
(female)
ACM11 ACM12 ACF11 ACP71

Figure A3.2.5-2 Communication Module Connector

A3.2.6 Communication Cards

The communication cards are used to realize the general-purpose communication of field
control station and subsystems via serial links, so that the subsystem may be controlled or
monitored.
n ACM21, ACM22 Communication Cards, ACM71 Communication

Module : PFCS/SFCS
Different from the above mentioned cards, the communication package with subsystems are
prepared for ACM21 and ACM22 so that the general-purpose communication may be conven-
iently realized.
The ACM71 Ethernet communication module receives/sends data from/to subsystems such
as MELSEC via Ethernet.
Communication card models
ACM21 RS-232C communication card
ACM22 RS-422/RS-485 communication card
ACM71 Ethernet communication module
RDY RDY
TM1
RCV Status Display RCV Status Display
SND Lamps SND Lamps
TX+
TX-
RX+
Signal
Terminal RX-
CN1
SG
FG Signal
Connector
CN1
D-sub 25pin
Connector
(female)
ACM21 ACM22 ACM71
Figure A3.2.6-1 Communication Card Connector

A3.2.7 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module

The Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module may multiplex the 8 points 1- 5 V DC analog signals
to digital signals for input, and may multiplex the 8 points digital signals into 4-20 mA DC ana-
log signals for output respectively.
It is not isolated between the system and field nor the terminals.
The action mode of this module may be switched from Single to Dual-redundant or vice versa
by changing software settings. When in dual-redundant mode, two AMC80 modules may be
installed in the same nest (AMN34) to realize the dual-redundant control function.
IMPORTANT
• When AMC80 is connected to the dual-redundant devices such as MHM, the AMC80
must be configured dual-redundant too.
• When dual-redundant is not configured to the AMC80 modules, each module should have
its own MHM connected.
RDY
DX
OUT
CN1
Figure A3.2.7-1 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module Connector
AMC80 may be applied to the following devices.

The devices that compatible with the legacy CENTUM system, MAC2 card are applicable with
AMC80.
• MHM : Signal conditioner nest for control I/O
• MCM : Terminal board for control I/O
• ENM : Signal conditioner nest for control I/O
• ECM : Terminal board for control I/O

<A3.3 Initialization Settings of I/O Modules> A3-21
A3.3 Initialization Settings of I/O Modules

The initial settings regarding the I/O modules will be explained below.
n I/O Module Initial Setting Values

On delivery, the dipswitches on the following I/O modules are already set to the proper posi-
tions for the default settings.
• ACM12
• ACM22
Both of modules are set for 4-wire connections (by setting the dipswitches off).
The settings for other types of modules need to be defined on System View according to the
requirements.
The initial settings need to be confirmed on the IOM builder, or modified if necessary.
SEE
ALSO For more information about setting the dipswitches of the above I/O modules, refer to:
“n ACM12 Setup Elements” on page A4-27
For more information about setting the I/O modules on System View, refer to:
2.5.2, “Creating a New I/O Module” in the Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM 33K03G21-50E)

Blank Page
<A4. Signal Cable Wiring to I/O Modules> A4-1
A4. Signal Cable Wiring to I/O Modules

It is possible to wire the signal cable to the I/O modules to the terminals or via connectors.

<A4.1 Common Item for Signal Cable Connection> A4-2
A4.1 Common Item for Signal Cable Connection

Use shielded twisted-pair cables with a twisting pitch of 50mm or less to prevent interference
from induction, particularly for analog signals. Use twisted pair-cable wherever possible for
cables transmitting digital signals. The shielding of the cables should be grounded by con-
necting to a grounding bar, etc.
Twisted-pair cables, which are quite flexible, are advantageous over rigid cables in small
spaces.
The ends of the cables must have solderless terminals. Solderless terminals are very durable,
have good contact performance, and are more resistant to deterioration over time.
n Signal Cable Termination

• Cable termination
If the process I/O signals are connected through the terminals, the wires connected to the
terminals should use the insulated ring terminals.
• Ring terminal specifications
The specifications of the ring terminal are determined by the nominal cross sectional area
of the cable, the screw size, connector dimensions and so on.
WARNING
• When connecting signal cables to the I/O module (terminal type), the spring terminals
should be used.
• Always use ring terminals with insulating sleeves.
• Always use ring terminals and crimp-on tool manufactured by the same manufacturer.
• The crimp-on tool must be matched to the wire thickness.
Insulating sleeve inside diameter
Hole diameter
C
Ring terminal length
Ring outside diameter
Figure A4.1-1 Ring Terminal
Table A4.1-1 Ring Terminal Dimensions

Nominal Insulating
cross sec- Ring outside
Screw diame- Hole diame- Ring terminal sleeve inside Dimension
tional area diameter
ter(mm) ter (mm) length (mm) diameter "C" (mm)
(mm)
(mm2) (mm)
1.25 4 4.3 or more 8.2 or less approx. 21 3.6 or more 7.0 or more

A4.1.1 Procedure Signal Cable Terminal Connection

1. Open the terminal unit cover.
2. Loosen the screws of the cable connecting terminals.
3. Open the spring mount so that there is clearance by inserting the end of the cable’s sol-
derless terminal between the screw and spring mount. There should be a clearance of
approximately 2 mm between the screw and the spring mount.
4. Insert the cable’s solderless terminal into the clearance.
Put the screw through the hole of the solderless terminal so that it is temporarily fixed.
5. Tighten the screw of the cable connecting terminal.
6. Close the cover of the terminal unit.
Cross-Sectional View
Approx. 2 mm
Solderless
terminal
Solderless terminal
being inserted
Screw
Spring Mount
Initial State Solderless terminal

being temporarily fixed
Cover Released State

Solderless terminal
being completely fixed
Figure A4.1.1-1 Signal Cable Terminal Connection
WARNING
If a solderless terminal with different ratings is used the sleeve of the solderless terminal may
not connect properly, resulting in a poor connection.
Fasten the solderless terminal only on the ring.
Solderless Terminal Ring
Sleeve
Correct Connection Incorrect Connection
Figure A4.1.1-2 Proper Connection of a Solderless Terminal

A4.1.2 Connection of Signal Cable (Connector Type)

Use the connecting cable specified in the following table when connecting a digital I/O module
(connector type) to a signal cable. The signal cable to be used depends on whether the digital
I/O module (connector type) has 16 points or 32 points.
The connector type communication module (Model: ACM11) requires the dedicated cable.
Table A4.1.2-1 Signal Cable Types for the Connector-Type Modules

Type of I/O module Available Cable Remarks
AMC80 KS1 Shielded 20 pair cable
16 point, connector type KS2 If the partner is a terminal block
KS3 If the partner is a receptacle connector
32 point, connector type KS9 If the partner is a terminal block
KS10 If the partner is a receptacle connector
Communication module KB3 RS-232C modem cable
KB4 RS-232C null-modem cable
AKB141 RS-232C modem cable for connecting RS-circuit
isolated equipment
AKB142 RS-232C null-modem cable for connecting RS-cir-
cuit isolated equipment
AKB143 RS-232C null-modem cable for start-stop asynchro-
nous communication
(DB25-DB9 mail pins for connection between
ACM11/ACM12 and FA-M3, RS-232C device)
AKB144 RS-232C null-modem cable for start-stop asynchro-
nous communication
(DB25-DB9 female pins for connection between
ACM11/ACM12 and RS-232C device)
AKB161 RS-422/RS-485 cable (for connection between
ACM12 and FA500)
AKB162 RS-422/RS-485 cable (for connection between
ACM12 and YS)

A4.1.3 Types of Signal Cable

KS1,KS2 Cable KS3 Cable
20-pair 16-pair
sheathed cable sheathed cable
(KS1)
16-pair
sheathed cable
(KS2)
40-pin connector 40-pin connector 37-pin connector 40-pin connector
KS9 Cable KS10 Cable
40-core 40-core
sheathed cable sheathed cable
50-pin connector 50-pin connector 50-pin connector 50-pin connector
KB3 (Modem), KB4 (Null Modem) Cable AKB141 Modem Cable

Red marker AKB142 Null Modem Cable Red marker
ACM Side ACM Side
ACM
CN2
CN1
CN1
Cable
shield
I = 150 mm
M3
If an RS-232C interface circuit at the partner equipment External dimensions: Same as those for KB3 or KB4.
is isolated, use an AKB141 or AKB142 cable.
AKB143 Null Modem Cable (ACM11, ACM21 to FA-M3) AKB161 RS-422/RS-485 (ACM12, ACM22 to FA500)
AKB144 Null Modem Cable AKB162 RS-422/RS-485 (ACM12, ACM22 to YS)
(ACM11, ACM21 to RS-232C device)
ACM Side
Figure A4.1.3-1 Signal Cable Types for Connector-Type Modules

<A4.2 Wiring of I/O Modules> A4-6
A4.2 Wiring of I/O Modules

This section explains how to wire the signal cable to the I/O modules, the terminal symbols,
shielding methods and the corresponding cable models.

A4.2.1 Wiring of Analog I/O Module

The terminal to which the signal cable should be connected depends on the kind of signal the
analog I/O module inputs or outputs. Refer to the following table to determine the correct con-
nections.
Table A4.2.1-1 I/O Terminal Types for Analog I/O modules

Cable
Con-
Models nection I/O Types
Termi-
nals
AAM10 A 2-wire transmitter input +
AAM11
B 2-wire transmitter input - Current input + (*1) Voltage input +
C Current input - (*1) Voltage input -
AAM11B A BRAIN transmitter input
+
B BRAIN transmitter input - Current input + (*1) Voltage input +
C Current input -(*1) Voltage input -
AAM21 A RTD input A (*2) Potentiometer input, 100 % (*2)
AAM21J
B mV/Thermocouple input RTD input B Potentiometer input, variable
+
C mV/Thermocouple input RTD input B(*2) Potentiometer input, 0 % (*2)
-
APM11 A 2-wire power supply 3-wire power supply power supply
(power)
B 2-wire (voltage, contact) 2-wire power supply (sig- 3-wire power supply +
+ nal)
C 2-wire (voltage, contact) 3-wire power supply -
-
AAM50 A Current output + — —
B
C Current output -
AAM51 A Current output + Voltage output + —
B
C Current output - Voltage output -
*1: When power of models AAM10, AAM11 and AAM11B is off or abnormal, current input loop is in the open state.
Do not use current signals with other receiving devices. When in use, also use an external receiver resistance, in the voltage
mode. (Shunt resistor module: A1080RZ 250 ohm)
*2: Wiring resistance for A, C must be identical.
n Wiring of Analog I/O Module

Models AAM10, AAM11, AAM11B, AAM21, AAM21J, APM11, AAM50, AAM51

Model AMN11 Signal Cable Analog I/O Module (Slot 1 to 16)
Temperature Compensation
Module or Standby Manual
Station Connecting Socket I/O
Channels A B C
1 1 I/O Channels
2 2
16 16
Connector
(CN1)
Terminal Unit Terminal Unit

Analog I/O Module Model AMN11
If output signal between 1 - 5 V DC needs to be output to a recorder, etc., connect the Model AKB301 cable to the
(CN1) connector. For example, to output signal from the terminal block TE16 to the recorder, connect cable
Model AKB301 between CN1 and the terminal block.
Figure A4.2.1-1 Analog I/O Module Model Wiring
n RTD Input Module AAM21, AAM21J

I/O
Channels A B C
1 1 I/O
A B C 2 Channels
2
16 16
Figure A4.2.1-2 RTD Input Module Wiring
n Temperature Compensation Module for Thermocouple Input

If the mV, thermocouple, or RTD input module Model AAM21, AAM21J is used for receiving
thermocouple input, a temperature compensation module for the thermocouple input (RJC
unit) is also required.
The analog I/O module nest Model AMN11 has socket terminals to plug in temperature com-
pensation modules. The RJC unit should be connected to the temperature compensation

module connecting socket. It is next to the socket for the input module which is used to re-
ceive thermocouple input.
Analog I/O Module Nest
Temperature Compensation Module

for Thermocouple Input
Temperature Compensation Module or

Standby Manual Station Connecting Socket
Figure A4.2.1-3 Connecting Thermocouple Input Compensation Module or SPBD Standby Manual Sta-
tion
n Installation of Shunt Modules

Analog I/O modules (Model: AAM10, AAM11, AAM11B) may be used after converting the 4 to
20 mA current signals to the 1 to 5 V DC voltage signals. In this case the 250 ohm shunt re-
sisters are required.
The shunt resisters should be connected to the input terminals of the analog I/O module nests
(Models: AMN11, AMM12) along with signal cables.
l Wiring Procedure
1. Loosen terminals B and C by loosening the M4 screws.
2. Insert each B-terminal cable in the direction (Pay attention to the direction of the ring ter-
minal).
3. Install the shunt modules.
4. Insert each C-terminal cable in the direction (Pay attention to direction of the ring termi-
nal).
5. Tighten terminals B and C by tightening the M4 screws.

A B C
Shunt module
(A1080RZ)
C-terminal cable
Ring terminal
C-terminal
B-terminal
B-terminal cable
Ring terminal
Figure A4.2.1-4 Installation of Shunt Modules

A4.2.2 Wiring of Relay I/O Module
n Relay Input Module Model ADM15R
Input
Channels C B A
A 1
RL 2
B
C
C terminal is not used
16
Figure A4.2.2-1 Relay Input Module Wiring
n Relay Output Module Model ADM55R
Output
Channels C B A
A 1
2
B
C
Between A - C: A contact
(contact closed when energized)
Between B - C: B contact
(contact closed when non-energized)
16
Figure A4.2.2-2 Relay Output Module Wiring

A4.2.3 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (Terminal Type)
n Voltage Input, mV Input, Thermocouple Input, 2-wire Transmitter

Input, and Current Output
Models AMM12T, AMM22M, AMM22T, AMM22TJ, AMM42T, AMM52T
Model AMN31
Multiplexer Module
I/O
Channels B A B A
Empty Empty
+
1 - 1
+
2 - 2
+
16 - 16
Signal Cable
Terminal Unit
Figure A4.2.3-1 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (voltage input, mV input, thermocouple input, 2-wire
transmitter input, and current output)
n RTD Input
Model AMM32T, AMM32TJ
Only one RTD input module can be installed in one nest.
Signal Cable
Model AMN31
Multiplexer Module
I/O
Channels B B A
1
2
16
Terminal Unit
Figure A4.2.3-2 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (for RTD input)

A4.2.4 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (Connector Type)
n Voltage Input, mv Input, Thermocouple Input and RTD Input

Models AMM12C, AMM22C, AMM25C, AMM32C, AMM32CJ
Model AMN32
Multiplexer Module
1 2 3 4
Connector
Shield Line
Shield Line
Connector Unit Shield Connecting Screw Terminal
Figure A4.2.4-1 Wiring of Multiplexer Module (connector type)

A4.2.5 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (Terminal Type)
n 16-point Terminal Type Digital I/O Module

Models ADM11T, ADM51T
Model AMN31
Signal Cable
Digital I/O Module

I/O
Channels B A B A
Empty Empty
1 + - 1
+ - 2
2
16 + - 16
I/O Contact
Terminal Unit
Figure A4.2.5-1 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (16-point terminal type)
n 32-point Terminal Type Digital I/O Module

Models ADM12T, ADM52T
Common Terminal
Model AMN31 for Channels 17 to 32
Common Terminal
for Channels 1 to 16
Digital I/O Module
1 - +
2 - +
15 - +
16 - +
17 - +
18 - +
31 - +
- +
32
I/O Contact
Terminal Unit
Figure A4.2.5-2 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (32-point terminal type)

A4.2.6 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (Connector Type)
n Digital I/O module (connector type)

Models ADM11C, ADM12C, ADM51C, ADM52C
The shield of the dedicated cable should be connected to the shield screw terminal.
Model AMN32
Digital I/O Module

1 2 3 4
Connector
Shield Line
Shield Line
Connector Unit Shield Connecting Screw Terminal
Figure A4.2.6-1 Wiring of Digital I/O Module (connector type)
n Connection of Common Terminals for 32 Points

Terminal blocks TE16 and TE32 or terminal boards MUB and MUD are generally used for a
connector type digital I/O module as an interface with the field.
The figure below shows the connection of common TE32 or MUD terminals (two TE32 blocks
installed).
CN1
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Figure A4.2.6-2 TE32 Terminal Block

Field Common
Terminal Terminal
TE32
1
+
1
-
2
+
2
-
3
+
3
-
4
+
4
-
15
+
15
-
16 CN1
+
16
-
KS9 Cable to
17 ADM12C
+
17 or ADM52C
-
18
+
18
-
19
+
19
-
20
+
20
-
31
+
31
-
32
+
32
-
Figure A4.2.6-3 Internal Wiring of TE32

<A4.3 Wiring of Communication Module> A4-17
A4.3 Wiring of Communication Module

This section explains how to wire the signal cable to the communication I/O modules.

A4.3.1 RS-232C Communication Module
RDY RDY
RCV RCV
SND SND
CN1 CN1
YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA
Figure A4.3.1-1 Wiring of Communication Module (Model ACM11)
Communication cables are either the modem cable Model KB3, or the null-modem cable
Model KB4 and are supplied with the connector for D-sub 25 pin.
Table A4.3.1-1 RS-232C Interface Connector Pin Position

Pin Position Abbrev. Signal Name Remarks
1 FG Frame Ground Grounding for maintenance
2 SD Send Data Send data (output)
3 RD Receive Data Receive data (input)
4 RS Request to Send Request to send (output)
5 CS Clear to Send Sending possible (input)
6 DR Dataset Ready Dataset ready (input)
7 SG Signal Ground Signal common retrace line
8 CD Carrier Detect Carrier detect (input)
20 ER Equipment Ready Data terminal ready (output)
The figure below shows the internal connection of the RS-232C interface cable.

Model KB4 Model KB3
CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2
PIN No. Shield PIN No. PIN No. Shield PIN No.
FG FG FG FG
1 1 1 1
SD SD SD SD
2 2 2 2
RD RD RD RD
3 3 3 3
RS RS RS RS
4 4 4 4
CS CS CS CS
5 5 5 5
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
SG SG SG SG
7 7 7 7
CD CD CD CD
8 8 8 8
ER ER ER ER
20 20 20 20
The other side ACM side The other side ACM side
AKB142 AKB141
CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2
PIN No. Shield PIN No. PIN No. Shield PIN No.
FG FG FG FG
1 1 1 1
SD SD SD SD
2 2 2 2
RD RD RD RD
3 3 3 3
RS RS RS RS
4 4 4 4
CS CS CS CS
5 5 5 5
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
SG SG SG SG
7 7 7 7
CD CD CD CD
8 8 8 8
ER ER ER ER
20 20 20 20
The other side ACM side The other side
AKB144 AKB143
CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2
PIN No. PIN No. PIN No. PIN No.
Shield Shield
CD CD CD CD
1 8 1 8
RD RD RD RD
2 3 2 3
SD SD SD SD
3 2 3 2
ER ER ER ER
4 20 4 20
SG SG SG SG
5 7 5 7
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
RS RS RS RS
7 4 7 4
CS CS CS CS
8 5 8 5
Connector FG Connector FG
1 shell 1
shell
D-sub 9 socket (female) ACM side FA-M3 side ACM side
D-sub 25 pin D-sub 9 pin (mail) D-sub 25 pin
Figure A4.3.1-2 Internal Connection
n ACM11: The Communication Module Signal Circuits

The communication module isolates the communication circuit signal lines to prevent noise
from entering the FCS from the partner AC line, frame ground (FG) connecting cables and

communication cables. Because of this, it is necessary that cable shielding wires be connec-
ted to the FG at the partner side.
The partner terminal requires that its FG and signal ground (SG) be connected to each other,
providing the same potential between them.
n ACM11 Frame Ground Connection

The ACM11 communication module isolates the RS-232C interface circuit functionally. This
prevents noise from entering the FCS from the subsystem, thereby improving noise resist-
ance. To use this function effectively, satisfy the following requirements:
IMPORTANT
• Always ground the FG terminal at the partner terminal, with grounding resistance up to
100 ohms.
• Connect the FG and SG (pin No. 7 on the RS-232C circuit) together at the partner termi-
nal.
• Ground the cable shielding wires at the partner terminal.
(When using KB3 and KB4 cables, connect the end of the cable with the red mark to the
partner terminal.)
In the ACM11 communication module, pin No. 1 (for the frame ground) of the RS-232C com-
munications cable remains disconnected.
Connect the shielding wire of the RS-232C communications cable to the FG at the partner
equipment (subsystem or modem side).
And a Class 3 ground with a maximum of 100 ohms can be attained.
Check that pin No. 1 (for the frame ground) and pin No. 7 (for the signal ground) on the
RS-232C communications connector at the partner equipment are connected to each other.
Also check that pin No. 1 is connected to the grounding terminal at the partner equipment. A
KB3 or KB4 cable connector (CN1) with a red mark has shielding wires connected to pin No.
1. Connect this side of the KB3 or KB4 cable connector to the subsystem or modem side.
FCS Cabinet KB3 Cable
(MODEM Cable)
or
ACM11 Card KB4 Cable
Partner Equipment
(Null MODEM Cable)
SG1 SG2
7 7
Circuit
1 1
Jumper
Shielding wires should
be connected to the FG
OPEN FG
at the subsystem side.
Grounding of up
Centralized to 100 ohms
grounding
point
Grounding of up
to 100 ohms
Figure A4.3.1-3 FG Connection

n KB4 Cable Connection

For the partner equipment, jumper J1 should be provided (see the figure below) upon ship-
ment. (If it is not, provide jumper 1 for short-circuiting.) To meet the above requirement, the
FG and SG may be directly connected.
Partner equipment
Red mark
7 7 SG
SG Circuit
FG
1 J1
1 FG
KB4 Cable
FG
Figure A4.3.1-4 Example of Using KB4 Cable
If the partner equipment is isolating the RS-232C communications circuit, floated communica-
tions circuits at both the ACM and partner equipment result, thereby lowering noise resist-
ance.
To prevent this, use an AKB141 or AKB142 cable.
Connect pin No. 1 (for the frame ground) and pin No. 7 (for the signal ground) together at the
partner equipment. In addition, as a means of grounding the shielding wires of this cable, Fig-
ure below illustrates that the shielding wires can be connected to the FG terminal at the part-
ner equipment in cases where pin No. 1 is disconnected at the partner equipment.
Red mark
7 7 SG
SG Circuit
FG
1
1
Open
To FG Cable To Ground
(two terminal lugs
may be connected
AKB 141 or AKB142 Cable FG to each other.)
Figure A4.3.1-5 Cable Connection for Isolated Communications Circuit
n Connection to Partner Equipments

The ACM11 and partner equipment are connected by a cable up to 15 meters in length.
If the ACM11 is connected to a subsystem, the subsystem requires frame grounding with a
grounding resistance of up to 100 ohms.
If the cable is longer than 15 meters, always use a modem that its frame is grounded.

n For European Market

When using the communications nodes in European countries, use clamp filters to meet the
EMC standards.
l Mounting Clamp Filters (Ferrite Cores)

When RS-232C cabling is complete, mount the supplied clamp filters on the covering of the
RS-232C cable to provide enhanced immunity to noises.
l Clamp Filter Parts

Core (Part number: A1179MN with cable fastener)
This inside diameter of the core is 13±1 mm. If the RS-232C cable is prepared by customers,
the thickness of the cable should fit the clamp filter.
l Clamp Filter Location

Place clamp filters at positions as close as possible to the surface of the ACM11 card.
Clamp Filters
Figure A4.3.1-6 Mounting Clamp Filters
n Mounting Clamp Filters

1. Unlock the two core lock claws with finger, and the core will open about 150˚ to split into
two pieces as shown in Figure below.
2. Put the RS-232C cable into the cylindrical part of the core opened.
3. Close the core with the RS-232C cable put in it, and lock the clamp filter with two core
lock claws.
4. Pass a cable fastener into either hole in the clamp filter and secure the RS-232C cable by
clamping the cable fastener over the cable coating.

Core Lock Claw
Cable Connector Core
Lock Two Claws
RS-232C Cable Cable Fastener Clamp with Cable Fastener
Figure A4.3.1-7 Mounting Clamp Filters
IMPORTANT
The clamp filter is a ferrite component. It is necessary to prevent it from dropping or other me-
chanical shocks. Keep the clamp filters within the working temperature range (ICU or FCU in-
stallation environment) and storage temperature range.

A4.3.2 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module
RDY RDY
RCV RCV
SND SND
TW1 TW1
RD
Y
RC
SN
V
D
TX+ TX+
TW
1 TX- TX-
TX RD
+ RC
Y RX+ RX+
TX V
SN
- D
RX RX- RX-
+ TW
RX 1
SG
-
SG SG
TX
+
FG
TX
-
FG FG
RX
+
RX
-
SG
FG
Figure A4.3.2-1 Wiring of Communication Module (Model ACM12)
Table A4.3.2-1 RS-422/RS485 Interface Terminal

Terminal Name Signal Name Remarks
TX+ Send Data Transmission data (in-phase signals)
TX- Send Data Transmission data (phase-reversal signals)
RX+ Receive Data Receiving data (in-phase signals)
RX- Receive Data Receiving data (phase-reversal signals)
SG Signal Ground Signal grounding
FG Frame Ground Protective grounding
n ACM12 External Connection

When connecting Model ACM12 with external equipment, two methods for 1 to 1 and 1 to n
(n: up to 32) are available. The figure below shows the configuration.
Connection of
Model ACM12 with System configuration
external equipment
ACM12
1:1
External
equipment
ACM12
1:n
(n: up to 32 pieces
of equipment) External External External
equipment equipment equipment
Figure A4.3.2-2 System Configuration When Connecting Model ACM12 with External Equipment

n ACM12: The Communication Module Signal Circuits

The communication module isolates the communication circuit signal lines to prevent noise
from entering the FCS from the partner AC line, frame ground (FG) connecting cables and
communication cables. Because of this, it is necessary that cable shielding wires be connec-
ted to the FG at the partner side. The partner terminal requires that its FG and signal ground
(SG) be connected to each other, providing the same potential between them.
n ACM12 Frame Ground Connection

In Model ACM12, the Frame Ground (FG) line and the Signal Ground (SG) in the RS-422/
RS-485 are separated.
Set up the RS-422/RS-485 shield as shown below.
Grounding for the FG must be grounding (with resistance up to 100 ohm) on the connected
side (subsystem side).
The cable shield between Model ACM12 and the subsystem side must be connected to the
FG on the subsystem side, not to the FG on Model ACM12.
The cable shield is connected to
the FG on the subsystem side. Subsystem
Model ACM12
SG SG
FG FG
FG
Grounding
Figure A4.3.2-3 FG Connection
n Connection with External Equipment

Four-wire and two-wire types are provided for the connection of Model ACM12 with external
equipment. Each type has 1 to 1 and 1 to n connections.

l 1 to 1 Connection in 4-wire Type

External
ACM12 FA500 MELSEC
equipment
TX+ TX+ SDB SDA

R2
TX- TX- SDA SDB
RX+ RX+ RDB RDA

R1 R2
RX- RX- RDA RDB
SG SG SG SG
FG FG FG FG
R1: Termination resistance of 120 ohm

R2: According to the instruction on the subsystem side
Figure A4.3.2-4 1 to 1 Connection in 4-wire Type

ACM12 External
equipment
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
R1 R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
FG FG

Figure A4.3.2-5 1 to 1 Connection in 2-wire Type

l 1 to n Connection in 4-wire Type

ACM12 External equipment
TX+ TX+
TX+ TX+
TX- TX- R2
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX+ RX+
R1 RX- RX- R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
SG SG
FG FG
FG FG

Figure A4.3.2-6 1 to n Connection in 4-wire Type

ACM12 External equipment
TX+ TX+
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX+ RX+
R1 RX- RX- R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
SG SG
FG FG
FG FG

Figure A4.3.2-7 1 to n Connection in 2-wire Type
n ACM12 Setup Elements

The SW1 (dip switch) must be set as follows depending on the 4-wire or 2-wire connection.
The 4-wire connection is set at the factory.
• 4-wire connection: Both subswitches of the SW1 is set to OFF.
• 2-wire connection: Both subswitches of the SW1 is set to ON.

ON OFF Side plate

Remove the side plate
before setting SW1
ON : 2 WIRES
OFF : 4 WIRES Terminal
SW1
Front
SW1 mounting position
Figure A4.3.2-8 SW1 Setting

A4.3.3 Wiring of Fieldbus Communication Module
1 2 3 4
RDY RDY
CTL CTL
RCV RCV
SND SND
RD
CT Y 1 2
RCL 3 4
SN V
D
RD
TX
+ CT Y MAINT MAINT
RCL
TX SN V
- D
RX
MA
IN+
RX T
-
SG
! TM FG ! TM1 ! TM1
1
MA
IN
T + +
+ +
+
! TM
- -
1
- - -
NC NC
NC
NC NC
-
NC
Figure A4.3.3-1 Wiring Fieldbus Communication Module (Model ACF11)
n Connecting Fieldbus Device

For signal connection from fieldbus devices, connect the + and - terminals (terminal numbers
1 and 2). Attach the provided clamp filter to the type A cable to protect it from external noise.
The clamp filter is attached for ACF11.
When the ACF11 is the end of a segment, a terminator should be used to shunt the terminal 4
and 5. The terminators need to be prepared accordingly. Do not connect anything to NC ter-
minals (terminal number 3 and terminal number 6).
+
1
4
-
2
5
Clamp filter NC
3
(Part No.:A1179MN)
6
Terminator
(Model:YCB138)
Figure A4.3.3-2 Signal Connection Terminal
The clamp filter’s part number and installation are the same as for the ACM11 communication
module. Put it as close to the signal connector terminal as possible. Fasten it tightly on the
cable fastener.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the connection and construction of the fieldbus, refer to:
”Fieldbus Technical Information (TI 38K3A01-01E)”
n Setting Elements
With jumper J3, specify power unit to supply power to fieldbus devices: module’s built-in pow-
er supply or external power supply. The following figure shows the position of the jumper and
setting.

l To Specify Built-in Power Supply

Insert a setup plug to cover the ON-side pin and the center pin of the setup post at the upper
left of the 1F printed board where J3 “SUPLY” is written.
SUPLY
ON OFF
J3
Jumper position
Front
Printed board
Signal connection
terminal
Figure A4.3.3-3 Setting a Jumper
l External Bus Power Supply

When the current consumption of the connected fieldbus devices exceeds the capacity of
ACF 11 (80 mA), external bus power supply unit is required.
The power of the fieldbus devices is supplied by the external power supply unit.
When the external bus power supply is applied, the jumper must be plugged at the position of
OFF pin and SUPLY pin.
TIP The maximum capacity of the built-in bus supply unit of ACF11 is 80 mA. Normally, up to six devices can be
powered from ACF11. However, when seven or more devices need to be powered, or when the total capacity
of the devices exceeds 80 mA, even if the number of the devices is less than 6, the external bus power sup-
ply unit is required.
n ACF11 Shield
The cables from the field are connected to a junction box where they are earthed. Be sure to
use type A cable to connect ACF11 to the junction box. The shield grounding of the Type A
cable should be connected to the grounding bar on the FCU side (inside the cubicle). When
required, user may isolate the shield grounding from the cubicle by removing the cross wire
between the grounding bar and cubicle earth terminal. Thus the cubicle may be earthed sepa-
rately.

A clamp filter (A1179MN, with a cable fastener) ACF11
needs to be attached to the cable within
10cm from the terminal. Type A cable shielding
Clamp filter Terminator
Grounding bar for the
shield inside the cubicle
(isolated from cubicle)
Grounding bar cross wire
Regardless the CE mark specification,

the clamp filter is necessary.
Type A cable Grounding conductor
connection grounding bar
(not isolated from cubicle)
Arrester etc.
FCU
To FCU grounding bar
Up to10 ohm
Without arrester
To ACF11
Type A cable
To AAM11, AAM21 module etc.
To AAM11, AAM21 module etc.
To FCU grounding bar
Figure A4.3.3-4 ACF11 Shield
When arrester is in the connection, earth the grounding bar and cubicle together with the ar-
rester as shown in the figure above. Do not remove the cross wire between the grounding bar
and cubicle earth terminal.

A4.3.4 Signal Cable Wiring to Communication Cards

Signal cable wiring to Communication cards may be performed the same as the wiring to
RS-232C module described in the previous section A4.3.1 or A4.3.2.
n Signal Cable Wiring to RS-232C Communication Card: PFCS/SFCS
RDY RDY
RCV RCV
SND SND
CN1 CN1
Figure A4.3.4-1 Communication Card (Model ACM21)
SEE
ALSO For more information about signal cable wiring to RS-232C communication card, refer to:
A4.3.1, “RS-232C Communication Module” on page A4-18
n Signal Cable Wiring to RS-422/RS-485 Communication Cards: PFCS/

SFCS
RDY RDY
TM1 TM1
RCV RCV
SND SND
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX- RX-
SG SG
FG FG
Figure A4.3.4-2 Communication Card (Model ACM22)
SEE
ALSO For more information about signal cable wiring to RS-422/RS-485 communication cards, refer to:
A4.3.2, “RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module” on page A4-24

n Signal Cable Wiring to Ethernet Communication Module: PFCS/

SFCS
CN1 CN1
CN
1
CN
1
Ethernet cable
(10BASE-T) connector
Figure A4.3.4-3 Ethernet Communication Module (Model ACM71)
Use a 10BASE-T 100 ohm twisted-pair cable (not shielded) for communications.
The connector type is RJ45.
n Signal Cable Wiring to PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
PROFIBUS-DP Interface Connector (D-sub 9pins)
Figure A4.3.4-4 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (Model ACP71)

Table A4.3.4-1 Pin Assignment of PROFIBUS-DP Interface Connector
Pin Position I/O Signal Name Remarks
1 – Shield
2 – –
3 I/O A-line
4 O CNTR-P Repeater control signal
5 – DGND
6 – VP +5 V
7 – –
8 I/O B-line
9 – –
SEE
ALSO For more information about the PROFIBUS-DP, refer to:
2, “PROFIBUS-DP (ACP71)” in the Communication with PROFIBUS systems (IM 33K03P10-50E)
For more information about the PROFIBUS-DP cable wiring, refer to:
• B3.5.6, “Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (ALP111)” on page
B3-67
• B3.5.7, “Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (ALP121)” on page
B3-69

A4.3.5 Wiring of Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
n Model AMC80 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module

The shield of the dedicated cable should be connected to the shield screw terminal.
WARNING
• When AMC80 is connected to the dual-redundant devices such as MHM, the AMC80
must be configured dual-redundant too.
• When dual-redundant is not configured to the AMC80 modules, each module should have
its own MHM connected.
RDY RDY
RCV RCV
SND SND
CN1 CN1
YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA
Figure A4.3.5-1 Wiring of AMC80 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module

Blank Page
<A5. Maintenance of Input & Output Devices> A5-1
A5. Maintenance of Input & Output

Devices
This chapter explains the routine maintenance of the I/O devices and the procedures on how
to install or remove the Node Interface Unit (NIU) and I/O modules.
CAUTION
• Wipe dust off the equipment with a cleaner, or with a dry and soft cloth.
• When performing maintenance work while the door of the cabinet is open, wear a wrist
strap as a countermeasure against electrostatic discharge (ESD).
• When power is ON, do not install or remove the cards, cables, connectors not listed in
this manual.

<A5.1 Routine Maintenance of Input & Output Devices> A5-2
A5.1 Routine Maintenance of Input & Output

Devices
The routine maintenance may be carried out by checking the On/Off of the lamps for I/O mod-
ule status display or by checking the corresponding status marks on the FCS windows of the
monitoring and operation function.
n Precautions against Static Electricity

When performing maintenance work, the following items should be observed to prevent elec-
trostatic interference.
• When storing or carrying maintenance parts, be sure to enclose them in an antistatic bag.
(For shipment these parts are enclosed in an antistatic bag labeled with precautions
against electrostatic charge.)
• During maintenance work use a wrist strap with a ground wire via a grounding resistance
of 1 M ohm. Be sure to ground the wrist strap.
• When performing maintenance work on a desk or a table, place a conductivity sheet
grounded via a grounding resistance of 1 M ohm. The maintenance person must wear a
wrist strap while performing maintenance work. Take any plastic and other materials that
can easily be charged away from the work area.
• Exercise caution so as not to touch any of the maintenance parts while the wrist strap
and a conductivity sheet are not being used.
Wrist strap Conductive sheet
1 M ohm
1 M ohm
Grounding resistance
of 1 M ohm
Wrist strap
When working with a card or a unit that include

battery on a conductive sheet, set the BATTERY
Connect the wrist strap to the earth terminal ON/OFF switch to the OFF position or remove
or unpainted part of the frame (grounded). the battery.
Figure A5.1-1 Example of Using a Wrist Strap and Conductive Sheet
The wrist strap and conductive sheet are available from Yokogawa’s sales agents.

A5.1.1 Routine Maintenance by Checking Status Lamps

This section explains the routine maintenance for I/O modules and I/O devices common part.
n Routine Maintenance for Common Part

I/O modules, RIO bus interface slave cards (inside NIU), processor cards and the power sup-
ply units all have status lamps. By checking the lamps On/Off status, the common part abnor-
mality may be found.
Table A5.1.1-1 Types and Roles of Status Indicators on the NIU Card and Power Unit
Card or Unit Name Indicator Type Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
RIO bus interface slave RDY lamp Normally operating Card failure or power in-
card terruption
RCV lamp RIO bus reception No RIO bus communica-
tion
SND lamp RIO bus transmission
Processor unit HRDY lamp Hardware Normal Hardware Abnormal
RDY lamp Hardware and Software One of them is not nor-
are both Normal mal
CTRL lamp Control Stand by
COPY lamp Program copying Copy complete
Power unit RDY lamp Normally operating Power unit failure or pow-
er interruption
If operation mode setting switch (SW2) of the RIO bus interface slave card is set to DSBL, all
the status indicator lamps are turned off. Therefore, to check the NIU conditions via these
lamps, set SW2 on the NIU card to ENBL.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to set SW2, refer to:
“l Operation Mode Setting Switch (SW2) : LFCS2/LFCS” on page A5-15
n I/O Module Check

The I/O module has a self-diagnostic function to check for abnormalities. Generally there are
two types of I/O module abnormality: hardware abnormalities and abnormalities caused by
the downloaded setting information.
Each I/O has a status indicator lamp (RDY lamp). This lamp indicates whether the I/O module
is operating normally.
Status indicator
Figure A5.1.1-1 I/O Module Status Indicator (for analog I/O module)

If the status indicator lamp on the I/O module is on, it indicates that the I/O module hardware
is operating normally. If it is off, it indicates that the power has been interrupted or that there is
a hardware problem.
IMPORTANT
If there is an abnormality in the downloaded I/O module setting information and there is no
problem with the hardware, the status indicator lamp on the I/O module remains lit. Therefore,
to check the setting information it is necessary to detect an error from the operating status.

A5.1.2 Inspection Using LFCS Status Display View

Select the LFCS status display view from the Human Interface Station (HIS) system status
overview. The control station operating status, I/O module status, communication bus status,
and other statuses can be checked using the LFCS status display view.
We recommend that this window be used not only when trouble occurs, but also to periodical-
ly check the operating status of each station.
The figure below shows an example of the LFCS status display view.
.SF FCS0101 FCS Status Display

FCS
FCS
IOM
MYPJT Domain : 01 V net1 V net2

FCS0101 MAN L R
Distillation column A Not Ready
Station No Stand-By
:1
Control
Type : AFS20D Hard Ready
Maintenance
PSU
RB301
CPU
CPU
RB301
PSU
Revision : R5.01. 00
Generation :
09/22/2011 13 : 29
CPU Idle Time : 57 Sec

Comn Load Ave : 0 %
Cur : 0 %
Test Mode : OFF
ControlStatus : RUN 1 2
Comm I/O : ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
TEMP
Air in
Air out
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Battery ( L, R ) COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
FAN PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
FCU ( N1, N2 )
Door (x1, 2, 3, 4)
Battery ( L, R )
Ready
Figure A5.1.2-1 LFCS Status Display view

<A5.2 Mounting and Demounting of NIU RIO bus Interface Slave Cards and Power Supply Unit >
A5-6
A5.2 Mounting and Demounting of NIU RIO bus

Interface Slave Cards and Power Supply
Unit
This section describes how to mount and demount RIO bus interface slave cards (hereinafter
referred to as “card”) and power units on the NIU. In a dual-redundant installation, cards and
power units can be mounted or demounted without turning off the NIU power.
IMPORTANT
If the NIU is dual-redundant, there are two sets each of cards and power supply units. For
mounting and demounting of cards and power supply units, do so for one side, then mount
and demount on the other side.
n Demounting of Cards and Power Supply Unit : LFCS2/LFCS
IMPORTANT
Before demounting a card from the NIU, make sure that SW2 of the card is set to DSBL (disa-
ble) and that the status indicators (RDY, RCV, and SND) on the card are off.
Before demounting a power unit from the NIU, disconnect the power supply cable connector.
1. Set SW2 to DSBL so that the communication performance of other nodes is not affec-
ted.Ensure that the status display lamps (RDY, RCV, and SND) on the card are not lit.
Disconnect the power supply cable connector before demounting the power unit from the
NIU.
2. Loosen the screws that secure the card or power unit.
3. Hold the handle of the card or power unit and pull it away from the backplate of the NIU.
Status Display Lamps Card

(RDY, RCV, SND)
Switching
of SW2
ENBL
Connector
Handle
Power Supply Cable
Screw (2 pcs.)
Handle
DSBL Screw (2 pcs.) Power Unit
Figure A5.2-1 Demounting of NIU Cards or Power Supply Unit

<A5.2 Mounting and Demounting of NIU RIO bus Interface Slave Cards and Power Supply Unit >
A5-7
n Mounting of Cards and Power Supply Unit : LFCS2/LFCS
IMPORTANT
When tightening the securing screws on the card or power unit, always use a Phillips-head or
standard Jeweller’s screwdriver. Torque the screws to approximately 0.25 N•m.
1. Insert the card or power unit as far as it will go into the NIU along the guide rails. Firmly
insert the connector at the rear of the card or power unit into the socket connector on the
backboard.
2. Tighten the securing screws on the card or power unit.
If mounting a power unit, connect the power supply cable connector.
3. Set SW2 of the card to ENBL (enable).
Connector
Connector
Card Backboard
Switching
of SW2
Connector
DSBL
ENBL Power Supply Cable

Guide Rail
Screw (2 pcs.)
Power Unit
Screw (2 pcs.)
Figure A5.2-2 Mounting of NIU Cards and Power Supply Unit

<A5.3 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Modules> A5-8
A5.3 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Modules

This section describes how to mount and demount an I/O module to and from the I/O module
nest. I/O modules can be mounted or demounted without turning off the FCS power.

A5.3.1 Mounting and Demounting of Analog I/O Modules
IMPORTANT
The I/O module setting data must be reloaded if an I/O module has been replaced.
n Mounting Procedure
1. Adjust the I/O module correctly and release the ejector before inserting it.
2. Close the ejector.
n Demounting Procedure
1. Release the ejector of the I/O module. A Phillips screwdriver may be needed to perform
this task.
2. Hold the ejector and pull out the I/O module.
Analog I/O Module
Ejector
Released state
Figure A5.3.1-1 Releasing the Ejector and Demounting the Analog I/O Module

A5.3.2 Mounting and Demounting of Terminal Type and

Connector Type I/O Modules
n Mounting Procedure
IMPORTANT
A multiplexer module, a digital I/O module or a relay I/O module cannot be mounted on the
I/O module nest while their connector unit or terminal unit is attached on the card.
To mount a multiplexer module, a digital I/O module or a relay I/O module, first insert the card
then attach the terminal unit or connector unit. Release the two ejectors before inserting the
card.
1. Insert the card with the two ejector released.

2. Attach the terminal unit or connector unit, then tighten the two screws.
If the signal cable is unconnected, connect it to the terminal unit or the connector unit.
n Demounting Procedure
IMPORTANT
Disconnect the terminal unit or the connector unit, then remove the card before demounting a
multiplexer module or digital I/O module.
1. Loosen the two screws on the terminal unit or connector unit of the I/O module and re-
move the terminal unit or connector unit.
The signal cable does not need to be disconnected. However, if the terminal unit or con-
nector unit is to be replaced, the signal cable must be disconnected.
2. Release the two ejectors on the card of the I/O module.
3. Hold the ejectors and pull out the card.

Terminal Unit Connector Unit
Card Unit Card Unit
Screw
(2 places) Screw (2 places)
Ejector Ejector
Ejector Ejector
Released State Released State
Multiplexer Module or Digital I/O Module Digital I/O Module (connector type)
(as well as relay I/O module)
Figure A5.3.2-1 Demounting a Terminal Type and Connector Type I/O Module

<A5.4 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Module Nests> A5-12
A5.4 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Module

Nests
This section describes how to mount and demount an I/O module nest to and from the NIU
backplate.
IMPORTANT
Before mounting or demounting an I/O module from the I/O module nest, it is necessary to
turn off the power supply of the node unit or the field control station. If the power supply for
the node unit or the field control station is a dual-redundant type, both the power supplies
should be turned off.
Turning the external switch or the external breaker off can stop the power supply. Neverthe-
less, pulling out the cable connector on the power supply unit will also turn off the power sup-
ply.
n Mounting of I/O Module Nest

1. Disconnect the cable connectors of the power supply unit on the NIU.
2. Mount the I/O module nest on the NIU backplate so that the connector and two guide pins
at the back of the I/O module nest are firmly inserted into the connector and the two holes
on the NIU backplate, respectively.
3. Tighten the four screws to secure the I/O module nest.
4. Connect the power supply unit cable connectors.
The figure below illustrates how to mount a cabinet installation type I/O or a rack mountable
type I/O module nest (using an analog I/O module nest as an example).
Connector NIU Backplate
NIU Backplate
Connector
Power Supply Unit
Connector
I/O Module Nest Power Supply Unit

Screw (4 places)
Connector
Cabinet Installation Type Node 19" Rack Mountable Type Node
Figure A5.4-1 Mounting of I/O Module Nest (for analog I/O module nest)
n Demounting of I/O Module Nest

1. Disconnect the cable connectors of the power supply unit on the NIU.

<A5.4 Mounting and Demounting of I/O Module Nests> A5-13
2. Loosen the four screws that secure the I/O module nest.
3. Remove the I/O module nest by pulling it away from the backplate of the NIU.
The figure below illustrates how to demount an I/O module nest.
Figure A5.4-2 Demounting of I/O Module Nest

<A5.5 RIO bus Interface Slave Card> A5-14
A5.5 RIO bus Interface Slave Card

This card relays analog or digital field signals between the FCU and IOU via RIO bus cables.
n RIO bus Interface Slave Card : LFCS2/LFCS

The lamps and switch names on RIO bus interface slave card are shown below.
Mounting Screw
RDY RDY Lamp

RCV
RCV Lamp
SND
SND Lamp
Operation Mode Setting Switch

(SW2)
CN1
Connector (CN1)
RIO BUS
ADDRESS
0 1
RIO bus Address Setting Switch

(SW1)
Mounting Screw
Figure A5.5-1 RB401 RIO bus Interface Slave Card
l RIO bus Address Setting Switch (SW1) : LFCS2/LFCS

This switch is used to set five node address bits and one parity bit.
Table below shows all the possible settings of this switch. In the table, “0” indicates that the
DIP switch is positioned on the left; “1” indicates that the DIP switch is positioned on the right.
0 1
ON
ODD 1
PARITY
(MSB) 2
3
ODD PARITY :
ADRS 4 Set SW1 so that a total number of siders
at the side of "1" represents an odd number.
5
(LSB) 6
Bit 6 is set to 1.
Figure A5.5-2 RIO bus Address Setting Switch (SW1)

<A5.5 RIO bus Interface Slave Card> A5-15
Table A5.5-1 List of the Settings with the RIO bus Address Setting Switch (SW1)
Meaning of RIO bus Address
Switch Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 ODD PARITY 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
2 ADRS (MSB) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 ADRS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
4 ADRS 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
5 ADRS 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
6 ADRS (LSB) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
IMPORTANT
The CN1 connector is used by Yokogawa’s service personnel during maintenance work. Do
not use it under normal operation.
l Operation Mode Setting Switch (SW2) : LFCS2/LFCS

With the operation mode setting switch, a node is set to one of the following operation modes.
• ENBL
When the switch is set to ENBL, users can access to I/O modules online from the FCU.
• MAINT
Set to MAINT for maintenance work. Users can access to I/O modules offline from the
CN1 connector for maintenance work on an RIO bus interface slave card. I/O modules
are not accessible online.
The FCU recognizes that a node is in the MAINT position.
When dual-redundant RIO bus interface slave cards are used, set the switches of the two
cards to MAINT.
• DSBL
When the switch is set to DSBL, users cannot access to I/O modules from an RIO bus
interface slave card.
This switch is a lock type toggle switch. When toggling the switch, the lever needs to be
pulled out from the clutch.
ENBL MAINT DSBL
Figure A5.5-3 Switching the Operation Mode with the Operation Mode Setting Switch (SW2) on the
RIO bus Interface Slave Card

<A5.6 Parts Replacement> A5-16
A5.6 Parts Replacement

The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced by the user are available as spare
parts and consumables. Purchase and replace as necessary.
Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.
IMPORTANT
Precautions for parts having defined life spans
• The term “Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear out or
break down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use. Therefore,
parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excluded here.
• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive maintenance.
It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.
• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacement cy-
cle depends on the usage conditions.
• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual field re-
sults.
CAUTION
Do not insert or remove relays while voltage is applied or current is being conducted to termi-
nals; there is a danger of electric shock. Therefore, parts replacement should not be per-
formed.
n Parts Having Defined Life Spans

The table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive mainte-
nance.
Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can be replaced
by the user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” column cannot be re-
placed by the user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for replacement.
Table A5.6-1 Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans

Part name Part number Recommen- Replace- Remarks
ded ment
replacement by user
cycle
Power supply unit PW401 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg
(100 - 120 V AC)
(220 - 240V AC)
(240V DC)
Aluminum electrolyt- (PW401) 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg
ic
capacitor (PW402) 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg
(in a power supply (PW404) 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg
unit)

<A5.6 Parts Replacement> A5-17
Part name Part number Recommen- Replace- Remarks
ded ment
replacement by user
cycle
Relay A1667MR 100000 times Yes ADM55R
S9165VM 100000 times Yes ADM15R

Blank Page
CMPL A1-1
Customer Models ANS50 and AND50

Maintenance Node Interface Unit
Parts List (19” Rack Mountable Type)
CMPL 33G06K10-11E
Item Model Qty Description

_
1 ANS50 Node Interface Unit for Single RIO Bus
(19" Rack Mountable Type)
_
AND50 Node Interface Unit for Dual-Redundant RIO Bus
(19" Rack Mountable Type)
_ _
2 Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module
Figure CMPL A1-1
CAUTION
• The Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance parts. Customer should not
assemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa's sales agents for parts replace-
ment. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
• Parts numbers on Parts Lists are subjected to change.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 1999, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33G06K10-11E
Subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 1st Edition : May. 1999 (YK)
8th Edition : Jun. 2012 (YK)
CMPL A1-2
Models ANS50 and AND50 Node Interface Unit
10
8
9
6
3
Figure CMPL A1-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 1999, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33G06K10-11E 8th Edition : Jun.2012-00
CMPL A1-3
Qty
ANS50-51
ANS50-52
ANS50-56
AND50
Model
Model or
Item Part No. Description
1 Below 1 2 2 Power Supply Unit
PW401 for 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply
PW404 for 24 V DC Power Supply
2 T9081AY 1 Dummy Plate
3 RB401 1 1 2 RIO Bus Interface Slave Card

4 T9081AW 1 1 Dummy Plate
5 S9359UK 1 1 2 Connector Unit for RIO Bus
_ _ _ _
6 DC Bus Assembly
7 S9049PM 8 8 8 Insulating Bushing
8 T9081WM 2 2 2 Bracket
9 Y9306LB 8 8 8 B. H. Screw, M3 × 6
_ _ _
10 T9080EE Cover (as required)
Figure CMPL A1-3
CMPL A1-4
Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module
7
8 10
11
12
4
3
23
2
To A
13 6
14 5 17 21
A
15 16
22
A A
24 20
19
27
26 18
29
31 32
25 30
28
33
Figure CMPL A1-4
CMPL A1-5
Model or
Item Part No. Qty Description
_
1 AMN11 Nest for Analog I/O Module
_
AMN12 High-Speed Nest for Analog I/O Module
_
2 T9081EF Dummy Frame (as required)
_
3 T9081FB Dummy Case (as required )
4 T9081CN 1 Sheet (accessory)
_
5 Below Analog I/O Module
AAM10 Current / Voltage Input Module
AAM11 Current / Voltage Input Module
AAM11B Current / Voltage Input Module
AAM21 mV, Thermocouple and RTD Input Module
AAM21J mV, Thermocouple and RTD Input Module

APM11 Pulse Input Module
AAM50 Current Output Module
AAM51 Current / Voltage Output Module
_
6 S9393UK Temperature Compensation Module for Thermocouple
Input (for Models AAM21 and AAM21J, option code : /RJ)
_
7 AMN21 Nest for Relay I/O Module
_ _
8 Relay I/O Module
_ _ *
9 Unit Assembly
_ _
10 Printed Board Assembly
11 Below 16 Relay
S9165VM for Model ADT16A
A1667MR for Model ADT16B

12 G9307MW 1 Screw
_
13 AMN31 Nest for Terminal I/O Module
_ _
14 Multiplexer Module
_ _
Digital I/O Module
_ _
15 Unit Assembly
_ _
16 Printed Board Assembly *
_
17 AMN32 Nest for Connector I/O Module
_ _
18 Digital I/O Module
_ _
19 Unit Assembly
_ _
20 Printed Board Assembly
_
21 Below Nest
AMN33 Nest for Communication Module
AMN34 Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
_
22 Below Communication Module
or Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
ACM11 RS-232C Communication Module
ACM12 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module
ACF11 Field-bus Communication Module
AMC80 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module

_
23 T9081CV Dummy Plate (as required)
_
24 AMN51 Nest for Communication Card
_
25 T9081PV Dummy Plate (as required)
26 Y9406LB 4 B. H. Screw, M4 x 6
27 G9311AB 4 Washer
_
28 Below General-purpose Communication Card
ACM21 RS-232C Communication Card
ACM22 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Card
ACM71 Ethernet Communication Module (for PFCS/PFCD)
_
29 AMN52 Nest for PROFIBUS Communication Module
_
30 T9081PV Dummy Plate (as required)
31 Y9406LB 4 B.H.Screw, M4 x 6
32 G9311AB 4 Washer
_
33 ACP71 PROFIBUS Communication Module Note*: Refer to Table 1.
Figure CMPL A1-5
CMPL A1-6
Table 1. Type of I/O Modules
Nest I/O Module Unit Assembly Printed Board Assembly

Model Model Description Model Description Model Description
Item 8 (Relay I/O Module) Item 9 Item 10
AMN21
ADM15R Relay Input Module ADT16A Terminal Block ADM15 Relay Input Card
(Item 7)
ADM55R Relay Output Module ADT16B Terminal Block ADM55 Relay Output Card
Item 14 (Multiplexer Module,
Item 15 Item 16
Terminal Type)
AMM12T Voltage Input Voltage Input
AMT16M Terminal Block AMM12
(*1) Multiplexer Module Multiplexer Card
AMM22M mV Input mV, Thermocouple
AMT16M Terminal Block AMM22 Input Multiplexer Card
(*1) Multiplexer Module
AMM22T Thermocouple Input mV, Thermocouple
(*1) Multiplexer Module AMT16T Terminal Block AMM22 Input Multiplexer Card
AMN31 AMM22TJ Thermocouple Input AMT16T Terminal Block AMM22J
mV, Thermocouple
(Item13) (*1) Multiplexer Module Input Multiplexer Card
RTD Input RTD Input
AMM32T AMT16R Terminal Block AMM32
Multiplexer Module Multiplexer Card
RTD Input RTD Input
AMM32TJ AMT16R Terminal Block AMM32J
2-Wire Transmitter
2-Wire Transmitter
AMM42T Input Multiplexer AMT16M Terminal Block AMM42
Input Multiplexer Card
Module
Output Output
AMM52T Multiplexer Module AMT16M Terminal Block AMM52 Multiplexer Card
Item 18 (Multiplexer Module,
Item 19 Item 20
Connector Type)
Voltage Input Voltage Input
AMM12C AMC16M Connector Block AMM12
mV Input mV, Thermocouple
AMM22C Multiplexer Module AMC16M Connector Block AMM22J Input Multiplexer Card
AMN32
mV Input Multiplexer
(Item17) mV, Thermocouple
AMM25C Module with AMC16T Connector Block AMM22J
Input Multiplexer Card
Thermocouple Interface
RTD Input RTD Input
AMM32C AMC16R Connector Block AMM32
RTD Input RTD Input
AMM32CJ AMC16R Connector Block AMM32J
Item 14 (Digital I/O Module) Item 15 Item 16
ADM11T Contact Input Module ADT16 Terminal Block ADM11 Contact Input Card
AMN31 ADM12T Contact Input Module ADT32 Terminal Block ADM12 Contact Input Card
(Item13)
ADM51T Contact Output Module ADT16 Terminal Block ADM51 Contact Output Card
ADM52T Contact Output Module ADT32 Terminal Block ADM52 Contact Output Card
Item 18 (Digital I/O Module) Item 19 Item 20

ADM11C Contact Input Module ADC16 Connector Block ADM11 Contact Input Card
AMN32
ADM12C Contact Input Module ADC32 Connector Block ADM12 Contact Input Card
(Item17)
ADM51C Contact Output Module ADC16 Connector Block ADM51 Contact Output Card
ADM52C Contact Output Module ADC32 Connector Block ADM52 Contact Output Card
Note *1: Can also be installed in AMN32 nest.
Figure CMPL A1-6
Subject to change without notice Printed in Japan
<B1. Input/Output Device Configuration and Preparation before Installation> B1-1
B1. Input/Output Device Configuration

and Preparation before Installation
This chapter explains how to configure node units for FIO used for a field control station in the
CENTUM VP system.
TIP • The following models of FCSs can be applied with V Net of CENTUM VP V Net.
AFS30S/AFG30S : Field Control Unit (for FIO, for 19” Rack Mountable Type)
AFS30D/AFG30D : Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, for 19” Rack Mountable Type)
AFS40S/AFG40S : Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)
AFS40D/AFG40D : Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)
The above AFS30S/AFG30S, AFS30D/AFG30D and AFS40S/AFG40S, AFS40D/AFG40D are all refer-
red to as KFCS2/KFCS.
The difference between the above AFS and AFG stations is main memory size only.
AFF50S : Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” Rack Mountable Type)
AFF50D : Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” Rack Mountable Type)
The above AFF50S and AFF50D are all referred to as FFCS.
• The following models of FCSs can be applied with Vnet/IP of CENTUM VP V Net.
AFV10S : Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable Type)
AFV10D : Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable Type)
The above AFV10S and AFV10D are all referred to as FFCS-L.
AFV30S : Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” Rack Mountable Type)
AFV30D : Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” Rack Mountable Type)
AFV40S : Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)
AFV40D : Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)
The above AFV30S/AFV30D and AFV40S/AFV40D are all referred to as FFCS-V.
ACB51 : I/O Expansion Cabinet(for AFV30□/AFV40□)

The I/O Expansion Cabinet(for AFV30□/AFV40□) is referred to as ACB51.

<B1.1 Node in FCS Architecture> B1-2
B1.1 Node in FCS Architecture

Node units (sometimes simply called nodes) are signal processing devices that convert proc-
ess input/output signals to or from the field equipment and transmits them to the field control
unit (FCU).
The terms FCU and FCS (field control station) are both used; an FCU that includes nodes is
referred to as an FCS in this manual.
n Node in FCS Architecture: ESB Bus Node Unit, ER Bus Node Unit
An FCS is a control device which can perform regulatory control and sequence control. In ad-
dition, an FCS has an interface that converts process field equipment input/output signals to
data that can be processed within the system.
n FCS is made up of a FCU that performs the computation processing, an ESB bus that con-
nects the FCU and ESB Bus Node Units, and an ER bus that connects ESB Bus Node Units
and ER Bus Node Units.
l KFCS2 Configuration
Vnet
AFG40D FCU
• AFG40D : Field Control Unit

• ANB10D : Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB Bus
• ANR10D : Node unit for Dual-Redundant ER Bus
There are the following restrictions on node units:

• ESB bus : Length 10 meter or less
• ER bus : Length 185 meter or less (YCB141), 500 meter or less
(YCB311)
• The total number of nodes : 10 nodes or less
(ESB bus and ER bus nodes total)
ESB bus (YCB301)
EB401 SB401
ANB10D ANB10D ANB10D
ER bus (YCB141)
EB501
ANR10D
Figure B1.1-1 FCS Hardware Configuration and Node Network Topology

l FFCS-L Configuration
Vnet/IP
EC401
AFV10D
ESB bus (YCB301)
EB401 SB401
ANB10D
ER bus (YCB141)
EB501 EB501
ANR10D ANR10D
• AFV10D : Field Control Unit

• EC401 : ESB Bus Coupler Module
• SB401 : ESB Bus Slave Interface Module
• EB401 : ER Bus Interface Master Module
• ANR10D : Node unit for Dual-Redundant ER Bus
• EB501 : ER Bus Interface Slave Module
• ESB bus: Length 10 meter or less
• ER bus : Length 185 meter or less (YCB141), 500 meter or less (YCB311)
• The total number of nodes : 14 nodes or less (ESB bus and ER bus nodes total)

l FFCS-V Configuration
Vnet/IP
EC402
AFV30D
ESB bus (YCB301)
SB401 SB401
ANB10D ANB10D
ESB bus (YCB301)
SB401 SB401
ANB10D ANB10D

• EC402 : ESB Bus Coupler Module(for AFV30/AFV40, 2-port)
• SB401 : ESB Bus Slave Interface Module(for FIO)
• ESB bus: Length 10 meter or less(single bus system)
• Maximum Number of nodes : 13; 9(single bus system)
n Node in FCS Architecture: Optical ESB Bus Node Unit

An FCS is a control device which can perform regulatory control and sequence control. In ad-
dition, an FCS has an interface that converts process field equipment input/output signals to
data that can be processed within the system.
The following is an example FCS configuration that FCU used for control computation and the
modules for long distance transmission and the ESB bus node units are installed in FCS. The
ESB bus node unit can convert electronic signal into optical signal and vice versa.

Vnet/IP
EC401
ANT401
AFV30D
Fiber-Optic cable(to 5 km)
ANT411 ANT502
ANB11D
Total length of
optical ESB Bus :
50 km or less
Fiber-Optic cable(5 km to 50 km)
ANT512
ANB11D
• ANT401 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master
Module 5 km
• ANB11D : Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB
Bus With Optical Repeater
• ANT502 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave
Module 5 km
• ANT411 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master
Module 5 km to 50 km
HK Bus • ANT512 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave
Module 5 km to 50 km
HK Unit
The figure to the left is a configuration example
of ANT512 with HKU interface.
The information of HKU (temperature and fan
status and so on) can be acquired.

• Total length of optical ESB Bus : 50 km or less
• Maximum number of Nodes : 13 (ESB bus and ER bus nodes total).
n Node in FCS Architecture: Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater

Module and Optical ESB Bus Node Unit
The following is an example FCS configuration that the FCU used for control computation,
unit for the bus repeater modules, optical ESB bus node unit, ESB bus and optical ESB bus
cables used for linking the optical ESB bus repeater modules are included.

The unit for optical ESB bus repeater module can convert electronic signal into optical signal
and vice versa; the modules for long distance transmission are installed in this unit. The opti-
cal bus cables are used for linking the modules for long distance transmissions.
Vnet/IP
EC401
AFV30D

• ANT10U : Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module
• ANT401 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module 5 km
• ANT411 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module 5 km to 50 km
• ANB11D : Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB Bus With Optical
ANT401 Repeater
ESB bus (YCB301) ANT411 • ANT502 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module 5 km
• ANT512 : Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module 5 km to 50 km
ANT401
ANT10U
The figure to the left is a configuration example of ANT512 with HKU
interface.
The information of HKU (temperature and fan status and so on) can
be acquired.
Fiber-Optic cable(to 5 km)
Fiber-Optic cable(to 5 km) Fiber-Optic cable(5 km to 50 km)
ANT502 ANT512
ANB11D ANB11D
HK Bus HK Bus
HK Unit HK Unit

• Total length of optical ESB Bus : 50 km or less
• Maximum number of Nodes : 13 (ESB bus and ER bus nodes total)

<B1.2 Types and Configuration of Node Units> B1-7
B1.2 Types and Configuration of Node Units

Node units are classified according to the types of buses connected to the FCU node. There
are three types of nodes, the ESB bus node unit connected to the FCU, the optical ESB bus
node unit used for converting electronic signal to optical signal or vice versa, and the ER bus
node unit used for connecting remote devices through ER buses.
n Types of Node Units

There are the following six types of node units.
Table B1.2-1 Node Unit

Type Name
ANB10S Node unit for Single ESB Bus
ANB10D Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB Bus
ANR10S Node unit for Single ER Bus
ANR10D Node unit for Dual-Redundant ER Bus
ANB11S Node unit for Single ESB Bus with Optical Repeater
ANB11D Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB Bus with Optical Repeater
Node units are available for connection with either a single bus or a dual-redundant bus. The
nodes are constructed based on a 12-slot base unit, which can be mounted in a 19-inch rack.
This base unit has fixed positions for 4 common slots, along with 8 slots that can be used for
I/O modules.
For a node unit to be connected to a dual-redundant bus, two power supply modules of the
same device type and either an ESB bus slave interface module, an ER bus interface slave
module or Optical ESB Bus Repeater slave module must be installed in the common section.
An ER bus interface master module is installed in the I/O module section.
The bus interface modules and the corresponding control units and the related node units are
shown as follows:
Table B1.2-2 Bus Interface Module and Control unit, Node unit
Type Name Control unit,
Node unit
SB401 ESB Bus Slave Interface Module ANB10S/ANB10D
EB401 ER Bus Interface Master Module ANB10S/ANB10D
EB501 ER Bus Interface Slave Module ANR10S/ANR10D
ANT401 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module 5 km ANB10S/ANB10D,ANB11S/ANB11D
AFV30S/AFV30D,AFV40S/AFV40D
ANT411 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module 5 km to 50
km
ANT502 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module 5 km ANB11S/ANB11D
ANT512 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module 5 km to 50 ANB11S/ANB11D
km

ANB10D
Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB bus
ANR10D
Node unit for Dual-Redundant ER bus
ANB11D
Node unit for Dual-Redundant ESB bus
with Optical Repeater
Figure B1.2-1 Node Units
n Configuration of Node Units

A node unit is constructed by installing a power supply module, an ESB bus interface module
or an ER bus interface module, optical ESB bus repeater module and an I/O module on the
base unit.
l Node Unit for ESB Bus (Model: ANB10S/ANB10D)

Node units are available for both single and dual-redundant ESB buses (the figure below
shows a node unit for a dual-redundant bus).

ESB Bus Slave
Interface Module Power supply module
Slot for I/O modules
Grounding
terminal
Figure B1.2-2 Node Unit for ESB Bus
l Node Unit for ER Bus (Model: ANR10S/ANR10D)

Node units are available for both single and dual-redundant ER buses (the figure below
shows a node unit for a dual-redundant bus).
ER Bus Interface
Slave Module Power supply module
Grounding
terminal
Figure B1.2-3 Node Unit for ER Bus
l Node Unit for ESB Bus with Optical Repeater (Model: ANB11S/ANB11D)
Node units are available for both single and dual-redundant Optical ESB buses (the figure be-
low shows a node unit for a dual-redundant bus, with HKU Interface).
Optical ESB Bus
Repeater Slave Module Power supply module
Grounding
terminal
Figure B1.2-4 Node Unit for ESB Bus with Optical Repeater

n Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module (Model: ANT10U)

The optical ESB bus repeater modules are installed in the Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater
Module and connected to the field control unit and the optical ESB bus node unit.
Structure of Node Unit for Holding Optical ESB Bus Repeater Modules
The modules can be installed are as follows:
• ANT401: Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module 5 km
• ANT411: Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module 5 km to 50 km
• ANT502: Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module 5 km
• ANT512: Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module 5 km to 50 km
Slot for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module
Grounding
terminal
Figure B1.2-5 Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module

<B1.3 Installation of Node Units> B1-11
B1.3 Installation of Node Units

A node unit consists of a base unit made up of a common section and an I/O module section.
The common section can be made dual-redundant and have power supply modules, ESB bus
interface slave modules or ER bus interface modules installed. I/O modules are installed in
the I/O module section. The base unit is shaped so that it can be installed on a general-pur-
pose instrument board or a 19-inch rack.
n Cabinet Installation Type Node Unit

A node unit of this type should be installed in a cabinet with a 19-inch rack.
When specified, node units of the cabinet installation type are shipped from the factory pre-
installed in the cabinet.
In addition, input/output expansion cabinets are available, which can store both node units
and the necessary input/output devices.
FCU
FCU
Node units Node units
An example of AFG40D An example of AFV40D
Figure B1.3-1 Node Units Installed in a Cabinet
n Installation in a Rack
Observe the following when you install the node unit on a rack or an instrument panel.
l Isolation from the rack

Isolate the node unit from the rack by attaching insulating bushings. Fasten a pair of insulat-
ing bushings together to each of the screw holes on the plate or the bracket on the node unit
to prevent the node unit from touching the rack. And then screw the node unit to the rack. Af-
ter screwing the node unit to the rack, confirm that the node unit is electrically isolated. insu-
lating bushings are supplied with the node unit.

WARNING
When you install the ‘node unit with insulating bushings attached’ on a rack or an instrument
panel, do not keep the node unit hung on loose screws in an unstable status. Too much force
may apply to the insulating bushings and cause damaged or broken insulating bushings.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure to turn the power supply of a node unit off when installing or removing it. If the
power supply of the node unit is dual-redundant, turn the power supplies of both power
supply units off.
In order to turn the power supply off, turn the external switch or breaker off. If they are not
available, disconnect the connector of the cable to the power supply unit.
• If multiple node units exist, all the units should be grounded by connecting to the earth
terminal separately.
l Providing of Space for Heat Radiation

Be sure to allow space for radiation of heat at the top and bottom of the equipment.
• If the equipment is installed inside an instrument panel which has a closed top, install the
equipment at least 100 mm away from the top, and open an exhaust hole of at least 200
cm2 or install an exhaust fan.
• Ensure a space of at least 50 mm between the back of the equipment and the rear panel
of the cabinet or the wall of the room.
• When installing an 19-inch rack mount devices on the same rack, use 3-unit spacing (1
unit: 44.45 mm) between devices. Do not use any space between equipments for cable
wiring or anything.
• Do not block ventilation openings in top and bottom face of equipment.
l Providing of Maintenance Spaces

Be sure to allow spaces for maintenance.
• All cables for units and I/O modules are connected to the front.
• Checking the indicator lamp, setting, inspection, removal, and insertion of the cards are
performed in the front.
• Ensure a space of at least 1000 mm in front of the equipment for wiring and maintenance.

Fan or Outlet; Out Opening > 200 cm2
Top panel
Min. 100 mm
Do not stack instruments without space.
Front
Min. 3 UNIT
Min. 50 mm
Maintenance area
Min. 1000 mm
Figure B1.3-2 Rack Mounting Space
l Installation Procedure
1. Fasten a pair of insulating bushings together to each of the screw holes on the plate or
the bracket on the node unit.
The tapering end of the insulating bushings must come to the front side where a screw
enters.
2. Using eight M5 screws to fix the node unit onto the rack or the panel.
Using grounding terminal to connect  How to install insulating bushings
the base unit to earth
(Grounding, less than 100 ohm).
Make the grounding cable to pass Base unit Insulating
through the tray and pull it down bushing
along the right side of the racks. Insulating bushing
Example of ESB Bus
Slave Interface Module (with a tapering end)
Screw
Power supply module
Rack
Plate
(front)
Input/output module
Attach insulating bushings

to both sides of the plate.
Plate
Cable tray
Insulating bushing
Screw Rack
Figure B1.3-3 Node Unit Mounted on Rack

<B1.4 Power Supply Wiring and Grounding> B1-14
B1.4 Power Supply Wiring and Grounding

This section explains how to connect the power supply cable to a node unit’s power supply
module, and how to ground it.
CAUTION
• Wire the power cable through the conduit at the desk entrance for the following reasons:
• To prevent damage to the cable due to contact with a metal plate.
• To avoid applying excessive weight on the Ring terminals or power connection termi-
nals due to the weight of the cable.
• Turn off the main power supply, and perform work after confirming with a tester that there
is no power in the power cable to be connected.
• After the power cable has been connected, turn on the power to the power cable with the
breaker in the power panel turned OFF. Then, confirm with a tester that normal power is
being supplied to the power connection terminal.
• Wire the power cable so that a distance of 1 cm or more is maintained from other signal
lines.

B1.4.1 Power Supply Wiring

This section explains how to connect the cable to the power supply module on an installed
node unit.
n Power Supply Cable Connection

A power supply module comes with an approximately 1 meter cable with a one-end connector
connected to it. Connect the attached one-end connector to the power distribution unit in the
cabinet in the case of a power supply module of a cabinet installation type node.
When a node unit is installed in a general-purpose rack, connect the power supply cable ac-
cording to the following procedure.
1. Pull the protection cover of the power supply module off from the front.
It can be removed in the following way:
• Find the locking claw at the bottom part in the front of the protection cover (indicated
by the circle in the figure below).
• Push the claw up with a finger to unlock the cover.
• Pull the protection cover lightly forward.
2. Remove the cable attached to the power supply module.
3. Connect the power supply cable to the power supply connection terminals, indicated by
symbols “L and N” (100 V /220 V AC power supply) or “+ and -” (24 V DC power supply).
Connect the grounding cable to the grounding terminal.
4. After the wiring is complete, put the protection cover back over the power supply termi-
nals.
Power supply module (front view ) Power supply module (side view )
Protection cover
L
Power input terminals
N
Grounding terminal
Claw for locking

protection cover
Figure B1.4.1-1 Power Supply Connection
IMPORTANT
It is recommended to use a switch or breaker in the power supply wiring, so that the power
supply can be turned on/off for individual node units at maintenance.

SEE
ALSO For more information about how to connect the power supply to a distribution board of a cabinet installation
type node, refer to:
Field Control Stations (IM 33K50E40-50E)
For more information about general guidelines on power supply wiring and grounding, refer to:
n Wires and Ring Terminals Used

The wires should conform the equivalent specification of JIS C 3312.
At the end of the wire, the ring terminals with insulating sleeves should be crimped. The ring
terminals and the crimp-on tool should come from the same maker.
Ring terminal specification is as follows.
Insulating sleeve
inside diameter
Hole diameter
Ring outside diameter Ring terminal length
Figure B1.4.1-2 Ring Terminal
Table B1.4.1-1 Ring Terminal Dimensions
Nominal cross Insulating

sectional area Screw used Hole diameter Ring outside Ring terminal sleeve
(mm) (mm) diameter (mm) length (mm) inside diameter
(mm2) (mm)
1.25 4 4.3 or more 8.2 or less approx. 21 3.6 or more
2.0 4 4.3 or more 8.7 or less approx. 21 4.3 or more

B1.4.2 Grounding
Be sure to ground the equipment in order to avoid the electric shock of the operator and main-
tenance engineers and to prevent the influence of external noise.
The grounding should be protective grounding (100 ohm or less).
CAUTION
For grounding, connect cable to the protective-ground terminal next to the power source con-
nection terminal (100 ohms or less).
SEE
ALSO For more information about power supply cable connection and earth connection, refer to:
Installation guidance for CENTUM VP Installation Guidance (TI 33K01J10-50E)

Blank Page
<B2. Input/Output Devices (For FIO)> B2-1
B2. Input/Output Devices (For FIO)

An input/output device is constructed by installing a power supply module and a bus interface
module in the 4 slots in the common section, and I/O modules in the other 8 slots as necessa-
ry, in the 12-slot base unit.
An I/O module for FIO acts as a signal converter that reads analog and digital signals from
the field equipment and converts them into data values used in the Field Control Station, and
outputs similar internal data values to the field equipment.
I/O modules for FIO can largely be classified into the following three types. Each type is fur-
ther divided into several types.
• Analog I/O modules
• Digital I/O modules
• Communication modules
In addition to these modules, this section explains three kinds of related accessory devices,
pressure clamp terminal blocks, KS cable interface adapters, and terminal boards.

<B2.1 Installation Restrictions and Precautions> B2-2
B2.1 Installation Restrictions and Precautions

When using the I/O devices, there are following restrictions regarding the combination with
I/O modules, power consumption and ambient temperature and so on.
The corresponding node units are ANB10S/ANB10D, ANB11S/ANB11D and ANR10S/
ANR10D.
n Slot Names of Node Unit

The slots in a node unit are named according to their positions shown as follows. Where B1,
B2, P1 and P2 are reserved slots.
Slot name IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 B1 B2 P1 P2
Figure B2.1-1 Slot Names and Slot Positions
The figure below shows the slot names and installable modules.
PW481 PW481
FIO FIO FIO FIO FIO FIO FIO FIO *1 *1
or or
PW482 PW482
or or
PW484 PW484
*1 Modules can be mounted in slot B1 and slot B2: SB401, EB501, ANT502, ANT512
Figure B2.1-2 Slot Name and Installable Modules
IMPORTANT
• For the single node unit, the SB401, EB501, ANT502 or ANT512 is installed to B1. For
dual-redundant node unit, the SB401, EB501, ANT502 or ANT512 for bus 1 is installed in
B1 and the SB401, EB501, ANT502 or ANT512 for bus 2 is installed in B2.
• EB401 can be installed to slot IO1 to IO8.
• The slot can be identified by the characters screen-printed on the backboard (print
board).
n Installing Dual-Redundant Input/Output Modules

When I/O modules are made dual-redundant, install them at the positions of slot numbered
IO1-IO2, IO3-IO4, IO5-IO6, or IO7-IO8 in the figure before page (two consecutive slots begin-
ning with an odd number).
n Protection of Vacant Slots

Node units for single operation are shipped with dummy covers on the B2 and P2 slots.
Make sure to put dummy covers on slots on which no I/O modules are installed.
• Model ADCV01
Dummy cover for I/O module and bus interface module slot
• Model ADCV02

Dummy cover for power supply module slot (Covered on P2 slot when only single power
supply unit is used)
n Installation Restrictions for Communication Modules

SEE
ALSO For more information about the limitations of installing Communication Modules, refer to:
CENTUM VP FIO System Overview “GS 33K50F10-50E”
n Installation Restrictions for Node Units

Installation of modules in any one of ANB10S, ANB10D, ANR10S, ANR10D node units or
FFCS Compact FCS imposes a limitation on the total number of modules that are to supply
power to field transmitters.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the limitations of installing the ANB10S, ANB10D, ANR10S, ANR10D node units
or AFF50S/AFF50D Field Control Unit, refer to:
n Limitations of Installation under the Ambient Operating Temperature

Conditions
l For models AFS40S/AFS40D, AFG40S/AFG40D, and ACB41
The number of nodes can be installed depends on AFS40S/AFS40D, AFG40S/AFG40D and
ACB41 (ambient temperature 0 to 50 deg. C) ambient temperature.
• AFS40S/AFS40D, AFG40S/AFG40D
Ambient temperature 40 to 50 Deg. C; Number of nodes: 9 Max. (5 local nodes in front
part, 4 remote nodes in rear part.)
Ambient temperature 0 to 40 Deg. C; Number of nodes: 10 Max. (5 local nodes in front
part, 5 remote nodes in rear part.)
• ACB41
Ambient temperature 0 to 50 Deg. C; Number of nodes: 8 Max. (4 in front part, 4 in rear
part.)
l For models AFV40S/AFV40D and ACB51

The number of AFV40S/AFV40D and ACB51 nodes can be installed (under the circumstance
that the ambient temperature is between 0 to 50 deg. C).
• AFV40S/AFV40D
Maximum Number of nodes: 11 (ESB bus node units: 5 in front part, 6 in rear part.)
• ACB51
Maximum Number of nodes: 12 (ESB bus node/Optical ESB bus node/Optical ESB re-
peater units: 6 in front part, 6 in rear part.)
l For models ANB10S/ANB10D, ANB11S/ANB11D and ANT10U

When a ESB Bus Node Unit, Optical ESB Bus Node Unit and Unit for Optical ESB Bus Re-
peater Module (optional operation temperature -20 to 70 Deg. C) are used in the temperature
between 60 and 70 deg.C, it subjects the following restrictions.
• Number of I/O modules installed to a node is limited to 4.
• At least one slot should be empty between SB401, ANT401, ANT411, ANT502, ANT512
and other I/O modules.

• At least one slot should be empty between I/O module and I/O module.If the I/O modules
are in dual-redundant configuration, the two empty slots are required between the dual-
redundant I/O modules and other I/O modules.
• No more than 8 points in one relay output module (Model: ADR541) should be used.
• The external output termination resister of current output module (Model: AAI841, AAI835
or AAI543) should be more than 200 ohms.
• AAI543 of fast-response specification cannot be installed.
Vacant
Vacant
Vacant
Vacant
FIO FIO FIO FIO SB401SB401 PW481 PW481
or or
PW482 PW482
or or
dual redundant PW484 PW484
Leave one slot empty between
ESB bus slave interface module,
optical ESB bus repeater module
and other I/O module
Figure B2.1-3 ESB Bus Node Unit, Optical ESB Bus Node Unit and Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater
Module
l For models ANR10S/ANR10D

When a ER Bus Node Unit (optional operation temperature -20 to 70 Deg. C) are used in the
temperature between 60 and 70 deg.C, it subjects the following restrictions.
• Number of I/O modules installed to a node is limited to 4.
• At least one slot should be empty between EB501 and other I/O modules.
• At least one slot should be empty between I/O module and I/O module.
If the I/O modules are in dual-redundant configuration, the two empty slots are required
between the dual-redundant I/O modules and other I/O modules.
• No more than 8 points in one relay output module (Model: ADR541) should be used.
• The external output termination resister of current output module (Model: AAI841, AAI835
or AAI543) should be more than 200 ohms.
• AAI543 of fast-response specification cannot be installed.
Vacant
Vacant
Vacant
Vacant
FIO FIO FIO FIO EB501EB501 PW481 PW481

or or
PW482 PW482
or or
dual redundant PW484 PW484
Leave one slot empty between
EB501 and other I/O module
Figure B2.1-4 Slot Names and I/O Module Installation
n Ambient Temperature and Operation Restrictions of ER Bus Node

Unit
When a ER Bus Node Unit is used under the temperature of -20 to 0 deg C (optional ambient
temperature is -20 to 70 deg C), the warming up may required 10 minutes after power up.
When turning ON the power, the ER bus may not give response for the 10 minutes.

n Notice When EB401 is in Single Configuration

When EB401 is in single configuration, it is installed to the odd numbered slot in ESB Bus
Node Unit, the even numbered slot next to it should be left empty. EB401 can not be installed
in ER Bus Node Unit.
n Limitations of Installation of Modules with Built-in Barrier

• Keep a distance of 50 mm or more between the intrinsically safe area and the non-intrins-
ically safe area.
• Modules with built-in barriers can be installed together with other type of modules in the
same node unit or field control unit.
• An insulating partition should be installed between the area of modules with built-in barri-
ers and the area of other modules.
• Two types of insulating partitions are available.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Installation of Isolating Partition, refer to:
B3.6.1, “Installation of Isolating Partition” on page B3-72
For more information about Restriction on Installation of Modules with Built-in Barrier, refer to:
n Restrictions on AAT141 (Thermocouple Input) Installation

To guarantee the accuracy the reference cold junction compensation, the pressure clamp ter-
minal should be prevented from the ambient heat. So that the following 1. to 3. conditions
should be satisfied.
l For Single Node

• Under the node that AAT141 is installed, the unit that may generate heat should not be
installed.
• Do not install AAT141 at the position with exposure of the direct air flow from fan.
• Do not install AAT141 next to the CP461.
• Do not install AAT141 next to the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module ANT502 or
ANT512.
• Do not install AAT141 next to the bus interface module SB401 or EB501.
• The modules can be installed next to AAT141 are as follows. For other I/O modules, at
least one slot should be left empty next to AAT141.
Models: AAT141, AAT145, AAR181, AAR145, AAV141, AAV142, AAV542 and AAV144
l For Installing in Cabinet

• If a fan is installed in the upper part, the node that AAT141 is installed should placed 3U
(1 Unit: 44.45 mm) away from the fan.
• Do not install AAT141 next to CP461.
• Do not install AAT141 next to SB401, EB501, ANT502 or ANT512.
• The modules can be installed next to AAT141 are as follows. For other I/O modules, at
least one slot should be left empty next to AAT141.
Models: AAT141, AAT145, AAR181, AAR145, AAV141, AAV142, AAV542 and AAV144

• When installing AAT141 to AFV40□ or ACB51, it should be installed to the following posi-
tions (3,4,5,7,8,9,10)as shown in the figure below.
• At the positions of 6,11and 12, the heat-generating devices should not be installed.
• Moreover, the node that the AAT141 is installed should not be placed above or under the
node fan unit.
The following figure shows the installation position in AFV40S/AFV40D and ACB51.
AFV40 Rear
AFV40 Front ACB51 Front or Rear
1 7
FAN
2 8
3 9
4 10 : AAT141 installed position
5 11
6 12
Figure B2.1-5 Installed Position of AAT141 in Cabinet (If node only)
AFV40 Rear
AFV40 Front ACB51 Front or Rear
FAN
Shield plate
The heat generat-

Ing devices other
Shield plate than nodes.
The heat generat-

Ing devices other
than nodes.
Figure B2.1-6 Installed Position of AAT141 in Cabinet (If heat generating device exists)

The following figure shows the installation position in AFS40S/AFS40D, AFG40S/AFG40D
and ACB41.
AFS40 Front AFS40 Rear
AFG40 Front AFG40 Rear ACB41Front or Rear
FCU
AAT141 installed position
Figure B2.1-7 Installed Position of AAT141 in Cabinet (If node only)
AFS40 Front
AFG40 Front ACB41 Front or Rear
The device installed The device installed AFS40 Rear
with FAN units with FAN units AFG40 Rear
ACB41 Front or Rear
3U or more
FCU BCV etc.
Shield plate
Shield plate
The heat generat-
Shield plate
ing devices other
The heat generat- than nodes.
ing devices other
The heat generat- than nodes.
ing devices other
than nodes.
Figure B2.1-8 Installed Position of AAT141 in Cabinet (If heat generating device exists)
l Wiring to the Field

The compensation wires used for this module is 1.25 mm2 or less. Connect the wires to the
terminal started from CH1.

IMPORTANT
The accuracy of reference cold junction compensation depends on the stable ambient tem-
perature. If the ambient temperature fluctuates, the accuracy of reference cold junction com-
pensation can not be guaranteed until the ambient temperature becomes stable.
n Restrictions on AAT145 (Thermocouple Input) and Terminal Board

AET4D Installation
To guarantee the accuracy the cold junction compensation, the terminal board should be pre-
vented from the ambient heat. So that the following conditions should be satisfied
l For Single Terminal Board

When installing a device that generates heat near the terminal board, the heat-generating de-
vice should be placed above the terminal board as well as the cables of the terminal board. If
the heat-generating device is already designed to be placed under the terminal board, put a
plate to isolate the terminal board from the heat-generation device.
l For Installing in Cabinet

If a heat generating device is installed in the same cabinet, the heat-generating device should
be placed above the terminal board as well as the cables of the terminal board. If the heat-
generating device is already designed to be placed under the terminal board, put a plate to
isolate the terminal board from the heat-generation device.
IMPORTANT
The accuracy of reference cold junction compensation depends on the stable ambient tem-
perature. If the ambient temperature fluctuates, the accuracy of reference cold junction com-
pensation can not be guaranteed until the ambient temperature becomes stable.
AFS40 Rear
AFS40 Front ACB41 Front or Rear AFG40 Rear AFV40 Front AFV40 Rear
AFG40 Front ACB41 Front or Rear ACB51 Front or Rear
The heat generat-

FCU BCV etc. ing devices
The heat generat- FAN
ing devices
The heat generat- The heat generat-
The heat generat- The heat generating devices
ing devices
ing devices ing devices
The heat generat- AET4D
ing devices AET4D The heat generat- AET4D
The heat generat-
AET4D ing devices
ing devices AET4D AET4D
AET4D AET4D AET4D
AET4D
AET4D AET4D AET4D
AET4D AET4D
Figure B2.1-9 Position of AET4D in Cabinet

AFS40 Rear
AFS40 Front AFG40 Rear AFV40 Rear
ACB41 Front or Rear AFV40 Front
AFG40 Front ACB41 Front or Rear ACB51 Front or Rear
The heat generat-

FCU BCV etc. ing devices
The heat generat- FAN
ing devices
The heat generat- The heat generat-
The heat generat- The heat generating devices ing devices
ing devices ing devices
The heat generat-
AET4D The heat generat- A ET 4D
The heat generating devices
ing devices
ing devices AET4D
AET4D A ET 4D
AET4D A ET 4D
AET4D
Shield plate Shield plate
AET4D A ET 4D
Shield plate
The heat generat-
Shield plate The heat generat-
ing devices Shield plate
The heat generat-
ing devices
ing devices
Figure B2.1-10 Position of AET4D in Cabinet (Applied with a shield plate)

<B2.2 Types of Input/Output Devices> B2-10
B2.2 Types of Input/Output Devices

This section explains the input/output device components such as I/O modules, power supply
modules, bus interfaces, and related cables and terminal boards.
n Common Section
The following modules are installed in the common section of an input/output device.
• Power supply module
• ESB Bus Slave Interface Module
• ER Bus Interface Master Module
• ER Bus Interface Slave Module
• Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module, Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module
n Types of Input/Output Modules (for FIO)

The following table lists the types of I/O modules.
Table B2.2-1 Types of Analog I/O Modules

Models Name
AAI141 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated)
AAV141 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated)
AAV142 Analog Input Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated)
AAI841 Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA Input, 4 to 20 mA Output, 8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output,
Non-Isolated)
AAB841 Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V Input, 4 to 20 mA Output, 8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output, Non-
Isolated)
AAV542 Analog Output Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated)
AAI143 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Isolated)
AAV144 Analog Input Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-Channel, Isolated)
AAV544 Analog Output Module (-10 to +10 V, 16-Channel, Isolated)
AAI543 Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Isolated)
AAT141 TC/mV Input Module (16-Channel, Isolated)
AAR181 RTD Input Module (12-Channel, Isolated)
AAI135 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 8-Channel, Isolated Channels)
AAI835 Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA Input, 4 to 20 mA Output, 4-Channel Input/4-Channel Output,
Isolated)
AAT145 TC/mV Input Module (16-Channel, Isolated Channels)
AAR145 RTD/POT Input Module (16-Channel, Isolated Channels)
AAP135 Pulse Input Module (8-Channel, Pulse Count, 0 to 10 kHz, Isolated Channels)
AAP149 Pulse Input Module for Compatible PM1 (16-Channel, Pulse Count, 0 to 6 kHz, Non-Isolated)
AAP849 Pulse Input Module/Analog Output Module (8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output, Non-Isolated)
Table B2.2-2 Types of Analog I/O Modules with HART Communication Function
Models Name
AAI141-H Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated)
AAB141-H Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Non-Isolated)

Models Name
AAI841-H Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA Input, 4 to 20 mA Output, 8-Channel Input/8-Channel Output,
Non-Isolated)
AAB842-H Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA Input, 4 to 20 mA Output, 8-Channel Input/8-Channel
Output, Non-Isolated)
AAI143-H Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Isolated)
AAI543-H Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 16-Channel, Isolated)
AAI135-H Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 8-Channel, Isolated Channels)
AAI835-H Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA Input, 4 to 20 mA Output, 4-Channel Input/4-Channel Output,
Isolated)
Table B2.2-3 Types of Digital I/O Modules

Models Name
ADV151 Digital Input Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC, Isolated)
ADV141 Digital Input Module (16-Channel, 100 to 120 V AC, Isolated)
ADV142 Digital Input Module (16-Channel, 200 to 240 V AC, Isolated)
ADV551 Digital Output Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC, Isolated)
ADV157 Digital Input Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp Terminal Support Only, Isolated)
ADV161 Digital Input Module (64-Channel, 24 V DC, Isolated)
ADV557 Digital Output Module (32-Channel, 24 V DC, Pressure Clamp Terminal Support Only, Isolated)
ADV561 Digital Output Module (64-Channel, 24 V DC, Isolated)
ADR541 Relay Output Module (16-Channel, 24 to 110 V DC/100 to 240 V AC, Isolated)
ADV859 Digital I/O Module for Compatible ST2 (16-Channel Input/16-Channel Output, Isolated Chan-
nels)
ADV159 Digital Input Module for Compatible ST3 (32-Channel Input, Isolated Channels)
ADV559 Digital Output Module for Compatible ST4 (32-Channel Output, Isolated Channels)
ADV869 Digital I/O Module for Compatible ST5 (32-Channel Input/32-Channel Output, Isolated, Com-
mon Minus Side Every 16-Channel)
ADV169 Digital Input Module for Compatible ST6 (64-Channel Input, Isolated, Common Minus Side Ev-
ery 16-Channel)
ADV569 Digital Output Module for Compatible ST7 (64-Channel Output, Isolated, Common Minus Side
Every 16-Channel)
ADV851 Digital I/O Module (16-Channel input, 16-Channel output, 24 V DC)
Table B2.2-4 Types of Communication Modules

Models Name
ALR111 RS-232C Communication Module (2-Port)
ALR121 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module (2-Port)
ALE111 Ethernet Communication Module
ALF111 FOUNDATION fieldbus (FF-H1) Communication Module (4-Port)
ALP111 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
ALP121 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (for FIO)

SEE
ALSO For more information about the specifications of I/O modules, refer to:
• GS 33K50F60-50E Analog I/O Modules (for FIO)
• GS 33K50F70-50E Digital I/O Modules (for FIO)
• GS 33K50G10-50E Serial Communication Modules (for FIO)
• GS 33K50G11-50E Ethernet Communication Module (for FIO)
• GS 33K50G20-50E FOUNDATION fieldbus Communication Module (for FIO)
• GS 33K50G80-50E Communication Module (for FIO)
• GS 33K50G85-50E PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (for FIO)
n Accessories Related to Input/Output Devices

The following accessories related to the input/output devices are available:
• Pressure clamp terminal block
Available for both single and dual-redundant operation
• KS cable interface adapter
• Terminal board

<B2.3 Common Section> B2-13
B2.3 Common Section

Power supply modules and bus interface modules can be installed in the common section of
the same base unit where I/O modules are installed.

B2.3.1 Power Supply Module

A power supply module is connected to a 100 V to 120 V AC, a 220 V to 240 V AC, or a 24 V
DC power source, and isolatedly supplies the +5 V and +24 V DC outputs to the installed I/O
modules through the backboard. The +5 V and +24 V outputs can be dual-redundantly config-
ured.
n Configuration
Power supply module
SYS
Status lamp POWER
FLD
Check terminal
+5 V
+24 V CHECK
GND
L +
Power supply input terminal (AC) Power supply input terminal (24 V DC)
N -
Grounding terminal
Figure B2.3.1-1 Power Supply Module
l Power Input Terminal

This terminal receives the specified power supply voltage. It is delivered with a power supply
cable attached; remove it if it is not necessary.
• L (+) : Ungrounded
• N (-) : Grounded
• Grounding terminal : For grounding
SEE
ALSO For more information about removing power supply modules, refer to:
B4.2.2, “Replacing Power Supply Modules” on page B4-11
l Status LEDs
• SYS : The lamp is ON when +5 V is output properly. Otherwise, the lamp is OFF.
• FLD : The lamp is ON when +24 V is output properly. Otherwise, the lamp is OFF.
l Check Terminals
It is possible to measure output voltages of +5 V DC and +24 V DC using these terminals for
maintenance purposes.

B2.3.2 ESB Bus Slave Interface Module (Model SB401)

The SB401 module is the communication module installed on ESB Bus Node Unit. It commu-
nicates with an ESB Bus Interface Master Module (Model: SB301) or ESB Bus Coupler Mod-
ules(Model: EC401, EC402).
SB401 has one port for an ESB bus; dual-redundant bus operation can be supported by in-
stalling two modules.
n Configuration
LED display close-up
LED display
ESB bus address setting STATUS ACT RSP

DIP switch
ESB bus connector
Figure B2.3.2-1 SB401
l LED Display
• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normally and
the ESB interface is operating normally, otherwise it is turned off.
• SEL : This LED turns on during data transmission to an I/O module, otherwise it is
turned off.
• RSP : This LED turns on during data reception from an I/O module, otherwise it is
turned off.
l Connecting ESB Bus

As shown in the figure below, for connecting the ESB bus, an ESB bus branch connector is
connected to the ESB bus connector on the SB401 module.
And then, two ESB bus cables (Model: YCB301) are connected to the two ports on ESB bus
branch connector. If the SB401 is placed at the end of the ESB bus, the ESB bus branch con-
nector with a built-in terminator should be used.
Branch connector Branch connector with terminator
for ESB bus for ESB bus
Figure B2.3.2-2 ESB Bus Branch Connector

WARNING
When connecting or disconnecting the ESB bus branch connector for a dual-redundant node
unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.
l ESB Bus Address Setting DIP Switches

When multiple node units are connected to an ESB bus, it is possible to select a node unit to
be accessed by setting the node address using these switches.
n Setting Node Addresses

The node addresses on the ESB bus are set using the node address setting switch.
l Set Node Numbers when Connected to FFCS

The node numbers for the nodes in FFCS should be in the range between 2 and 4 .
Node number 1 is reserved for the field control unit.
The node numbers for the nodes in the field control station other than FFCS should be in the
range between 1 and 10.
It is possible to match the required node numbers by setting the DIP switches as shown be-
low.
0 1
Node address parity (1 bit, odd parity)
1
Fixed to 0
2
(MSB)
3
4
Node address
5
(LSB)
6
Bit number
MSB : Most Significant Bit
LSB : Least Significant Bit
Figure B2.3.2-3 Node Number Setting DIP Switches
Table B2.3.2-1 Node Number and Switch Positions

Node number(*1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Bit 4 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
Bit 5 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Bit 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
*1: 1:ON
0:OFF
l Set Node Numbers when Connected to FFCS-L/FFCS-V

The node numbers for the nodes in FFCS-L/FFCS-V should be in the range between 2 and
14.
Node number 1 is reserved for the field control unit.

It is possible to match the required node numbers by setting the DIP switches as shown be-
low.
0 1
Switch parity (1 bit, odd parity)
1
Fixed to 0
2
(MSB)
3
4
Node address (4 bits)
5
(LSB) The figure to the left shows an example when node number is 2.
6
MSB : Most Significant Bit (The highest one)

LSB : Least Significant Bit (The lowest one)
Table B2.3.2-2 Node Number and Switch Positions

Node num-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
ber(*1)
Bit 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit 4 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Bit 5 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Bit 6 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
*1: 1:ON
0:OFF
Setting DIP switches

0: The above figure shows that the dip switch is turned to the left side.
1: The above figure shows that the dip switch is turned to the right side.

B2.3.3 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module (Model:

ANT401, ANT411)
The optical ESB bus repeater master module is used with the optical ESB bus repeater slave
module to extend the ESB bus transmission distance .
The optical ESB bus repeater master module is installed on the field control unit, the ESB bus
node unit, the optical ESB bus node unit, or the unit for optical ESB bus repeater module.
n Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module Types

The optical ESB bus repeater master modules consist of the following types:
Table B2.3.3-1 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module Types

Model Name Description
ANT401 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Mod- • Installable units:
ule Field control unit
ESB Bus Node Unit
Optical ESB Bus Node Unit
Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module
• Module types:
ESB bus branch connector (without built-in termi-
nator)
ESB bus branch connector (with built-in termina-
tor)
• Total transmission maximum length of fiber-optic
Cable
5 km
ANT411 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Mod- • Installable units:
ule Field control unit
• Module types:
nator)
tor)
Cable
5 km to 50 km
CAUTION
This product is a laser class 1 product acceptable IEC 60825.
class 1 laser product
Figure B2.3.3-1 explanatory label

n Configuration
LED display
ESB bus cable connector

(with ESB bus branch
connector)
Optical ESB bus cable connector
ANT401: without built-in terminator ANT401: with built-in terminator

ANT411: without built-in terminator ANT411: with built-in terminator
Figure B2.3.3-2 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module
l LED Display
RCV 1 NODE
OPT
SND 1 6
STATUS RCV SND
Figure B2.3.3-3 LED Display
• STATUS : Lit in green when self-diagnosis completed with good result.

• RCV/SND : Lit in green when ESB bus frames are sent or received.
• OPT : Lit in green when optical frames are sent or received.
RCV/OPT
SND
• NODE : Lit or unlit according to the NODE setting switch.
Unlit: When the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module is installed in the
Unit for ESB Bus Repeater Module.
Lit in green: When the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module is instal-
led in Field Control Unit, ESB Bus Node Unit, Optical ESB Bus Node Unit.
l DIP Switch Settings on Installed Unit

This is the DIP switch for setting the ESB bus node number.

0 1
0 Fixed to 0
1
0 Fixed to 0
2
0 000: NORM, Normal mode (Factory default)
3
NORM 0 101: ELPB, External Loopback mode
4
0 111: ECB, Echo back mode
5
NODE 0: If ANT10U is installed 1: If control unit or node unit is installed.
0 6
7
0
8
Fixed to 0
0
9 10
Figure B2.3.3-4 DIP Switch Settings on Installed Unit
This setting is required for the installed ESB bus repeater module unit. When change the set-
ting, the branch connector should be disconnected.
• Switch1, Switch 2 and Switch 7 to Switch10: Set to 0.
• Switch3, Switch 4 and Switch 5: Set to 0 except for maintenance.
• Switch 6: If the unit for optical ESB bus repeater module is installed, set to 0.
l ESB Bus Cable Connector

This connector is for connecting the ESB bus cable(Model: YCB301).

B2.3.4 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module (Model:

ANT502, ANT512)
The optical ESB bus repeater slave module is used with the optical ESB bus repeater master
module to extend the ESB bus transmission distance .
The optical ESB bus repeater slave module is installed on the optical ESB bus node unit or
the unit for optical ESB bus repeater module.
n Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module Types

The optical ESB bus repeater slave modules consist of the following types:
Table B2.3.4-1 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module Types

ANT502 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module • Installable units:
• Module types:
nator)
tor)
tor) + attached HK bus connector
Without ESB bus branch connector (with built-in
terminator) + attached HK bus connector
Cable
5 km
ANT512 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module • Installable units:
• Module types:
nator)
tor)
tor) + attached HK bus connector
Without ESB bus branch connector (with built-in
terminator) + attached HK bus connector
Cable
5 km to 50 km
CAUTION
This product is a laser class 1 product acceptable IEC 60825.
class 1 laser product
Figure B2.3.4-1 Explanatory label

n Configuration
LED display
Optical ESB bus cable connector
ANT502: with built-in terminator ANT502: without ESB bus branch connector
ANT512: with built-in terminator ANT512: without ESB bus branch connector
HK bus cable connector
ANT502: ESB bus branch connector ANT502: Without ESB bus branch connector
+ attached HK bus connector + attached HK bus connector
ANT512: ESB bus branch connector ANT512: Without ESB bus branch connector
+ attached HK bus connector + attached HK bus connector
Figure B2.3.4-2 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module
l Connect HK Bus to ANT502/ANT512 Installed Optical ESB Bus Node Unit

(Model: ANB11S/ANB11D)
If HKU interface is attached to ANT502/ANT512 installed in B1 or B2 slot of the optical ESB
bus node unit, after connecting the HK bus cable, the information of HKU (temperature and
fan status and so on) can be acquired.
l LED Display
RCV (MSB) NODE
OPT
SND
ADRS
RCV PARITY
ESB
SND (LSB)
STATUS SEL RSP
Figure B2.3.4-3 LED Display
• STATUS : Lit in green when self-diagnosis completed with good result.

• SEL : Lit in green when ESB bus frames by host node are received.

• RSP : Lit in green when SB bus frames are sent.
• ESB RCV/ESB : Lit in green when ESB bus frames are sent or received.
SND
• OPT RCV/OPT : Lit in green when optical frames are sent or received.
SND
• NODE : Lit or unlit according to the NODE setting switch.
Unlit: When the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module is instal-
led in the Unit for ESB Bus Repeater Module .
Lit in green: When the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module is
installed in Optical ESB Bus Node Unit .
• ADRS : Lit in green at the used nest address.
• PARITY : Lit in green at the parity defined by the DIP switch.
l DIP Switch Settings on Installed Unit

0 1
ODD PARITY Switch parity (1 bit, odd parity)
1
0 Fixed to 0
2
0
3
000 : NORM, Normal mode (Factory default)

NORM 0 101 : ELPB, External Loopback mode
4
0 111 : ECB, Echo back mode

5
NODE 0 : If ANT10U is installed 1 : If node unit is installed.

6
(MSB)
7
8
ADRS Node address (4 bits)

9 10
The figure to the left shows an example when node number is 2.

(LSB)
MSB : Most Significant Bit (The highest one)

LSB : Least Significant Bit (The lowest one)
Table B2.3.4-2 Node Number and Positions of Setting Switches: An example when ANB11S/ANB11D is
installed
Node number 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Bit 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 6(*1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit 8 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Bit 9 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Bit 10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
*1: 0: If ANT10U is installed
1: If node unit is installed.
Table B2.3.4-3 Node Number and Positions of Setting Switches: An example when ANT10U is installed
Node number -
Bit 1 1

Node number -
Bit 2 0
Bit 3 0
Bit 4 0
Bit 5 0
Bit 6 (*1) 0
Bit 7 0
Bit 8 0
Bit 9 0
Bit 10 0
*1: 0: If ANT10U is installed
1: if node unit is installed.
l ESB Bus Cable Connector

This connector is for connecting the ESB bus cable (Model: YCB301).

B2.3.5 Cable Connection
n Fiber-Optic Cable Connector

This connector is used for fiber optic cable.
l Optical Fiber Cable for ANT401 or ANT502

The following optical fiber cable should be used for ANT401 or ANT502.
Table B2.3.5-1 Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

Specifications
Optical connector type Type LC (conforming to the IEC 61754-20)
Max. permissible optical loss 0 to 10dB@1.3 μm
Fiber-optic cable Type Quartz singlemode fiber SM 9.3/125
(JIS C 6835 Type SSMA-9.3/125 or IEC 60793-2-50 Type
B1.1)
Number of 2-core
cores
Max. length 5 km
l Optical Fiber Cable for ANT411 or ANT512

The following optical fiber cable should be used for ANT411 or ANT512.
Table B2.3.5-2 Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

Specifications
Optical connector type Type LC (conforming to the IEC 61754-20)
Max. permissible optical loss 3 to 16dB@1.55 μm
Fiber-optic cable Type Quartz singlemode fiber SM 9.3/125
(JIS C 6835 Type SSMA-9.3/125 or IEC 60793-2-50 Type
B1.1)
Number of 2-core
cores
Max. length 50 km
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the optical attenuation between the SNT411 and SNT512 modules is at least 3
dB. If the attenuation is less than 3 dB, use an attenuator and adjust the attenuation in the
range between 3 dB and 16 dB.
n ESB Bus Cable Connector

This connector is for connecting the ESB bus cable(Model: YCB301).
n ESB Bus
Either ESB bus branch connector or the branch connector that has a built-in ESB bus termi-
nator must be mounted to SB401 installed in ESB bus node unit. If a node unit is connected
next, select ESB bus branch connector. If the node unit is the last one, select the branch con-
nector that has a built-in ESB bus terminator.

AFG30D AFV30D
ESB Bus ESB Bus

CN1 CN1
MODEL MODEL
AIP532 AIP532
STYLE1 SI STYLE1 SI
YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA
RCV RCV
SND-L SND-L
SND-R SND-R
REVISION REVISION
U H1 H2 U H1 H2
ESB bus (in case of

dual redundant;use Screw tightening
bus 1 when not dual torque: 0.3 N•m
redundant)
ESB Bus ESB Bus

CN1 CN1
MODEL MODEL
AIP532 AIP532
STYLE1 SI STYLE1 SI
YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA
RCV RCV
ESB bus cable (YCB301)
SND-L SND-L
SND-R SND-R
Bus1
REVISION REVISION
U H1 H2 U H1 H2
Bus2
Bus1 Bus2
ESB bus
(in case of dual SB401 + SB401 + SB401 + SB401 +
redundant; use S9562FA S9562FA S9562FA S9562FA
bus 1 when not
dual redundant)
To next node To next node

Bus1 Bus1
Bus2 Bus2
Connector unit
Connector unit for with terminator for
ANB10D
ESB bus(S9562FA) ESB bus (S9564FA)
Figure B2.3.5-1 ESB Bus

B2.3.6 Connecting ESB Bus Fiber-Optic Cable

This section explains how the optical ESB bus repeater master module is used to link the field
control unit, the optical ESB bus node unit and the unit for optical ESB repeater module, and
the extension of ESB bus.
The connection varies with star type and chain type.
n Types of Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module

The following models of optical ESB bus repeater modules are available:
• ANT401 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module for 5 km
• ANT411 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module for 5 km to 50 km
• ANT502 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module for 5 km
• ANT512 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module for 5 km to 50 km
n Transmission Distance
Combination of optical ESB bus repeater modules determines the transmission distance.
Table B2.3.6-1 Transmission Distance

Combinations Each Stage 2 Stage Total
ANT401 and ANT502 Maximum 5 km Maximum 5 km
ANT411 and ANT512 Minimum 5 km, Maximum 50 km 5 km to 50 km
Mix of combination of ANT401 and Stage with a combination of ANT401 and 5 km to 50 km
ANT502 and that of ANT411 and ANT512 ANT502: maximum 5 km
Stage with a combination of ANT411 and
ANT512: maximum 50 km
IMPORTANT
The maximum extension distance is 50 km even if repeated for two times by the repeater
modules.
n Star Type Connection

The star type is used for connecting the optical ESB bus repeater module mounted field con-
trol unit and unit that the optical bus repeater modules are mounted. Each ESB bus repeater
module can connect up to eight ESB bus node units. Both ends of the ESB bus should be
terminated. The following figure shows an example of the star type connection.
Mount the ESB Bus Coupler Module (Model: EC401) on the field control unit (Model:
AFV30S/AFV30D) located at the first level of ESB bus and mount the Optical ESB Bus Re-
peater Master Module (Model: ANT401) on the Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module (Model:
ANT10U); and then connect the ESB bus cable (Model: YCB301).
In the ESB Bus Node Unit (Model: ANB11D) at the lowest level of the ESB bus, the Optical
ESB bus Repeater Slave Module (Model: ANT502, ANT512) should be installed.
For the modules at both ends of the ESB bus, the ESB bus branch connectors with built-in
terminators should be used.
All the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Modules (Model: ANT401, ANT411, ANT502, ANT512)
should be respectively connected with the optical fiber cables.

EC401
AFV30S/AFV30D
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 1 BUS 2
ESB bus cable
ESB bus cable
ANT401 ANT401
ANT10U
Fiber-Optic
Fiber-Optic BUS 1 ANT BUS 1 Cable (to 5 km)
cable BUS 2 411
BUS 2
BUS 2
Fiber-Optic
Cable BUS 1 ANT512
(to 5 km)
Fiber-Optic
ANB11D ANB11D Cable
(5 km to 50 km)
ANT502
: Connector unit with terminator for ESB bus
Figure B2.3.6-1 Star Type Connection
n Chain Type Connection

The chain type is used for connecting the ESB bus coupler module mounted field control unit
and the unit that the optical bus repeater modules are mounted. The bus can be extended for
two levels by the optical ESB bus repeater modules.
l Using Field Control Unit and ESB Bus Node Unit

How to mount the required modules to the field control unit and ESB bus node unit is as fol-
lows.Both ends of the ESB bus should be respectively terminated on both levels. The follow-
ing figure shows an example of the chain connection.
Mount the ESB Bus Coupler Module (Model: EC401) and the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Mas-
ter Module (Model: ANT401) on the field control unit (Model: AFV30S/AFV30D) located at the
first level of ESB bus, and then connect the ESB bus cable(Model: YCB301).
For the next level of ESB bus, mount the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module (Model:
ANT411) and the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module (Model: ANT502) to the ESB Bus
Node Unit (Model: ANB11D), and then connect the ESB bus cable (Model: YCB301).
In the ESB Bus Node Unit (Model: ANB11D) at the lowest level of the ESB bus, the Optical
ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module (Model: ANT512) should be installed.
For the modules at both ends of the ESB bus, the ESB bus branch connectors with built-in
terminators should be used.

All the ESB bus repeater modules (Model: ANT401, ANT411, ANT502, ANT512) at different
levels of ESB bus should be respectively connected with the optical fiber cables.
ESB bus cable
AFV30S/AFV30D BUS 1 BUS 2
ANT401 EC401
Fiber-Optic Fiber-Optic Cable (to 5 km)

cable
ESB bus cable
BUS 1 BUS 2
ANB11D
Fiber-Optic
cable
ANT411 ANT502
ANT512
Fiber-Optic
Cable
ANB11D (5 km to 50 km)
: Connector unit with terminator for ESB bus
Figure B2.3.6-2 Star Type Connection: Using Field Control Unit and ESB Bus Node Unit
n The Number and Location of Optical ESB Bus Repeater Modules

The connectable number of optical ESB bus repeater modules and their location are deter-
mined by each unit .

IMPORTANT
Note the following points when using optical ESB bus repeater modules.
• The optical ESB bus repeater master module and the optical ESB bus repeater slave
module both connected to ESB bus1 must be mounted on the odd-numbered slots. The
Optical ESB bus repeater master module and the optical ESB bus repeater slave module
both connected to ESB bus2 must be mounted on the even-numbered slots.
• If both the optical ESB bus repeater master module and the optical ESB bus repeater
slave module are mounted on the one unit board, the slave module must be on the left
side of the master module.
• Be sure to put a dummy cover (Model: ADCV01) on each slot with no module.
l Field Control Unit (Model: AFV30S/AFV30D, AFV40S/AFV40D)
IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6
Figure B2.3.6-3 Field Control Unit
• Installable positions: IO1 to IO6 slots.

Slots from IO1 to IO6 can be used for installation. An odd-number slot and the next even-
number slot should be used together.
For dual-redundant installation, the odd-number slot and the adjacent even-number slot
should be used (IO1-IO2, IO3-IO4, IO5-IO6) in pairs. For non-redundant installation, the
single module can be installed to the odd-number .
Example:
Installing a pair of ANT401 modules
Use the slots IO5 and IO6. The slot IO5 is for Bus 1 and the slot IO6 is for Bus 2.
l Optical ESB Bus Node Unit (Model: ANB11S/ANB11D)
IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8
Figure B2.3.6-4 Optical ESB Bus Node Unit
• Installable positions: IO1 to IO8 slots.

Slots from IO1 to IO8 can be used for installation. An odd-number slot and the next even-
For dual-redundant installation, the odd-number slot and the adjacent even-number slot
should be used (IO1-IO2, IO3-IO4, IO5-IO6, IO7-IO8) in pairs. For non-redundant installa-
tion, the single module can be installed to the odd-number slot.
Example:
Use the slots IO7 and IO8. The slot IO7 is for Bus 1 and the slot IO8 is for Bus 2.

l Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module (Model: ANT10U)
IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 B1 B2
Figure B2.3.6-5 Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module
• Installable positions: IO1 to IO8, B1, B2 slots.

Slots from IO1 to B2 can be used for installation. An odd-number slot and the next even-
Example:
Use the slots B1 and B2. The slot B1 is for Bus 1 and the slot B2 is for Bus 2.
If ANT401/ANT411 and ANT502/ANT512 are coexisting, ANT401/ANT411 should be installed
to the right side of ANT502/ANT512.

B2.3.7 ER Bus Interface Master Module (Model: EB401)

The EB401 module is used for controlling the ER bus communication. It provides ER bus in-
terface functions for communication between node units.
EB401 has one 10BASE-2 port; it is possible to make the ER bus dual-redundant by installing
two modules.
n Configuration
LED display
(from the top RCV, SND) RCV 1
SND 1
(from the left STATUS, ACT, DX)
STATUS ACT DX
CN1
ER bus cable connector (CN1)
Figure B2.3.7-1 EB401
l LED Display
· STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normally and
the hardware is ready, otherwise it is turned off.
· ACT : When the card is taking control, the lamp is ON. When the card is standby, the
lamp is OFF.
· DX : This LED turns on when EB401 is configured for dual-redundant operation, oth-
erwise it is turned off.
· SND-1 : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it is turned off (it is only
the "1" digit that actually turns on and off).
· RCV-1 : This LED turns on during carrier detection/data reception, otherwise it is turned
off (it is only the "1" digit that actually turns on and off).
l ER Bus Cable Connector

This is a 10BASE-2 type BNC connector. It communicates with an EB501 module on the
slave side.
CAUTION
• When connecting or disconnecting the ER bus T-type connector for a dual-redundant
node unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.
• EB401 can not be installed to ER Bus Node Units (Model: ANR10S, ANR10D).

B2.3.8 ER Bus Interface Slave Module (Model: EB501)

The EB501 module is installed on the remote node side and communicates with an ER bus
interface master module (Model: EB401) of a local node.
EB501 has one 10BASE-2 port; dual-redundant bus operation can be supported by installing
two modules.
n Configuration
LED display
Connector for maintenance STATUS SND RCV
IP bus address setting

DIP switch
ER bus cable connector
Figure B2.3.8-1 EB501
l LED Display
• STA- : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normally and
TUS the EB501 module is operating normally, otherwise it is turned off. Note that the
STATUS LED of an EB501 with wide temperature range specification flashes
until the operation temperature of the LAN controller reaches 0 deg celsius or
higher.
• SND : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it is turned off.
• RCV : This LED turns on during data reception, otherwise it is turned off.
l ER Bus Cable Connector

This is a BNC connector equivalent to 10BASE-2. It communicates with an EB401 module on
the master side via Ethernet.
l IP Bus Address Setting DIP Switches

For setting IP address of EB501. The IP address of EB501 is the same as the node number
of EB501.
l Connector for Maintenance

This connector is used for maintenance.
CAUTION
When connecting or disconnecting the ER bus T-type connector for a dual-redundant node
unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.
n Setting Node Number

The DIP switches are used for setting the ESB bus.

l Setting Node Number of FFCS

In order to use the EB501 module, it is necessary to set the module’s “Node Number”.
• “Node Number” can be set by the DIP switches on the front surface of the EB501 module.
• Both pre-defined private addresses and user addresses that the user can set freely are
provided.
• Two types of address, A and B, are available. (It is necessary to use either type A or B
consistently in the same network segment.)
Table B2.3.8-1 Setting IP Address

Bit Number Description EB501 Setting
1 Parity of pin 2 to pin 8 The number of 1 among the 8 dipswitches should be an odd
number.
2 Unused Always set to 0.
3 Private IP / User IP Private IP: 0
4 IP 1 or 2 Set 0 if EB501 is on left side, Set 1 if EB501 is on right side.
5 to 8 IP address (4 bits) Node number
0 1
Designate private address in a KFCS2/KFCS.
PARITY
1
Fixed to 0
2
bit
PRIVATE USER 3 : Fixed to 0 (private address)
3
UPPER 4 : Set this bit to 0 if EB501 is installed on the left side and
SEL A B
4
1 if EB501 is installed on the right side.

8
5
5 to 8 : Use these bits to specify an individual node number.

4
6 7
LOWER
2 (An Example Where the Address “Node Number” 4, left EB501 is Set)
1
8
Bit number
Figure B2.3.8-2 IP Address Setting DIP Switches
Set the address of lower 4 bits using bit numbers 5 to 8.

The settings become valid only after the Bus Interface Unit is restarted.
It is possible to match the required “Node Number” by setting the DIP switches as shown be-
low.
Table B2.3.8-2 Node Number and Positions of Setting Switches

DIP Switch setting
PARI- Va- Lower address
P/U A/B Address selected Node number
TY cant 8 4 2 1
SW3 SW4
SW1 SW2 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Private address A 1 (left EB501)

DIP Switch setting
TY cant 8 4 2 1
SW3 SW4
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Private address B 1 (right EB501)
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 Private address B 10 (right
EB501)
l Setting Node Number of FFCS-L or FFCS-V

In order to use the EB501 module, it is necessary to set the module’s “Node Number”.
• “Node Number” can be set by the DIP switches on the front surface of the EB501 module.
• Both pre-defined private addresses and user addresses that the user can set freely are
provided.
• Two types of address, A and B, are available. (It is necessary to use either type A or B
consistently in the same network segment.)
Table B2.3.8-3 Setting IP Address

Bit Number Description EB501 Setting
1 Parity of pin 2 to pin 8 The number of 1 among the 8 dipswitches should be an odd
number.
2 Unused Always set to 0.
3 Private IP / User IP Private IP: 0
4 IP 1 or 2 Set 0 if EB501 is on left side, Set 1 if EB501 is on right side.
5 to 8 IP address (4 bits) Node number
0 1
Designate private address in a KFCS2/KFCS.
PARITY
1
Fixed to 0
2
bit
PRIVATE USER 3 : Fixed to 0 (private address)
3
UPPER 4 : Set this bit to 0 if EB501 is installed on the left side and
SEL A B
4
1 if EB501 is installed on the right side.

8
5
5 to 8 : Use these bits to specify an individual node number.

4
6 7
LOWER
2 (An Example Where the Address “Node Number” 4, left EB501 is Set)
1
8
Bit number
Figure B2.3.8-3 IP Address Setting DIP Switches
Set the address of lower 4 bits using bit numbers 5 to 8.

The node numbers on FFCS-L should be set from 2 to 14.
The node number 1 is the number reserved for field control unit.
The setting will become valid after restarting the ER bus node.
DIP switches should be set according to the table below in correspondence with the node
numbers.
Table B2.3.8-4 Node Number and Positions of Setting Switches

DIP Switch setting (*1)
TY cant 8 4 2 1
SW3 SW4
EB501)
EB501)
EB501)
EB501)
EB501)
*1: Setting DIP switches
0: The above figure shows that the dip switch is turned to the left side.
1: The above figure shows that the dip switch is turned to the right side.
SW1 to SW8: Corresponding to bit number 1 to 8.

B2.3.9 ER Bus Cable Connection

ER bus connection is illustrated as follows.
If a unit is the end of the ER bus, a terminator (Model: YCB148) needs to be used to termi-
nate the ER bus.
Avoid using ER bus cable with other cables and also avoid wiring its cable in parallel with oth-
ers. ER cable connection is illustrated in the following figure.
ESB bus node unit

ANB10D
EB401 ER bus cable

YCB141
EB501
ER bus node unit

ANR10D
To next ER bus node unit
Figure B2.3.9-1 ER Bus Cable Connection
n ER Bus Wiring
The figure shown below describes how to connecting ER bus:

ANB10D
EB401
Terminator (*1)
(YCB148)
Clamp filter (*2)

(A1193MN)
Fix with using a cable fastener

at the front right edge of cable tray
ANR10D
YCB141
Separate from other cables
EB501
For the ER bus cable, adjust the

cable length on the cable tray and
fix by using a cable fastener.
Separate from other cables
wherever possible.
Connect to the next

ER bus node unit
*1: Regarding EB401 and a remote node, if one side of T-type connector is terminal, mount a terminator.
Two terminators are supplied with EB401.
*2: Regarding EB401 and a remote node, mount clamp filters to both side of T-type connector. If one of the sides is
terminal, mount a clamp filter to only the cable side. Two (four for dual-redundant) clamp filters are supplied with
the remote node.
For EB401, use the clamp filter supplied with the terminal remote node.
Figure B2.3.9-2 ER Bus Connecting
n Procedure of ER Bus Cable Connection

An ER bus cable is equivalent to a 10BASE-2 Ethernet cable (model YCB141). The following
explains how to connect it:
1. Connect a T-type connector to the BNC connector located at the bottom part of the
EB401 or EB501 module.
2. Connect an ER bus cable to both sides of the T-type connector. If the corresponding ER
bus interface module is position at the end, connect a terminator (provided with EB401 :
50 ohm) to one side of the T-type connector.

Terminator
ER bus cable
ER bus cable
T-type Connector T-type Connector
Figure B2.3.9-3 ER Bus Cable Connection
3. When the ER bus cable is connected, put the T-type connector between insulating sheets
to prevent it from touching other metals. The surfaces of the insulating sheets that come
with the T-type connector (2 sheets) are adhesive. The figure below shows how to attach
them.
• Place two pieces of insulating sheets so that the adhesive surfaces face the T-type
connector and sandwich the T-type connector between them.
• Press the two pieces of insulating sheets together tightly with your fingers, making
sure that the sheets cover the metal part of the T-type connector.
4. Place clamp filters on both sides of the T-type connector at positions as close as possible
to the connector. Fix the clamp filters (provided with remote node) to the cables using a
cable fastener.
Insulating sheet
T-type connector
Figure B2.3.9-4 Insulating Sheet
Clamp filter
Cable fastener
Figure B2.3.9-5 Clamp Filter

<B2.4 Analog Input/Output Modules> B2-40
B2.4 Analog Input/Output Modules

Analog I/O modules are used to read analog signal inputs/outputs and convert signals.
Analog I/O modules include voltage, current, thermocouple/mV, RTD/POT, and pulse input
modules. In addition, non-isolated modules, isolated modules, and isolated channels are
available and can be selected according to the application.
n External View of Input/Output Module

Analog I/O modules can be connected using pressure clamp terminals, KS connectors, or MIL
connectors.
Pressure clamp terminal KS connector
MIL connector 40 pins 50 pins
CN1
CN1
Figure B2.4-1 External View of Input/Output Module
n Setup Elements
In the case of current input and current I/O modules, it can be set for each type of transmitter
whether or not power is supplied using the setting pins.
l Setting of AAI141, AAI143

Use the setting pins S1 to S16 to set up AAI141, AAI143 current input modules. The setting
pins are located on the printed circuit board at the right side of the module.

Table B2.4-1 Setting Pins of AAI141, AAI143 Current Input Module
Power supply Power supply
Remarks Remarks
Display of Setting to transmitter Setting to transmitter
setting pins pin Yes No pin Yes No Channel
Channel No.
(2-wire) (4-wire) (2-wire) (4-wire) No.
S1 1 2 2 3 1 S5 1 2 2 3 5
S2 4 5 5 6 2 S6 4 5 5 6 6
S3 1 2 2 3 3 S7 1 2 2 3 7
S1 to S16
1 2 3
S4 4 5 5 6 4 S8 4 5 5 6 8
S9 1 2 2 3 9 S13 1 2 2 3 13
4 5 6
S10 4 5 5 6 10 S14 4 5 5 6 14
S11 1 2 2 3 11 S15 1 2 2 3 15
S12 4 5 5 6 12 S16 4 5 5 6 16
• Set to supply power (2-wire)

Odd channel 1 2 3
S1 S5
S2 S6
1 5
Even channel 4 5 6 Channel No.

2 6
3 7
4 8
Setting pins
• Set not to supply power (4-wire)

9 13
Odd channel 1 2 3 Channel No.

10 14
Printed Board
11 15
12 16
S11 S15
Even channel 4 5 6 S12 S16
Figure B2.4-2 Setting of AAI141, AAI143 Current Input Module
l Setting of AAI841
Use the setting pins S1 to S8 to set up AAI841 current I/O modules. The setting pins are loca-
ted on the printed circuit board at the right side of the module.

Table B2.4-2 Setting Pins of AAI841 Current Input/Output Module
Transmitter Power Description
Set Pin Set Pin Yes No
Channel No.
(2-wire) (4-wire)
S1 1 2 2 3 1
S2 4 5 5 6 2
S3 1 2 2 3 3
S1 to S8
1 2 3
S4 4 5 5 6 4
S5 1 2 2 3 5
4 5 6
S6 4 5 5 6 6
S7 1 2 2 3 7
S8 4 5 5 6 8
• Set to supply power (2-wire)
Odd channel 1 2 3
S1
S2
Even channel 4 5 6 1
2
Channel No. 3
4
Setting pins
• Set not to supply power (4-wire)

Odd channel 1 2 3 5
6
Channel No. 7
8
Printed board
S7
Even channel 4 5 6
S8
Figure B2.4-3 Setting of AAI841 Current Input/Output Module

<B2.5 Digital Input/Output Modules> B2-43
B2.5 Digital Input/Output Modules

A digital I/O module is made up of a terminal block and an I/O module. It reads in digital sig-
nals from 16, 32, or 64 input channels and converts them to the internal data representation
of the Field Control Station, or it converts and outputs the internal data.
16-channel relay output modules are also available.
Moreover, digital I/O modules compatible with older products are provided in order to allow
replacement of older products. Cables from existing field equipment can be connected to
these modules as they are.
n External View of Digital Input/Output Module

Through the use of adapters, different connection methods can be chosen for the digital I/O
modules. It is possible to select connection via pressure clamp terminals, connection via ter-
minal board connectors, or MIL cable connection.
Pressure clamp terminal Pressure clamp terminal
and MIL connector connection for Digital I/O KS connector connection
connection
ADV151 ADV141 ADV859 ADV869
ADV551 ADV142 ADV157 ADV161 ADV159 ADV169
ADV851 ADR541 ADV557 ADV561 ADV559 ADV569
Figure B2.5-1 External View of Digital Input/Output Module

<B2.6 Communication Modules> B2-44
B2.6 Communication Modules

Communication modules are used to control and monitor sub-systems (e.g., PLCs) by con-
necting them to the Field Control Station via a communication line.
FOUNDATION fieldbus (FF-H1) communication modules communicate with fieldbus devices
such as sensors and valves that support the FOUNDATION fieldbus standard (FF-H1) bi-di-
rectionally.
n Types of Communication Modules

The following types of communication modules are available.
• ALR111
RS-232C communication module
• ALR121
RS-422/RS-485 communication module
• ALE111
Ethernet communication module
• ALF111
FOUNDATION fieldbus (FF-H1) communication module
• ALP111
PROFIBUS-DP communication module
• ALP121
PROFIBUS-DP communication module (for FIO)
l External View of Communication Module

ALR111, ALR121LED ALE111 ALF111
RCV 1
RCV 1 2 SND 1 RCV 1 2 3 4
SND 1 2 LINK 1 SND 1 2 3 4
STATUS ACT DX STATUS ACT DX STATUS ACT DX
ALF111 ALF111
ALR111 ALR121 ALE111 Pressure clamp terminal Connector
RCV 1 2 RCV 1 2 RCV 1 2 3 4 RCV 1 2 3 4
SND 1 2 SND 1 2 SND 1 2 3 4 SND 1 2 3 4
TM1
Figure B2.6-1 External View of Communication Module

<B2.6 Communication Modules> B2-45
ALP111, ALP121LED
RUN 1
COM 1
STATUS ACT DX
ALP111 ALP121
RUN 1 RUN 1
COM 1 COM 1
CN1
CN1
CN2 CN2
Figure B2.6-2 External View of Communication Module
l LED Display
• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normally and
the hardware is ready, otherwise it is turned off.
• ACT : When the module is operating normal, LED is ON. Otherwise it is turned off.
• DX : This LED turns on when module is configured for dual-redundant operation,
otherwise it is turned off.
• SND : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it is turned off.
• RCV : This LED turns on during data reception, otherwise it is turned off.
• LINK : This LED turns if Ethernet link is established, otherwise it is turned off.
• RUN : PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module is operating normal , LED is ON other-
wise it is turned off.
• COM : • ALP111
Any one of the defined slave devices is communicating, the LED is turned
on. No device is communicating, the LED is turned off.
• ALP121
All of the defined slave devices is communicating, the LED is turned on.
Any one of the devices is not communicating, the LED is turned off.

<B2.7 Accessories Related to Input/Output Modules> B2-46
B2.7 Accessories Related to Input/Output

Modules
The following accessories related to I/O modules are available:
• Pressure clamp terminal blocks
• KS cable adapters
• Terminal boards

B2.7.1 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks

I/O modules are wired to field equipment by installing pressure clamp terminal blocks or KS
cable adapters on the I/O modules. It is possible to have a direct electric connection to the
field equipment when a pressure clamp terminal block is used.
Pressure clamp terminal blocks are available both for single and dual-redundant operation.
n Types of Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks

The following types of pressure clamp terminal blocks are available according to the purpose.
Table B2.7.1-1 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks

Configu-
Model Name I/O points
ration
Dual-re- ATA4D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for analog 16-channel
dundant
ATT4D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for Thermocouple/mV 16-channel
ATR8D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for RTD 12-channel
ATB5D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for digital input 32-channel
ATD5D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for digital output 32-channel
ATI3D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for isolated analog 8-channel
module and pulse module
Single ATA4S Pressure clamp terminal block for analog 16-channel
ATT4S Pressure clamp terminal block for Thermocouple/mV 16-channel
ATR8S Pressure clamp terminal block for RTD 12-channel
ATB5S Pressure clamp terminal block for digital input 32-channel
ATD5S Pressure clamp terminal block for digital output 32-channel
ATI3S Pressure clamp terminal block for isolated analog module and pulse 8-channel
module
ATC4S Pressure clamp terminal block for digital 16-channel
n External Appearances of Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks

As listed in the table above, various types of pressure clamp terminal blocks are available.
They have different internal circuits and may have temperature compensation sensors; their
external appearances can be summarized as in the figures below.

For connecting
For single operation For dual-redundant operation dedicated connectors
Figure B2.7.1-1 External Appearances of Terminal Blocks
l Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)

Pressure clamp terminals for AAT141 thermocouple/mV input modules have thermistors
mounted in the input terminal part, which enables them to provide reference junction compen-
sation.
Thermistors in four places
Terminal block
Thermistor *
Aluminum plate for
equalizing temperature
* The thermistors are structured
in such a way that they cannot
be viewed from outside.
Figure B2.7.1-2 RJC Configuration of a Single Terminal Part

B2.7.2 KS Cable Interface Adapters

KS cable interface adapters are used to connect I/O modules to KS cables.
n Types of KS Cable Interface Adapters

KS cable interface adapters are used together with either Analog or digital I/O modules. The
following types of KS cable interface adapters are available.
Table B2.7.2-1 KS Cable Interface Adapters

ATK4A KS cable interface adapter for analog 16- Used together with a 16-channel analog I/O mod-
channel ule. Connect to AEA4D by KS1 cables.
ATM4A KS cable interface adapter for compatible Used together with AAB841 or AAB842. Adapter
MAC2 compatible with MAC2 by KS1 cables.
ATV4A KS cable interface adapter for compatible Used together with AAB841 or AAB842. Adapter
VM2 compatible with VM2 by KS2 cables.
ATI3A KS cable interface adapter for analog 8- Used together with AAI135 or AAP135. Connect to
channel AEA3D by KS1 cables.
ATB3A KS cable interface adapter for analog 4- Used together with AAI835. Connect to AEA3D by
channel KS1 cables.
ATD5A KS cable interface adapter for digital 32- Used together with ADV151 or ADV551. Connect to
channel AED5D by AKB331 cables.
n External Appearance of KS Cable Interface Adapters

KS cable interface adapters have the external appearance shown in the figures below.
As listed in the table above, various types of these adapters are available, but they all have
the same external appearance, even though the internal circuits are different.
ATK4A ATD5A
Figure B2.7.2-1 KS Cable Interface Adaptor

B2.7.3 Terminal Boards

Signal transmission and reception to and from the field equipment are carried out through a
terminal board.
n Types of Terminal Boards

Terminal boards are classified into the following types, depending on the number of input/
output channels, whether or not they are isolated, etc. Each type supports both single and du-
al-redundant operation.
Table B2.7.3-1 Terminal Boards

Model Name Remarks
AEA3D Terminal Board for Analog (single and dual-redundant, 8-channel) 8-channel x4
AEA4D Terminal Board for Analog (single and dual-redundant, 16-channel) 16-channel x2
AET4D Terminal Board for Thermocouple (single and dual-redundant, 16-channel) 16-channel x2
AER4D Terminal Board for RTD/POT (single and dual-redundant, 16-channel) 16-channel
AED5D Terminal Board for Digital (single and dual-redundant, 32-channel) 32-channel
AEC4D Terminal Board for Digital (single and dual-redundant, 16-channel) 16-channel x2
AEF9D Terminal Board for FOUNDATION fieldbus(single and dual-redundant) 4 port x4
TIP The unused connector should be covered with a attached connector cap.
n External Appearances of Terminal Boards

l Terminal Board for Analog (Single and dual-redundant) (Model: AEA4D)
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1A 2A 16A 17A 18A

1B 2B 16B 17B 18B
Figure B2.7.3-1 AEA4D
l Terminal Board for Analog (Single and dual-redundant) (Model: AEA3D)
CN1 CN3 CN5 CN7
CN2 CN4 CN6 CN8
Figure B2.7.3-2 AEA3D

l AET4D Terminal Board for Thermocouple (Single and dual-redundant)

(Model: AET4D)
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1A 2A 16A 17A 18A

1B 2B 16B 17B 18B
Figure B2.7.3-3 AET4D
l Terminal Board for Resistance Temperature detectors (Single and dual-

redundant)(Model: AER4D)
Figure B2.7.3-4 AER4D
l Terminal Board for Digital (Single and dual-redundant)(Model: AED5D)
Figure B2.7.3-5 AED5D
l Terminal Board for Digital (Single and dual-redundant)(Model: AEC4D)
Figure B2.7.3-6 AEC4D
l Terminal Board for FOUNDATION fieldbus (Single and dual-redundant)

(Model: AEF9D)
Figure B2.7.3-7 AEF9D

Blank Page
<B3. Signal Cable Connection to Input/Output Modules (For FIO)> B3-1
B3. Signal Cable Connection to Input/

Output Modules (For FIO)
An I/O module can be connected in two ways: either directly connected via the terminals of a
field device or connected via a terminal board through dedicated cables. In addition, it is pos-
sible to connect by MIL cables, which should be provided by the user.
This chapter explains how to use the I/O modules together with the pressure clamp terminal
blocks and connection cables provided as accessories, and shows the corresponding terminal
connection diagrams.

<B3.1 Configuration of Input/Output Module Connections> B3-2
B3.1 Configuration of Input/Output Module

Connections
In this chapter, how to connect field devices to the I/O modules is explained.
n Various Signal Cable Connection Methods

For saving the wiring space or for standardizing the instrumentation style, the following meth-
ods can be applied.
• Use Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks
When connecting field device signal cables directly to the I/O modules, use pressure
clamp terminal blocks.
• Use Terminal Board
When connecting field devices to I/O modules via terminal boards with specific cables,
KS cable interface adapters are required.
• Use MIL Cables
Use MIL Cables (prepared by user) to connect to I/O modules directly.
In the following figure, the parts within the dotted line are provided by Yokogawa.
Pressure clamp terminal block
Field cable
KS cable interface adaptor
Terminal board
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1A
1B
2A
2B
16A 17A 18A
16B 17B 18B Dedicated cable I/O module
TM1 TM2
Field cable
Field cable
MILconnector cover
Figure B3.1-1 Various Signal Cable Connection Methods
n Combinations of Input/Output Module and Terminal Block

There are various methods for connecting cables to I/O modules, such as single/dual-redun-
dant operation, isolated/non-isolated, and directly coupled/via a terminal board. In each case,
it is possible to combine an I/O module with adapters or terminal blocks according to the pur-
pose.

The table below lists the model names of the different combinations of I/O modules and termi-
nal blocks that can be used.
l Analog I/O Modules
Table B3.1-1 Combinations of Analog I/O Module and Terminal Block (1/2)
Form of connection
Pressure clamp
Terminal board connection
terminal
Model Description
Dual-re-
Single dun- Adapter Cable Terminal board
dant
AAI141 16-channel, 4 to 20 mA input (non- ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
isolated)
AAV14 16-channel, 1 to 5 V DC input (non- ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
1 isolated)
KS2 MUB, TE16, MHC
AAV14 16-channel, -10 to +10 V DC input ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
2 (non-isolated)
AAB14 16-channel, 1 to 5 V DC/4 to 20 mA – – ATK4A KS2 MHC
1 input (non-isolated)
AAI841 8-channel input/ 8-channel output, 4 ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
to 20 mA input, 4 to 20 mA out-
put(non-isolated)
AAB84 8-channel input/ 8-channel output, 1 ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
1 to 5 V DC input/4 to 20 mA output
(non-isolated) ATM4A KS1 MCM, MHM
ATV4A KS2 MUB, TE16, MHC
AAB84 8-channel input/8-channel output, 1 – – ATM4A KS1 MHM
2 to 5 V DC/4 to 20 mA input, 4 to 20
mA output(non-isolated) ATV4A KS2 MHC
AAV54 16-channel, -10 to +10 V DC output ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
2 (non-isolated)
KS2 MUB, TE16, MHC
AAI143 16-channel, 4 to 20 mA input (isola- ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
ted)
AAV14 16-channel, -10 to +10 V DC input ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
4 (isolated)
AAV54 16-channel, -10 to +10 V DC out- ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
4 put(isolated)
AAI543 16-channel, 4 to 20 mA output (isola- ATA4S ATA4D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
ted)
AAT14 16-channel, Thermocouple/mV input ATT4S ATT4D – – –
1 (isolated)
AAR18 12-channel, RTD input (isolated) ATR8S ATR8D – – –
1
AAI135 8-channel, 4 to 20 mA input (isolated ATI3S ATI3D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
channels)
ATI3A KS1 AEA3D
AAI835 4-channel input/ 4-channel output, 4 ATI3S ATI3D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
to 20 mA(isolated channels)
ATB3A KS1 AEA3D
AAT14 16-channel, Thermocouple/mV input – – – KS1 AET4D, MTC,
5 (isolated channels) TETC
AAR14 16-channel, RTD/POT input (isolated – – – AKB335 AER4D
5 channels)
KS8 MRT, TERT

Form of connection
Pressure clamp
terminal
Model Description
Dual-re-
dant
AAP13 8-channel, pulse input (isolated ATI3S ATI3D ATK4A KS1 AEA4D
5 channels)
ATI3A KS1 AEA3D
l Digital I/O Modules
Table B3.1-2 Combinations of Digital I/O Module and Terminal Block

Form of connection
Pressure clamp
terminal
Model Description
Dual-re-
dant
ADV15 32-channel, 24 V DC input ATB5S ATB5D ATD5A AKB331 AED5D
1
ADV14 16-channel, 100 V AC input ATC4S – – AKB332 AEC4D
1
ADV14 16-channel, 220 V AC input ATC4S – – AKB333 AEC4D
2
ADV55 32-channel, 24 V DC output ATD5S ATD5D ATD5A AKB331 AED5D
1
ADV15 32-channel, 24 V DC input ATC5S – – – –
7 (*1)
ADV16 64-channel, 24 V DC input – – – AKB337 AED5D
1
ADV55 32-channel, 24 V DC output ATC5S – – – –
7 (*1)
ADV56 64-channel, 24 V DC output – – – AKB337 AED5D
1
ADR54 16-channel, 24 to 110 V DC, ATC4S – – AKB334 AEC4D
1 100 to 240 V AC relay output
*1: ADV157 and ADV557 are shipped with a built-in single pressure clamp terminal.
l Communication Modules
When connecting to serial communication modules (RS-232C), different types of cables are
used depending on whether a modem connection or a null-modem connection is used, as
well as the type of device to be connected.
Serial communication modules (RS-422/RS-485) can be directly connected to multiple devi-
ces through multiple cables.
It is possible to connect to a FOUNDATION fieldbus (FF-H1) either via pressure clamp termi-
nals or by the connectors via a terminal board.

Table B3.1-3 Combinations of I/O Module and Terminal Block
Form of connection
Pressure clamp ter-
Model Description minal
Dual-re-
Single Cable Terminal board
dundant
ALR111 RS-232C Communication Module – – – –
ALR121 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module – – – –
ALE111 Ethernet Communication Module – – – –
ALF111 FOUNDATION fieldbus (FF-H1) ATF9S – AKB336 AEF9D
Communication Module
ALP111 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module – – – –
ALP121 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module – – – –
(for FIO)
l Compatible Module for Replacement

Existing terminal boards and KS cables can be utilized when replacing I/O parts of old Elec-
tric-made CENTUM models with I/O modules for FIO.
Table B3.1-4 Combinations of Digital I/O Modules (CENTUM-ST Compatible) and Terminal Board
Form of connection
Pressure clamp terminal Terminal board connection
Model Description
Dual redun-
dant
ADV859 16-channel input, 16-channel out- ― ― KS2 MUB,U2B,EUB,
put (Compatible ST2) MRI,MRO
ADV159 32-channel input (Compatible ― ― KS2 MUB,U2B,EUB,
ST3) MRI
ADV559 32-channel output (Compatible ― ― KS2 MUB,U2B,EUB,MR
ST4) O
ADV869 32-channel input, 32-channel out- ― ― KS9 MUD,EUD,MRI,MR
put (Compatible ST5) O
ADV169 64-channel input (Compatible ― ― KS9 MUD,EUD,MRI
ST6)
ADV569 64-channel output (Compatible ― ― KS9 MUD,EUD,MRO
ST7)
Table B3.1-5 Combinations of Pulse Input Modules and Terminal Board

Form of connection
Pressure clamp terminal Terminal board connection
Model Description
Dual redun-
dant
AAP149 16-channel, pulse count (Com- ― ― KS2 MHC
patible PM1)
AAP849 8-channel input, 8-channel output ― ― KS1 MCM,MHM
Pulse train input/Analog Output
Module (Compatible PAC)
The compatible modules other than the modules listed in the above table are shown in the
table below. Generally, the MIL connector should be used for connection.
The cables listed in the table below can also be used.

Table B3.1-6 Combinations of Digital I/O Module and Terminal Board
Form of connection
Pressure clamp
terminal
Model Description Dual-
re-
Single Adapter Cable Terminal board
dun-
dant
ADV851 16-channel input/16-channel output, ― ― ATD5A AKB331 AED5D
24V DC input/24V DC output

<B3.2 How to Connect Signal Cables> B3-7
B3.2 How to Connect Signal Cables

The following methods for connecting signal cables are available:
• Direct-coupled connection using pressure clamp terminals
• Connector connection using dedicated cables via terminal boards
• MIL connector connection
IMPORTANT
• Keep a distance of 1 cm or more from other signal cables when wiring signal cables
which might conduct high voltage.
• It is recommended to use twisted-pair batch shielded cables for Analog inputs in order to
prevent induced noise. A pitch of 50 mm or less for the twisted-pair cables is more effec-
tive. Grounding is required for the shielding. Twisted-pair cables are recommended for
digital signals as well.
• Fasten the cables securely to cable clamps, etc., so that the cables do not weigh on the
terminals.

B3.2.1 Direct-Coupled Connection Using Pressure Clamp

Terminals
The interface part of an I/O module basically consists of a connector (male). Connect the
pressure clamp terminal block to the front section.
Pressure clamp terminals are available for single and dual-redundant operation.
n Signal Cables for Pressure Clamp Terminal
Cable
Core Peel the coating off for this length
Figure B3.2.1-1 Signal Cable
l Cables Used
• 600 V polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (IV); JIS C 3307/IEC 60227-3
• Polyvinyl chloride insulated wires for electrical apparatus (KIV); JIS C 3316/IEC 60227-3
• 600 V grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (HIV); JIS C 3317/IEC
60227-3
• Heatproof vinyl insulated wires VW-1 (UL1015/UL1007)
• Control cables (vinyl insulated vinyl sheath cable) (CVV); JIS C3401
l Recommended Cable Thickness

• Without sleeve : 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG20 to 14)
• With sleeve : 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG20 to 16)
l Connecting to Pressure Clamp Terminals (Without Sleeves)
Table B3.2.1-1 Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals without Sleeves

Cable thickness (mm2) Peel-off length (mm) Remarks
0.5 to 2 (AWG20 to 14) 11 Pressure clamp terminals other
than the below
1.25 to 2 (AWG16 to 14) 13 Used when connecting to ATC4S
and ATC5S
l Connecting to Pressure Clamp Terminals (With Sleeves)

• Used when connecting to terminal blocks other than ATC4S and ATC5S

Table B3.2.1-2 Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals with Sleeves(1/2)
When using a sleeve (without insulating
When using a sleeve with insulating cover
cover)
Cable
thickness Sleeve di-
Peel-off Sleeve dimension Peel-off mension
(mm2) (mm) Weidmuller Weidmuller
length length (mm)
model No. model No.
(mm) (mm)
L1 L2 d1 d2 L1 d1 d2
0.5 11 16 10 1.0 2.6 H0.5/16 11 10 1.0 2.1 H0.5/10
0.75 11 16 10 1.2 2.8 H0.75/16 11 10 1.2 2.3 H0.75/10
1.0 11 16 10 1.4 3.0 H1/16 11 10 1.4 2.5 H1/10
1.25 to 1.5 11 16 10 1.7 3.5 H1.5/16 11 10 1.7 2.8 H1.5/10
• Used when connecting to terminal blocks other than ATC4S and ATC5S
Table B3.2.1-3 Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals with Sleeves(2/2)

When using a sleeve (without insulating
When using a sleeve with insulating cover
cover)
Cable
thickness Sleeve di-
Peel-off Sleeve dimension Peel-off mension
(mm2) (mm) Weidmuller Weidmuller
length length (mm)
model No. model No.
(mm) (mm)
L1 L2 d1 d2 L1 d1 d2
1.25 to 1.5 13 18 12 1.7 3.5 H1.5/18D 13 12 1.7 2.8 H1.5/12
Sleeve with insulating cover Sleeve (without insulating cover)
d1 d2 d1 d2
L2 L1
L1
Figure B3.2.1-2 Sleeve
IMPORTANT
• Use pressure clamp terminal sleeves and tools from the same manufacturer.
• Use pressure clamp terminal sleeve tools suitable for the thickness of the wires.
• Plug the cables to be connected deep into the pressure clamp terminals and make sure
they are securely installed.
• It is recommended to use a driver conforming to the DIN 5264B standard (a minus driver
with a thickness at the tip of 0.6 mm and a body shaft diameter of 3.5 mm) for the cable
connection.
• The tightening torque is 0.5 N•m.
• Fasten the cables securely to cable clamps, etc., so that the cables do not weigh on the
terminals.

n Types of Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks

Table B3.2.1-4 Types of Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks
Configura-
Model Name I/O points
tion
Dual-redun- ATA4D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for analog I/O 16-channel
dant
ATT4D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for 16-channel
Thermocouple/mV input
ATR8D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for RTD input 12-channel
ATB5D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for digital input 32-channel
ATD5D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for digital output 32-channel
ATI3D Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for isolated analog 8-channel
module and pulse module
Single ATA4S Pressure clamp terminal block for analog 16-channel
ATT4S Pressure clamp terminal block for Thermocouple/mV 16-channel
ATR8S Pressure clamp terminal block for RTD 12-channel
ATB5S Pressure clamp terminal block for digital 32-channel
ATD5S Pressure clamp terminal block for digital 32-channel
ATI3S Pressure clamp terminal block for isolated analog module and 8-channel
pulse module
n Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks for Single Operation

It is possible to install one single pressure clamp terminal block per one I/O module.
Figure B3.2.1-3 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks for Single Operation
n Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks for Dual-Redundant Operation

It is possible to install one dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block per two adjacent I/O
modules beginning from an odd number in dual-redundant operation. The width of the termi-
nal block for dual-redundant operation is twice that of the terminal block for single operation.
Connect the flat cables coming out from the backside of the pressure clamp terminal block to
the two I/O modules, as appropriate.

Figure B3.2.1-4 Pressure Clamp Terminal Block for Dual-Redundant Operation
n Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks for Digital Input/Output Modules

The figures below show an example of external appearance when digital pressure clamp ter-
minal blocks are connected to digital I/O modules.
Connect a pressure clamp
terminal ATC4S to ADV141
ATC4S
Figure B3.2.1-5 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks for Digital Input/Output Modules

B3.2.2 Connection via Connectors

I/O modules and field equipment can be connected via terminal boards. For this kind of con-
nection, use dedicated cables to connect to the connectors of the I/O modules or KS cable
interface adapters.
n Input/Output Modules Connected via Connectors

The figures below show examples of the external appearance of the I/O modules connected
via connectors.
Connect a ATK4A Connect a ATD5A
AAT145 to AAB841 to ADV151 ADV859 ADV869
CN1
CN1
Figure B3.2.2-1 Input/Output Modules Connected via Connectors
l Cables between an Input/Output Module and a Terminal Board
Table B3.2.2-1 List of Signal Cables

Model Cable Name Remarks
KS1 For analog I/O module 20-pin twisted shielded cable
KS2 Cable for CENTUM compatible card For multi-point I/O cards ST2, ST3, and ST4
KS3 Same as above. Used in case the connection
destination is a connector at the receiving side.
KS8 For analog I/O module For RTD/potentiometer input modules
KS9 Cable for CENTUM compatible card For multi-point I/O cards ST5, ST6, and ST7
KS10 Same as above. Used in case the connection
destination is a connector at the receiving side.
AKB331 For Di, Do (32 channels) For connecting between ADV151, ADV551 and a
terminal block
AKB332 Di (16 channels) 100 V dedicated cable For connecting between ADV141 and a terminal
block
AKB333 Di (16 channels) 220 V dedicated cable For connecting between ADV142 and a terminal
block
AKB334 Do (16 channels) relay dedicated cable For connecting between ADR541 and a terminal
block
AKB335 For RTD/POT input module For connecting between AAR145 and a terminal
block
AKB336 For FF-H1 (FOUNDATION fieldbus) For connecting between ALF111 and a terminal
block

AKB337 For Di, Do (64 channels) For connecting between ADV161, ADV561 and a
terminal block
l Type of Signal Cable
KS1 Cable KS3 Cable

KS2 Cable
20-pair sheathed cable 16-pair sheathed cable

(KS1)
16-pair sheathed cable
(KS2)
40 pin 40 pin 37 pin 40 pin
connector connector connector connector
KS9 Cable KS10 Cable
40-core sheathed cable 40-core sheathed cable
50 pin 50 pin 50 pin 50 pin

connector connector connector connector
KS8 Cable AKB331 Cable

AKB335 Cable
48-core sheathed cable
50 pin 50 pin
connector connector
KS50 pin KS50 pin
AKB332 Cable AKB337 Cable

AKB333 Cable
AKB334 Cable
The appearance is the same. However, a pin for

preventing from error connection is at a different KS50 pin MIL50 pin
position.
Figure B3.2.2-2 Type of Signal Cable

l Type of Communication Cable

AKB135 Modem cable AKB131 Modem cable
AKB136 Null modem cable AKB132 Null modem cable
If an RS-232C interface circuit at the partner equipment
is isolated, use an AKB131 or AKB132 cable.
ALR111 side ALR111 side
AKB133 Null modem cable (for FA-M3 D-sub 9 male) AKB336 FOUNDATION fieldbus FF-H1 cable
AKB134 Null modem cable (for ALR111 D-sub 9 female) (Between ALF111 to AEF9D connection only)
ALR111 side
Red marker
KS20 pin ALF111 side
Figure B3.2.2-3 Type of Communication Cable
n Signal Cable Connection

l Type of Communication Cable (ALR121)
AKB161 RS-422/RS-485 cable AKB162 RS-422/RS-485 cable
Start-stop synchronization communication Start-stop synchronization communication
(for ALR121 communication module) (for ALR121 communication module)
Brown Brown Brown Brown

Black Black Black
Black
Red Red
Red Red
Black Black
Black Yellow
Black
Yellow
Yellow Blue
Yellow Blue
ALR121 side ALR121 side (M4 terminal) Partner side (M4 terminal)
Partner side
(M4 terminal) (M3 terminal)
Figure B3.2.2-4 Type of Communication Cable (ALR121)
n Signal Cable Connection

The terminals for connecting the field devices on the terminals board are the M4 screw termi-
nals.
l Signal cables and ring terminal


The specifications of the Ring terminal are determined by the nominal cross sectional
area of the cable, the screw size, connector dimensions and so on.
WARNING
• When connecting signal cables to the I/O module (terminal type), the spring terminals
should be used.
Insulating sleeve inside diameter
Hole diameter
C

Nominal Insulating
cross sec- Hole diame- Ring outside Dimension
Screw used Ring terminal sleeve
tional area ter diameter "C"
(mm) length (mm) diameter
(mm) (mm) (mm)
(mm2) (mm)

B3.2.3 Connection via MIL Connectors

It is possible to connect a MIL cable to an I/O module directly without using a terminal block.
n MIL Cable Connection

The MIL cable should be provided by the user.
A cable connector cover (model : ACCC01) is provided in order to prevent the MIL cable from
being pulled out.
Connector cover
MIL connector
Figure B3.2.3-1 MIL Cable Connection

<B3.3 Signal Cable Connection to Analog Input/Output Modules> B3-17
B3.3 Signal Cable Connection to Analog Input/

Output Modules
There are three ways of connecting input/output signal cables to Analog I/O modules: by con-
necting via a pressure clamp terminal block, by using a dedicated cable to connect to the con-
nectors via a terminal board, or by direct connection using a MIL cable.
This section shows wire connection diagrams and tables showing the input/output channel
numbers.
n Channel Numbers and Pin Numbers

l Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks
The terminal numbers of a pressure clamp terminal block are arranged in the order from A1,
A2 and so on to A18 starting from the top of the left column and from B1, B2 and so on to B18
from the top of the right column on the front of the terminal block.
The terminal number layout of a dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal is the same.
For single operation For dual-redundant operation
A1 B1 Same pin numbers as

for single operation
A18 B18
Figure B3.3-1 Terminal Numbers of Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks
l MIL Connector
The pin numbers of MIL connector are shown as follows.
40 39
MIL connector pin No.

(40 pin)
2 1
Figure B3.3-2 Pin Numbers of a MIL Connector

n Signal Connecting to Analog I/O Module

Vary with the model of analog input/output modules and vary with devices connected, the ter-
minals for connecting the signal cables are different. Refer to the following table and connect
the cable to the proper terminals.
Table B3.3-1 Input Terminal Types for Analog Input/Output Modules

Cable Con-
nection
Models Input/Output Types
Pins
(*1)
AAI141 IN□A 2-wire transmitter input + Current input - —
AAI143
AAI841 IN□B 2-wire transmitter input - Current input +
(*2) (setting pin : 2-wire input) (setting pin : 4-wire in-
put)
AAI135 IN□A 2-wire transmitter input + —
AAI835
(*2) IN□B 2-wire transmitter input - Current input +
IN□C — Current input -
AAR181 IN□A RTD input A — —
(*3)
IN□B RTD input B
IN□C RTD input B
AAR145 IN□A RTD input A POT input, 100 % —
(*4)
IN□B RTD input B POT input, 0 %
IN□C RTD input B POT input, variable
AAP135 IN□A 2-wire power supply (pow- — 3-wire power supply pow-
er) er supply
IN□B 2-wire power supply (sig- 2-wire (voltage, contact) 3-wire power supply +
nal) +
IN□C — 2-wire (voltage, contact) 3-wire power supply -
-
*1: “□“is channel number
*2: When power of models AAI141, AAI143, AAI841, AAI135 and AAI835 is off or abnormal, current input loop is in the open
state. Do not use current signals with other receiving devices.
*3: Wiring resistance for A, C must be identical.
*4: Wiring resistance for A, B must be identical.

B3.3.1 Analog Input Module, 16-Channel (Model: AAI141,

AAI143, AAV141, AAV142, AAV144)
n AAI141, AAI143 (4 to 20 mA Input)

Pressure clamp terminal MIL connector
CH No. Signal Terminal No. Signal CH No. Signal Pin No. Signal
CH1 IN1A A1 B1 IN1B CH1 IN1A 40 39 IN1B
CH2 CH2
IN2A A2 B2 IN2B IN2A 38 37 IN2B
IN10A A10 B10 IN10B IN10A 22 21 IN10B
IN11A A11 B11 IN11B IN11A 20 19 IN11B
IN12A A12 B12 IN12B IN12A 18 17 IN12B
IN13A A13 B13 IN13B IN13A 16 15 IN13B
IN14A A14 B14 IN14B IN14A 14 13 IN14B
CH16 CH16
IN16A A16 B16 IN16B IN16A 10 9 IN16B
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (1*) 2 1 CBSE (1*)
N.C.: No Connection
*1: Short circuit CBSE externally for MIL connectors in order to detect unconnected external cables.
Figure B3.3.1-1 AAI141, AAI143 External Connection

n AAV141 (1 to 5 V DC Input), AAV142, AAV144 (-10 to 10 V DC Input)

CH1 IN1+ A1 B1 IN1- CH1 IN1+ 40 39 IN1-

CH2 CH2
IN2+ A2 B2 IN2- IN2+ 38 37 IN2-
IN3+ A3 B3 IN3- IN3+ 36 35 IN3-
IN4+ A4 B4 IN4- IN4+ 34 33 IN4-
IN5+ A5 B5 IN5- IN5+ 32 31 IN5-
IN6+ A6 B6 IN6- IN6+ 30 29 IN6-
IN7+ A7 B7 IN7- IN7+ 28 27 IN7-
IN8+ A8 B8 IN8- IN8+ 26 25 IN8-
IN9+ A9 B9 IN9- IN9+ 24 23 IN9-
IN10+ A10 B10 IN10- IN10+ 22 21 IN10-
IN11+ A11 B11 IN11- IN11+ 20 19 IN11-
IN12+ A12 B12 IN12- IN12+ 18 17 IN12-
IN13+ A13 B13 IN13- IN13+ 16 15 IN13-
IN14+ A14 B14 IN14- IN14+ 14 13 IN14-
CH15 IN15+ A15 B15 IN15- CH15 IN15+ 12 11 IN15-
CH16 CH16
IN16+ A16 B16 IN16- IN16+ 10 9 IN16-
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (1*) 2 1 CBSE (1*)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.3.1-2 AAV141, AAV142, AAV144 External Connection

B3.3.2 Analog Input/Output Module, 8-Channel Input/8-

Channel Output (Model: AAI841, AAB841)
n AAI841 (4 to 20 mA Input/4 to 20 mA Output)

CH2 CH2
IN IN4A A4 B4 IN4B IN IN4A 34 33 IN4B
CH1 OUT1+ A9 B9 OUT1- CH1 OUT1+ 24 23 OUT1-
CH2 CH2
OUT2+ A10 B10 OUT2- OUT2+ 22 21 OUT2-
OUT3+ A11 B11 OUT3- OUT3+ 20 19 OUT3-
OUT OUT4+ A12 B12 OUT4- OUT OUT4+ 18 17 OUT4-

OUT5+ A13 B13 OUT5- OUT5+ 16 15 OUT5-
OUT6+ A14 B14 OUT6- OUT6+ 14 13 OUT6-
OUT7+ A15 B15 OUT7- OUT7+ 12 11 OUT7-
CH8 CH8
OUT8+ A16 B16 OUT8- OUT8+ 10 9 OUT8-
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (*1) 2 1 CBSE (*1)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.3.2-1 AAI841 External Connection

n AAB841 (1 to 5 V DC Input/4 to 20 mA Output)

CH1 IN1+ A1 B1 IN1- CH1 IN1+ 40 39 IN1-
CH2 CH2
IN2+ A2 B2 IN2- IN2+ 38 37 IN2-
IN3+ A3 B3 IN3- IN3+ 36 35 IN3-
IN IN4+ A4 B4 IN4- IN IN4+ 34 33 IN4-
IN5+ A5 B5 IN5- IN5+ 32 31 IN5-
IN6+ A6 B6 IN6- IN6+ 30 29 IN6-
IN7+ A7 B7 IN7- IN7+ 28 27 IN7-
CH8 IN8+ A8 B8 IN8- CH8 IN8+ 26 25 IN8-
CH2 CH2
OUT2+ A10 B10 OUT2- OUT2+ 22 21 OUT2-
OUT3+ A11 B11 OUT3- OUT3+ 20 19 OUT3-
OUT OUT4+ A12 B12 OUT4- OUT OUT4+ 18 17 OUT4-

OUT5+ A13 B13 OUT5- OUT5+ 16 15 OUT5-
OUT6+ A14 B14 OUT6- OUT6+ 14 13 OUT6-
OUT7+ A15 B15 OUT7- OUT7+ 12 11 OUT7-
CH8 CH8
OUT8+ A16 B16 OUT8- OUT8+ 10 9 OUT8-
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (*1) 2 1 CBSE (*1)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.3.2-2 AAB841 External Connection

B3.3.3 Analog Output Module, 16-Channel (Model: AAV542,

AAI543, AAV544)
n AAV542, AAV544 (-10 to +10 V DC output), AAI543 (4 to 20 mA DC

output)

CH2 CH2
OUT2+ A2 B2 OUT2- OUT2+ 38 37 OUT2-
OUT10+ A10 B10 OUT10- OUT10+ 22 21 OUT10-
OUT11+ A11 B11 OUT11- OUT11+ 20 19 OUT11-
OUT12+ A12 B12 OUT12- OUT12+ 18 17 OUT12-
OUT13+ A13 B13 OUT13- OUT13+ 16 15 OUT13-
OUT14+ A14 B14 OUT14- OUT14+ 14 13 OUT14-
CH16 CH16
OUT16+ A16 B16 OUT16- OUT16+ 10 9 OUT16-
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (1*) 2 1 CBSE (1*)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.3.3-1 AAV542, AAI543, AAV544 External Connection

B3.3.4 Thermocouple/mV Input Module, 16-Channel,

Isolated (Model: AAT141)
CH1 IN1+ A1 B1 IN1- CH1 IN1+ 40 39 IN1-
CH2 CH2
IN2+ A2 B2 IN2- IN2+ 38 37 IN2-
IN3+ A3 B3 IN3- IN3+ 36 35 IN3-
IN4+ A4 B4 IN4- IN4+ 34 33 IN4-
IN5+ A5 B5 IN5- IN5+ 32 31 IN5-
IN6+ A6 B6 IN6- IN6+ 30 29 IN6-
IN7+ A7 B7 IN7- IN7+ 28 27 IN7-
IN8+ A8 B8 IN8- IN8+ 26 25 IN8- RJC
IN9+ A9 B9 IN9- IN9+ 24 23 IN9- RJC

IN10+ A10 B10 IN10- IN10+ 22 21 IN10-
RJC
IN11+ A11 B11 IN11- IN11+ 20 19 IN11-
IN12+ A12 B12 IN12- IN12+ 18 17 IN12- RJC
IN13+ A13 B13 IN13- IN13+ 16 15 IN13-
IN14+ A14 B14 IN14- IN14+ 14 13 IN14- * RJC is built into
CH15 IN15+ A15 B15 IN15- CH15 IN15+ 12 11 IN15- the connector
CH16 CH16
IN16+ A16 B16 IN16- IN16+ 10 9 IN16-
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. Reserved (*1) 8 7 Reserved (*1)
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. Reserved (*1) 6 5 Reserved (*1)
Reserved (*1) 4 3 Reserved (*1)
CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2)
N.C.: No Connection
*1: Do not connect any signal to the reserved pins (3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) of MIL connector.
Figure B3.3.4-1 AAT141 External Connection
TIP The resistance of the signal source and wiring, including external wire resistance, must be 1000 ohm or less
for single operation, and 300 ohm or less for dual-redundant operation. Moreover, there will be an offset error
of 3 µV per 10 ohm if the burnout detection setting is enabled.

B3.3.5 RTD Input Module, 12-Channel, Isolated (Model:

AAR181)
IN1A A1 B1 IN1C IN1A 40 39 IN1C

CH1 CH1
IN1B A2 B2 IN2B IN1B 38 37 IN2B
CH2 IN2A A3 B3 IN2C CH2 IN2A 36 35 IN2C

CH3 CH3

IN10A A15 B15 IN10C IN10A 12 11 IN10C
IN11A A16 B16 IN11C IN11A 10 9 IN11C
CH11 CH11

N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (*1) 2 1 CBSE (*1)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.3.5-1 AAR181 External Connection
TIP The resistance in the wiring must be 40 ohm or less per wire. Moreover, there will be an offset error of 36
mohm per 40 ohm if the burnout detection setting is enabled.

B3.3.6 Analog Input Module, 8-Channel Isolated (Model:

AAI135)
IN1A A1 B1 N.C. IN1A 40 39 N.C.

CH1 CH1
IN1B A2 B2 IN1C IN1B 38 37 IN1C
IN2A A3 B3 N.C. IN2A 36 35 N.C.
CH2 CH2
IN3A A5 B5 N.C. IN3A 32 31 N.C.
IN4A A7 B7 N.C. IN4A 28 27 N.C.
IN5A A9 B9 N.C. IN5A 24 23 N.C.
IN6A A11 B11 N.C. IN6A 20 19 N.C.
IN7A A13 B13 N.C. IN7A 16 15 N.C.
CH7 CH7
IN8A A15 B15 N.C. IN8A 12 11 N.C.
CH8 CH8
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (*1) 2 1 CBSE (*1)
N.C.: No Connection

B3.3.7 Analog Input/Output Module, 8-Channel Isolated

(Model: AAI835)
IN1A A1 B1 N.C. IN1A 40 39 N.C.

CH IN1 CH IN1
IN2A A3 B3 N.C. IN2A 36 35 N.C.
CH IN2 CH IN2
IN3A A5 B5 N.C. IN3A 32 31 N.C.
IN4A A7 B7 N.C. IN4A 28 27 N.C.
CH IN4 CH IN4
N.C. A9 B9 N.C. N.C. 24 23 N.C.
CH OUT1 CH OUT1
OUT1+ A10 B10 OUT1- OUT1+ 22 21 OUT1-
N.C. A11 B11 N.C. N.C. 20 19 N.C.
OUT2+ A12 B12 OUT2- OUT2+ 18 17 OUT2-
N.C. A13 B13 N.C. N.C. 16 15 N.C.
CH OUT3 CH OUT3
OUT3+ A14 B14 OUT3- OUT3+ 14 13 OUT3-
N.C. A15 B15 N.C. N.C. 12 11 N.C.
CH OUT4 CH OUT4
OUT4+ A16 B16 OUT4- OUT4+ 10 9 OUT4-
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (*1) 2 1 CBSE (*1)
N.C.: No Connection

B3.3.8 Pulse Input Module, 8-Channel Isolated (Model:

AAP135)
IN1A A1 B1 N.C. IN1A 40 39 N.C.

CH1 CH1
IN2A A3 B3 N.C. IN2A 36 35 N.C.
CH2 CH2
IN3A A5 B5 N.C. IN3A 32 31 N.C.
IN4A A7 B7 N.C. IN4A 28 27 N.C.
IN5A A9 B9 N.C. IN5A 24 23 N.C.
IN6A A11 B11 N.C. IN6A 20 19 N.C.
IN7A A13 B13 N.C. IN7A 16 15 N.C.
CH7 CH7
IN8A A15 B15 N.C. IN8A 12 11 N.C.
CH8 CH8
N.C. A17 B17 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C. N.C. 6 5 N.C.
N.C. 4 3 N.C.
CBSE (*1) 2 1 CBSE (*1)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.3.8-1 AAP135 External Connection
n Connecting Signal Cables with Pulse Input Module AAP135

The AAP135 receives contact ON/OFF, voltage pulse and current pulse. Refer to the figures
below for details on how to connect signal cables since the items to be set by the system gen-
eration builder depend on the input pulse types.
l When Receiving No-Voltage Contact Signals (1)

For the relay contacts or transistor contacts, connect as follows. Pulse input frequency should
be 0 to 800 Hz. Max. frequency differs due to the wiring effect, etc.

AAP135
Pullup resistor
INA 12 V DC/24 V DC
Transmitter
INB
SW1 SW2
INC RL FIL
Setting Items by the IOM builder

(SW1: OFF, SW2: ON for relay contact SW1 (RL) : OFF (No terminating resistor)
if necessary) SW2 (FIL) : ON if necessary (*1)
checked to switch on SW2 for filtering out the chattering noise.
Figure B3.3.8-2 No-Voltage contact Input (1)
l When Receving No-Voltage Contact Signals (2)

Carry out connection as follows if a current is needed to flow to the relay contacts or transistor
contacts. When receiving transistor output signal with higher frequency of above, the wiring is
as follows.
AAP135
Transmitter
INB
SW1
(1 k ohm) SW2
INC RL FIL

SW1 (RL) : 1 k ohm
(SW1: ON, SW2: ON for relay contact
SW2 (FIL) : ON if necessary (*1)
if necessary)
Figure B3.3.8-3 No-Voltage contact Input (2)
l When Receiving Voltage Pulse Signals

AAP135
Transmitter
+ INB
SW1 SW2
- INC RL FIL
SW1 (RL) : OFF (No terminating resistor)
SW2 (FIL) : OFF
(SW1: OFF, SW2: OFF)
Figure B3.3.8-4 Voltage Pulse Input

l When Receiving Current Pulse By Using the Internal Power to Drive the
Transmitter (2-wire power supply type)
AAP135
Transmitter
INB
SW1 SW2
INC RL FIL Setting Items by the IOM builder
SW1 (RL) : Select the value of
RL resistance
SW2 (FIL) : OFF
(SW1: ON, RL selection, RL=200 ohm,
500 ohm, 1 k ohm, SW2: OFF)
Figure B3.3.8-5 2-Wire Power Supply Type
This method supplies power to the transmitter, and receives the transmitter output signals as
the current pulse signals. By using the input load resistance (select from Term. None, Term.
200 ohm, Term. 500 ohm, Term. 1 k ohm), the current signal is converted to the voltage level
pulse and receives it.
l When Receiving Voltage Pulse By Using the Internal Power to Drive the
Transmitter (3-wire power supply type)
AAP135
Transmitter
INB
SW1 SW2
INC RL FIL
SW1 (RL) : OFF (No terminating resistor)
SW2 (FIL) : OFF
(SW1: OFF, SW2: OFF)

B3.3.9 TC/mV Input Module, 16-Channel Isolated (Model:

AAT145)
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to connect the TC/mV input module, 16-channel isolated (AAT145), refer to:
“n Connection between AET4D and an I/O module” on page B3-35

B3.3.10 RTD/POT Input Module, 16-Channel Isolated (Model:

AAR145)
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to connect the RTD/POT input module, 16-channel isolated (AAR145), refer
to:
“n Connection between AER4D and an I/O module” on page B3-36

B3.3.11 Terminal Board Connections (Analog Input/Output

Module)
The figures in this section explain the signal names and terminal numbers of a terminal board,
as well as the connection from a terminal board to an Analog I/O module.
n Connection between AEA4D and an I/O module

The terminal N.C. in the figure is an unused terminal; wiring is not required.
Connect to both the CN1 and CN2
connectors or the CN3 and CN4 connectors
if an I/O module is made dual-redundant.
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1A 2A 16A 17A 18A 1A 2A 16A 17A 18A

1B 2B 16B 17B 18B 1B 2B 16B 17B 18B
Figure B3.3.11-1 AEA4D Terminal Board
SEE
ALSO For more information about signals and I/O types, refer to:
“n Signal Connecting to Analog I/O Module” on page B3-18
l When connecting AAI141, AAI143

Signal IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN7A IN8A IN9A IN10A IN11A IN12A IN13A IN14A IN15A IN16A N.C. N.C.
TM1, TM2 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A
Terminal No. 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B
Signal IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B IN5B IN6B IN7B IN8B IN9B IN10B IN11B IN12B IN13B IN14B IN15B IN16B N.C. N.C.
Figure B3.3.11-2 AEA4D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number
l When connecting AAV141, AAV142, AAV144

Signal IN1+ IN2+ IN3+ IN4+ IN5+ IN6+ IN7+ IN8+ IN9+ IN10+ IN11+ IN12+ IN13+ IN14+ IN15+ IN16+ N.C. N.C.
Signal IN1- IN2- IN3- IN4- IN5- IN6- IN7- IN8- IN9- IN10- IN11- IN12- IN13- IN14- IN15- IN16- N.C. N.C.
l When connecting AAI841

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN7A IN8A 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+ 5+ 6+ 7+ 8+ N.C. N.C.
Signal IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B IN5B IN6B IN7B IN8B OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N.C. N.C.
1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7- 8-

l When connecting AAB841

Signal IN1+ IN2+ IN3+ IN4+ IN5+ IN6+ IN7+ IN8+ 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+ 5+ 6+ 7+ 8+ N.C. N.C.
Signal IN1- IN2- IN3- IN4- IN5- IN6- IN7- IN8- OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N.C. N.C.
1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7- 8-
l When connecting AAV542, AAI543, AAV544

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+ 5+ 6+ 7+ 8+ 9+ 10+ 11+ 12+ 13+ 14+ 15+ 16+ N.C. N.C.
Signal OUT1- OUT2- OUT3- OUT4- OUT5- OUT6- OUT7- OUT8- OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N.C. N.C.
9- 10- 11- 12- 13- 14- 15- 16-

Signal IN1A IN1B IN2A IN2B IN3A IN3B IN4A IN4B IN5A IN5B IN6A IN6B IN7A IN7B IN8A IN8B N.C. N.C.
Signal N.C. IN1C N.C. IN2C N.C. IN3C N.C IN4C N.C. IN5C N.C. IN6C N.C. IN7C N.C. IN8C N.C. N.C.

OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal IN1A IN1B IN2A IN2B IN3A IN3B IN4A IN4B N.C. 1+ N.C. 2+ N.C. 3+ N.C. 4+ N.C. N.C.
Signal N.C. IN1C N.C. IN2C N.C. IN3C N.C IN4C N.C. OUT N.C. OUT N.C. OUT N.C. OUT N.C. N.C.
1- 2- 3- 4-
l When connecting AAP135

Signal IN1A IN1B IN2A IN2B IN3A IN3B IN4A IN4B IN5A IN5B IN6A IN6B IN7A IN7B IN8A IN8B N.C. N.C.
Signal N.C. IN1C N.C. IN2C N.C. IN3C N.C IN4C N.C. IN5C N.C. IN6C N.C. IN7C N.C. IN8C N.C. N.C.

n Connection between AEA3D and an I/O module

Connect both connectors to dual-redundant I/O modules,
for example CN1 and CN2 for TMI.
CN1 CN3 CN5 CN7
CN2 CN4 CN6 CN8
1A 2A 8A 9A 1A 2A 8A 9A 1A 2A 8A 9A 1A 2A 8A 9A
1B 2B 8B 9B 1B 2B 8B 9B 1B 2B 8B 9B 1B 2B 8B 9B
Figure B3.3.11-10 AEA3D Terminal Board
l When connecting AAI135 or AAP135 (2-wire transmitter, 2-wire input fixed

connection)
Signal IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN7A IN8A N.C.
TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A

Terminal No. 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B
Signal IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B IN5B IN6B IN7B IN8B N.C.
Figure B3.3.11-11 AEA3D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number (2-wire)
l When connecting AAI835 (2-wire transmitter, 2-wire input fixed

connection)
Signal IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A OUT1+ OUT2+ OUT3+ OUT4+ N.C.
TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A
Terminal No. 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B
Signal IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B OUT1- OUT2- OUT3- OUT4- N.C.
Figure B3.3.11-12 AEA3D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number (2-wire)
n Connection between AET4D and an I/O module

Connect to both the CN1 and CN2 connectors or the CN3
and CN4 connectors to dual-redundant I/O modules.
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1A 2A 16A 17A 18A 1A 2A 16A 17A 18A

1B 2B 16B 17B 18B 1B 2B 16B 17B 18B
Figure B3.3.11-13 AET4D Terminal Board
l When connecting AAT145

Signal IN1+ IN2+ IN3+ IN4+ IN5+ IN6+ IN7+ IN8+ IN9+ IN10+ IN11+ IN12+IN13+ IN14+ IN15+ IN16+ N.C. N.C.
Signal IN1- IN2- IN3- IN4- IN5- IN6- IN7- IN8- IN9- IN10- IN11- IN12- IN13- IN14- IN15- IN16- N.C. N.C.
Note: The AET4D has built-in RJC1 to RJC4.
Figure B3.3.11-14 AET4D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number

n Connection between AER4D and an I/O module

Connect to both the CN1 and CN2 connectors
1A NC NC 9A NC NC
1B 1C NC 9B 9C NC
Figure B3.3.11-15 AER4D Terminal Board
l When connecting AAR145

Signal IN1A N.C. IN2A N.C. IN3A N.C. IN4A N.C. IN5A N.C. IN6A N.C. IN7A N.C. IN8A N.C. N.C. N.C.
TM1 (Left) 1A NC 2A NC 3A NC 4A NC 5A NC 6A NC 7A NC 8A NC NC NC
Terminal No. 1B 1C 2B 2C 3B 3C 4B 4C 5B 5C 6B 6C 7B 7C 8B 8C NC NC
Signal IN1B IN1C IN2B IN2C IN3B IN3C IN4B IN4C IN5B IN5C IN6B IN6C IN7B IN7C IN8B IN8C N.C. N.C.
Signal IN9A N.C. IN10A N.C. IN11A N.C. IN12A N.C. IN13A N.C. IN14A N.C. IN15A N.C. IN16A N.C. N.C. N.C.
TM1 (Right) 9A NC 10A NC 11A NC 12A NC 13A NC 14A NC 15A NC 16A NC NC NC

Terminal No. 9B 9C 10B 10C 11B 11C 12B 12C 13B 13C 14B 14C 15B 15C 16B 16C NC NC
Signal IN9B IN9C IN10B IN10C IN11B IN11C IN12B IN12C IN13B IN13C IN14B IN14C IN15B IN15C IN16B IN16C N.C. N.C.
Figure B3.3.11-16 AER4D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number
n Connection between MRT and an I/O module
TM1 TM2
Figure B3.3.11-17 MRT Terminal Board
l When connecting AAR145

Signal IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN7A IN8A IN9A IN10A IN11A IN12A IN13A IN14A IN15A IN16A
TM1, TM2
Terminal No.
Signal IN1C IN2C IN3C IN4C IN5C IN6C IN7C IN8C IN9C IN10C IN11C IN12C IN13C IN14C IN15C IN16C
Signal IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B IN5B IN6B IN7B IN8B IN9B IN10B IN11B IN12B IN13B IN14B IN15B IN16B
Figure B3.3.11-18 MRT Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number

<B3.4 Signal Cable Connection to Digital Input/Output Modules> B3-37
B3.4 Signal Cable Connection to Digital Input/

Output Modules
Similar to Analog I/O modules, there are three ways of connecting a signal cables to digital
I/O modules: by connecting via a pressure clamp terminal block, by using a dedicated cable
to connect to the connectors via a terminal board, or by direct connection using a MIL cable.
n Channel Numbers and Pin Numbers

l Pressure Clamp Terminal
For single operation For dual-redundant operation
(MIL connector connection) (MIL connector connection)
For digital operation
(dedicated connector)
A1 B1
Same pin numbers as
for single operation
A18 B18
Figure B3.4-1 Terminal Number of Pressure Clamp Terminal
l MIL Connectors
MIL connectors for digital input/output have 50 pins
50 49
MIL connector pin number

(50 pin)
2 1
Figure B3.4-2 Pin Number of MIL Connector

n Precautions on Wiring Work
CAUTION
Do not perform any wiring work while the power is being supplied.
Voltages of 100 V AC or 200 V AC are applied to the signal cables of ADV141, ADV142, and
ADR541, and there may be a danger of an electric shock. Turn off the power supply to the
process side prior to any wiring work.

B3.4.1 Digital Input Module, 32-Channel (Model: ADV151,

ADV157)
ADV151 and ADV157 have the same specifications, but ADV157 is used with pressure clamp
terminal blocks for digital signals.
Pressure clamp terminal
Signal Terminal No. Signal
1 IN1 A1 B1 IN17 17
2 IN2 A2 B2 IN18 18
IN3 A3 B3 IN19
IN4 A4 B4 IN20
IN5 A5 B5 IN21
IN6 A6 B6 IN22
IN7 A7 B7 IN23
IN8 A8 B8 IN24
IN9 A9 B9 IN25
IN10 A10 B10 IN26
IN11 A11 B11 IN27
IN12 A12 B12 IN28
Terminal A17: common A
IN13 A13 B13 IN29 B17: common B
IN14 A14 B14 IN30
N.C.: No Connection
IN15 A15 B15 IN31
16 IN16 A16 B16 IN32 32
24 V DC COM1-16 (*1) A17 B17 COM17-32 (*1) 24 V DC
N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
Note: ADV151 and ADV157 are the Sink/Source type; however, the externally supplied power 24 V DC to
COM 1 to 16 and COM 17 to 32 must be the same polarity.
*1: COM1-16 and COM17-32 will be connected when used together with pressure clamp terminal blocks
(ATB5D-10, ATB5S-10) with surge absorbers for ADV151.
Figure B3.4.1-1 ADV151, ADV157 Pressure Clamp Terminal Connection

MIL connector
Signal Pin No. Signal
1 IN1 50 49 IN17 17
2 IN2 48 47 IN18 18
IN3 46 45 IN19
IN4 44 43 IN20
IN5 42 41 IN21
IN6 40 39 IN22
IN7 38 37 IN23
IN8 36 35 IN24
IN9 34 33 IN25
IN10 32 31 IN26
IN11 30 29 IN27
IN12 28 27 IN28
IN13 26 25 IN29
IN14 24 23 IN30
IN15 22 21 IN31
16 IN16 20 19 IN32 32
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32
24 V DC COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 24 V DC
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32
N.C. 10 9 N.C.
Pin No. 12, 14, 16, 18: common A
N.C. 8 7 N.C. 11, 13, 15, 17: common B
N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1)
N.C.: No Connection
N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1)
CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2)
Note: ADV151 is the Sink/Source type; however, the externally supplied power 24 V DC to COM 1 to 16 and
COM 17 to 32 must be the same polarity.
*1: For connecting MIL connector, use the connector with pin 3, 4, 5, 6 taken away to guarantee the isolation
distance between the pins.
Figure B3.4.1-2 ADV151 MIL Connector Connection

B3.4.2 Digital Input Module, 16-Channel (Model: ADV141,

ADV142)
In the case of ADV141, the input signal is 100 to 120 V AC. In the case of ADV142, the input
signal is 200 to 240 V AC.
Switch
1 IN1 A1 B1 COM1-8
2 IN2 A2 B2 COM1-8
IN3 A3 B3 COM1-8
To B1 to B8 IN4 A4 B4 COM1-8 Common for 8-channels
IN5 A5 B5 COM1-8
IN6 A6 B6 COM1-8
IN7 A7 B7 COM1-8
8 IN8 A8 B8 COM1-8
N.C. A9 B9 N.C.
9 IN9 A10 B10 COM9-16
10 IN10 A11 B11 COM9-16
IN11 A12 B12 COM9-16
IN12 A13 B13 COM9-16
To B10 to B17 IN13 A14 B14 COM9-16 Common for 8-channels

IN14 A15 B15 COM9-16
IN15 A16 B16 COM9-16
Terminal B1 to B8 : common A
16 IN16 A17 B17 COM9-16 B10 to B17 : common B
N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.4.2-1 ADV141, ADV142 External Connector (Not using MIL connector)
n Notices
When ADV141 and ADV142 are applied, the following cautions must be noticed.
CAUTION
When replace the module of ADV141 or ADV142 during online maintenance (disconnect the
connect and remove the module online), plug-in or plug-out the connectors on the modules
must strictly follow the stipulated sequences.
SEE
ALSO For more information about plug-in or plug-out the connector, refer to:
B4.3, “Replacing Input/Output Modules” on page B4-17

B3.4.3 Digital Output Module, 32-Channel (Model: ADV551,

ADV557)
ADV551 and ADV557 have the same specifications, but ADV557 is used together with pres-
sure clamp terminal blocks.
1 OUT1 A1 B1 OUT17 17
2 OUT2 A2 B2 OUT18 18
OUT3 A3 B3 OUT19
OUT4 A4 B4 OUT20
OUT5 A5 B5 OUT21
OUT6 A6 B6 OUT22
OUT7 A7 B7 OUT23
OUT8 A8 B8 OUT24
OUT9 A9 B9 OUT25
OUT10 A10 B10 OUT26
OUT11 A11 B11 OUT27
OUT12 A12 B12 OUT28
OUT13 A13 B13 OUT29 : Load
OUT14 A14 B14 OUT30
OUT15 A15 B15 OUT31
16 OUT16 A16 B16 OUT32 32
COM1-16 (*1) A17 B17 COM17-32 (*1) Terminal A17: common A
24 V DC A18 B18 24 V DC B17: common B
24 V DC 24 V DC
Note: Connect the positive (+) side of the externally supplied 24 V DC power to terminal 24 V DC,
and the negative (–) side to COM1-16 and COM17-32.
*1: COM1-16 and COM17-32 will be connected,while 24 V DC(A18) and 24V DC(B18) will be connected when
used together with pressure clamp terminal blocks (ATB5D-10, ATB5S-10) with surge absorbers for ADV551.
Figure B3.4.3-1 ADV551, ADV557 Pressure Clamp Terminal Connection

MIL connector
1 OUT1 50 49 OUT17 17
2 OUT2 48 47 OUT18 18
OUT3 46 45 OUT19
OUT4 44 43 OUT20
OUT5 42 41 OUT21
OUT6 40 39 OUT22
OUT7 38 37 OUT23
OUT8 36 35 OUT24
OUT9 34 33 OUT25
OUT10 32 31 OUT26
OUT11 30 29 OUT27
OUT12 28 27 OUT28
OUT13 26 25 OUT29 : Load
OUT14 24 23 OUT30
OUT15 22 21 OUT31
16 OUT16 20 19 OUT32 32
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32
24 V DC 10 9 24 V DC
24 V DC 8 7 24 V DC
24 V DC 24 V DC
N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1)
Pin No. 12, 14, 16, 18: common A
N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1)
11, 13, 15, 17: common B
CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2)
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.4.3-2 ADV551 Mill Connector Connection

B3.4.4 Digital Input Module, 64-Channel (Model: ADV161)

MIL50-Pin x 2
CN1
CN2
CN1 CN2
Signal Pin No. Signal Signal Pin No. Signal
1 IN1 50 49 IN17 17 33 IN33 50 49 IN49 49

2 IN2 48 47 IN18 18 34 IN34 48 47 IN50 50
IN3 46 45 IN19 IN35 46 45 IN51
IN4 44 43 IN20 IN36 44 43 IN52
IN5 42 41 IN21 IN37 42 41 IN53
IN6 40 39 IN22 IN38 40 39 IN54
IN7 38 37 IN23 IN39 38 37 IN55
IN8 36 35 IN24 IN40 36 35 IN56
IN9 34 33 IN25 IN41 34 33 IN57
IN10 32 31 IN26 IN42 32 31 IN58
IN11 30 29 IN27 IN43 30 29 IN59
IN12 28 27 IN28 IN44 28 27 IN60
IN13 26 25 IN29 IN45 26 25 IN61
IN14 24 23 IN30 IN46 24 23 IN62
IN15 22 21 IN31 IN47 22 21 IN63
16 IN16 20 19 IN32 32 48 IN48 20 19 IN64 64
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32 COM33-48 18 17 COM49-64
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 COM33-48 16 15 COM49-64
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32 24 V DC COM33-48 14 13 COM49-64
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32 COM33-48 12 11 COM49-64
24 V DC 24 V DC
N.C. 10 9 N.C. N.C. 10 9 N.C.
N.C. 8 7 N.C. N.C. 8 7 N.C.
N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1) Terminal CN1, CN2 N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1)
N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1) 11 to 18 : common N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1)
CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2) CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2)
N.C.: No Connection
Note: ADV161 is the Sink/Source type; however, the externally supplied power 24 V DC to COM 1 to 16,
COM 17 to 32, COM 33 to 48 and COM 49 to 64 must be the same polarity.
Figure B3.4.4-1 ADV161 External Connection (Not using pressure clamp terminal)

B3.4.5 Digital Output Module, 64-Channel (Model: ADV561)

MIL50-Pin x 2
CN1
CN2
CN1 : Load CN2
Signal Pin No. Signal Signal Pin No. Signal
1 OUT1 50 49 OUT17 17 33 OUT33 50 49 OUT49 49

2 OUT2 48 47 OUT18 18 34 OUT34 48 47 OUT50 50
OUT3 46 45 OUT19 OUT35 46 45 OUT51
OUT4 44 43 OUT20 OUT36 44 43 OUT52
OUT5 42 41 OUT21 OUT37 42 41 OUT53
OUT6 40 39 OUT22 OUT38 40 39 OUT54
OUT7 38 37 OUT23 OUT39 38 37 OUT55
OUT8 36 35 OUT24 OUT40 36 35 OUT56
OUT9 34 33 OUT25 OUT41 34 33 OUT57
OUT10 32 31 OUT26 OUT42 32 31 OUT58
OUT11 30 29 OUT27 OUT43 30 29 OUT59
OUT12 28 27 OUT28 OUT44 28 27 OUT60
OUT13 26 25 OUT29 OUT45 26 25 OUT61
OUT14 24 23 OUT30 OUT46 24 23 OUT62
OUT15 22 21 OUT31 OUT47 22 21 OUT63
16 OUT16 20 19 OUT32 32 48 OUT48 20 19 OUT64 64
COM1-16 18 17 COM17-32 COM33-48 18 17 COM49-64
COM1-16 16 15 COM17-32 COM33-48 16 15 COM49-64
COM1-16 14 13 COM17-32 COM33-48 14 13 COM49-64
COM1-16 12 11 COM17-32 COM33-48 12 11 COM49-64
24 V DC 10 9 24 V DC 24 V DC 10 9 24 V DC
24 V DC 8 7 24 V DC 24 V DC 8 7 24 V DC
24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC
N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1) N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1)
N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1) N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1)
Terminal CN1, CN2
CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2) CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2)
11 to 18 : common
N.C.: No Connection

B3.4.6 Digital I/O Module, 16-Channel Input/16-Channel

Output (Model: ADV851)
MIL50-Pin
1 IN1 50 49 OUT1 1
2 IN2 48 47 OUT2 2
IN3 46 45 OUT3
IN4 44 43 OUT4
IN5 42 41 OUT5
IN6 40 39 OUT6
IN7 38 37 OUT7
IN8 36 35 OUT8
IN OUT
IN9 34 33 OUT9
IN10 32 31 OUT10
IN11 30 29 OUT11
IN12 28 27 OUT12
IN13 26 25 OUT13 : Load
IN14 24 23 OUT14
IN15 22 21 OUT15
16 IN16 20 19 OUT16 16
COMIN 18 17 COMOUT
24 V DC COMIN 16 15 COMOUT
COMIN 14 13 COMOUT
COMIN 12 11 COMOUT
N.C. 10 9 24 V DC
N.C. 8 7 24 V DC
24 V DC
N.C. (*1) 6 5 N.C. (*1)
Pin No. 12, 14, 16, 18: common (IN)
N.C. (*1) 4 3 N.C. (*1)
11, 13, 15, 17: common (OUT)
CBSE (*2) 2 1 CBSE (*2)
N.C.: No Connection
Note: ADV851 supports sink and source input.


B3.4.7 Relay Output Module, 16-Channel (Model: ADR541)

1 OUT1 A1 B1 COM1-8
2 OUT2 A2 B2 COM1-8
OUT3 A3 B3 COM1-8
To B1 to B8 OUT4 A4 B4 COM1-8 Common for 8-channels
OUT5 A5 B5 COM1-8
: Load OUT6 A6 B6 COM1-8
OUT7 A7 B7 COM1-8
8 OUT8 A8 B8 COM1-8
N.C. A9 B9 N.C.
9 OUT9 A10 B10 COM9-16
10 OUT10 A11 B11 COM9-16
OUT11 A12 B12 COM9-16
OUT12 A13 B13 COM9-16
To B10 to B17 OUT13 A14 B14 COM9-16 Common for 8-channels

OUT14 A15 B15 COM9-16
OUT15 A16 B16 COM9-16
Terminal B1 to B8 : common A
16 OUT16 A17 B17 COM9-16 Terminal B10 to B17 : common B
N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
N.C.: No Connection
Figure B3.4.7-1 ADR541 External Connection (Not using pressure clamp terminal)
n Notices
When ADR541 is applied, the following cautions must be noticed.
CAUTION
When replace the module of ADR541 during online maintenance (disconnect the connect and
remove the module online), plug-in or plug-out the connectors on the modules must strictly
follow the stipulated sequences.
SEE

B3.4.8 Connection with a Terminal Board (Digital Input/

Output Module)
The figures below show the signal names and terminal numbers of a terminal board, as well
as the connection from a terminal board to a digital I/O module.
n Connection between AED5D and an Input/Output Module

The terminal N.C. in the figure is an unused terminal; cable connection is prohibition.
Connect to both connectors
Fuse (*1) if an I/O module is made dual-redundant. Fuse (*1)
1A 2A 17A 18A
1B 1B 17B 18B
*1: Part number of fuse; S9530VK (3.2 A)
Figure B3.4.8-1 AED5D Terminal Board
When connecting ADV161 or ADV561 with a terminal board, two sets of AED5D are required.
The dashed line indicates for

dual-redundant configuration.
AED5D AED5D
Figure B3.4.8-2 When connecting ADV161 or ADV561 (64-point)
l Connecting to ADV151 (Voltage Input)

IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
Signal name IN1+ IN2+ IN3+ IN4+ IN5+ IN6+ IN7+ IN8+ 9+ 10+ 11+ 12+ 13+ 14+ 15+ 16+ N.C. N.C.
TM1 (Left) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A LSA L+
Terminal No. 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B LSB L-
Signal name COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA
Indicates that a short-circuited cable

is installed on the terminal board.
IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
Signal name 17+ 18+ 19+ 20+ 21+ 22+ 23+ 24+ 25+ 26+ 27+ 28+ 29+ 30+ 31+ 32+ N.C. N.C.
TM1 (Right) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A RSA R+
Terminal No. 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B RSB -
Signal name COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB
Figure B3.4.8-3 AED5D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number

l When Connecting ADV151 (Dry Contact Input) 24 V DC required

Signal name 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+ 5+ 6+ 7+ 8+ 9+ 10+ 11+ 12+ 13+ 14+ 15+ 16+ 24 V+
Signal name COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA 24 V-
Signal name 17+ 18+ 19+ 20+ 21+ 22+ 23+ 24+ 25+ 26+ 27+ 28+ 29+ 30+ 31+ 32+ 24 V+
Terminal No. 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B RSB R-
Signal name COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB 24 V-
l When Connecting ADV551 (Voltage Output) 24 V DC required
WARNING
When AED5D is used together with ADV551 or ADV561 in voltage mode, the terminals A and
B of AED5D should be prevented from short-circuit including the short circuit caused by im-
proper measuring methods. (For an example, use a multi-tester to check the resistance be-
tween the A and B terminals may cause short circuit between the two terminals.) The short
circuit between the two terminals may damage the transistors in ADV551 or ADV561.
Signal name 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7- 8- 9- 10- 11- 12- 13- 14- 15- 16- 24 V+
Note: The polarity of COMA is (+) when connecting with a voltage output terminal.
Signal name 17- 18- 19- 20- 21- 22- 23- 24- 25- 26- 27- 28- 29- 30- 31- 32- 24 V+
Note: The polarity of COMB is (+) when connecting with a voltage output terminal.
l When Connecting ADV551 (Transistor Output) 24 V DC required

Signal name 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+ 5+ 6+ 7+ 8+ 9+ 10+ 11+ 12+ 13+ 14+ 15+ 16+ N.C. 24 V+
Signal name 17+ 18+ 19+ 20+ 21+ 22+ 23+ 24+ 25+ 26+ 27+ 28+ 29+ 30+ 31+ 32+ N.C. 24 V+

n Connection between AEC4D and an Input/Output Module

Connect to both connectors
1A 2A 17A 18A 1A 2A 17A 18A

1B 2B 17B 18B 1B 2B 17B 18B
Figure B3.4.8-7 AEC4D Terminal Board
l Notices
When ADV141, ADV142 and ADR541 are applied, the following cautions must be noticed.
CAUTION
When replace the module of ADV141, ADV142 or ADR541 during online maintenance (dis-
connect the connect and remove the module online), plug-in or plug-out the connectors on the
modules must strictly follow the stipulated sequences.
SEE
l When Connecting ADV141, ADV142

Signal Name IN1+ IN2+ IN3+ IN4+ IN5+ IN6+ IN7+ IN8+ N.C. IN9+ IN10+ IN11+ IN12+ IN13+ IN14+ IN15+ IN16+ N.C.
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A
Terminal No.
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B
Signal Name COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA N.C. COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB N.C.
Figure B3.4.8-8 AEC4D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number
l When Connecting ADR541

Signal Name OUT1+ OUT2+ OUT3+ OUT4+ OUT5+ OUT6+ OUT7+ OUT8+ N.C. 9+ 10+ 11+ 12+ 13+ 14+ 15+ 16+ N.C.
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A
Terminal No.
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B
Signal Name COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA COMA N.C. COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB COMB N.C.
Figure B3.4.8-9 AEC4D Terminal Board Signal Name and Terminal Number

<B3.5 Signal Cable Connection to Communication Modules> B3-51
B3.5 Signal Cable Connection to

Communication Modules
This section explains how to connect signal cables to the communication modules ALR111,
ALR121, ALE111, ALF111, ALP111 and ALP121
n Cables for Communication Modules

Yokogawa Electric Corporation provides communication cables in the range shown in the ta-
ble below. Any necessary cables other than these should be prepared by the user.
Table B3.5-1 List of Communication Cables

AKB131 RS-232C Modem cable Between ALR111 to modem (for connecting RS circuit
isolated the devices)
AKB132 RS-232C Null modem cable Between ALR111 to RS-232C equipment (for connecting
RS circuit isolated the devices)
AKB133 RS-232C Null modem cable Between ALR111 to FA-M3 (9-9pin male)
AKB134 RS-232C Null modem cable Between ALR111 to RS-232C equipment (9-9 socket fe-
male)
AKB135 RS-232C Modem cable Between ALR111 to modem (9-25pin)
AKB136 RS-232C Null modem cable Between ALR111 to RS-232C equipment (9-25pin)
AKB161 RS-422/RS-485 cable Between ALR121 (M4 terminal) to external equipment
(M3 terminal)
AKB162 RS-422/RS-485 cable Between ALR121 (M4 terminal) to external equipment
(M4 terminal)
AKB336 KS 20 Pin cable Between ALF111 to terminal (for FOUNDATION fieldbus)

B3.5.1 Signal Cable Connection to RS-232C

RCV 1 2
SND 1 2
Figure B3.5.1-1 Signal Cable Connector of ALR111 Communication Module
The communication cables that can be used in this case have connectors for the D-sub 9 pin:
modem cables AKB131 and AKB135, null-modem cables AKB132, AKB133, AKB134, and
AKB136.
Connector Pin Numbers on
D-sub 9 Pin Board Side
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure B3.5.1-2 D-sub 9 Pin Connector Pin Numbers
Table B3.5.1-1 RS-232C Interface Connector Pin Position

CN1, CN2
Abbrev. Signal Name Remarks
Pin Position
1 CD Carrier Detect Carrier detect (input)
2 RD Receive Data Receive data (input)
3 SD Send Data Send data (output)
4 ER Equipment Ready Data terminal ready (output)
5 SG Signal Ground Signal common retrace line
6 DR Dataset Ready Dataset ready (input)
7 RS Request to Send Request to send (output)
8 CS Clear to Send Sending possible (input)
9 – – N.C.
The figure below shows the internal connection of the RS-232C interface cable.

AKB131 AKB132
CN1 CN2 CN1 CN2
SD SD SD SD
2 3 2 3
RD RD RD RD
3 2 3 2
RS RS RS RS
4 7 4 7
CS CS CS CS
5 8 5 8
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
SG SG SG SG
7 5 7 5
CD CD CD CD
8 1 8 1
ER ER ER ER
20 4 20 4
FG FG
1 1
Connector Connector
shell Shield ALR side shell Shield ALR side
External equipment side External equipment side
CN1 AKB133 CN2 CN1 AKB134 CN2

CD CD CD CD
1 1 1 1
RD RD RD RD
2 2 2 2
SD SD SD SD
3 3 3 3
ER ER ER ER
4 4 4 4
SG SG SG SG
5 5 5 5
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
RS RS RS RS
7 7 7 7
CS CS CS CS
8 8 8 8
Connector Connector
shell ALR side shell
ALR side
FA-M3 D-sub 9 pin
External equipment side D-sub 9 pin
YEWMAC500 side
D-sub 9 socket (female)
D-sub 9 (male)
CN1 AKB135 CN2 CN1

AKB136 CN2
SD SD SD SD
2 3 2 3
RD RD RD RD
3 2 3 2
RS RS RS RS
4 7 4 7
CS CS CS CS
5 8 5 8
DR DR DR DR
6 6 6 6
SG SG SG SG
7 5 7 5
CD CD CD CD
8 1 8 1
ER ER ER ER
20 4 20 4
FG FG
1 1
Connector Connector
shell Shield shell Shield
External equipment side ALR side External equipment side ALR side
Figure B3.5.1-3 RS-232C Interface Cable Internal Connection
n Communication Module Signal Circuits

The ALR111 and ALR121 communication modules isolate the communication circuit signal
lines to prevent noise from entering the FCS from the partner AC line, frame ground (FG) con-

necting cables and communication cables. Because of this, it is necessary that cable shield-
ing wires be connected to the FG at the partner side. The partner terminal requires that its FG
and signal ground (SG) be connected to each other, providing the same potential between
them.
n ALR111 FG Connection
The ALR111 communication module isolates the RS-232C interface circuit functionally. This
prevents noise from entering the FCS from the subsystem, thereby improving noise resist-
ance. To use this function effectively, satisfy the following requirements:
IMPORTANT
• Always ground the FG terminal at the partner terminal, with grounding resistance up to
100 ohms.
• Connect the FG and SG (pin No. 7 on the D-sub25 pin, pin No. 5 on the D-sub9 pin
RS-232C circuit) together at the partner terminal.
• Ground the cable shielding wires at the partner terminal.
(When using AKB133 cable, connect the end of the cable with the red mark to the partner
terminal.)
• If the signal cable is prepared by users, make the sure the cable is the type of twisted pair
cable in which a signal wire and a ground wire are paired.
The shield of the RS-232C communications cable (AKB135 or AKB136) should be connected
to the frame grounding terminal (FG) of the destination device.
The frame grounding terminal of the destination device (a subsystem or modem) should satis-
fy the D-class grounding requirement (or the third class grounding where the grounding resist-
ance is less than 100 ohms).
On the destination device connector, confirm that the frame grounding pin (pin 1 on D-sub 25-
pin connector) and the signal grounding pin (pin 7 on D-sub 25-pin connector) are connected.
Moreover, the connector of AKB133 cable that stuck with a red-round mark (on CN1 side)
should be connected to the connector of destination device so as to connect the cable shied
to the shell of the subsystem or modem side connector.
FCS cabinet
AKB135 cable (Modem cable) or

ALR111 module AKB136 cable (Null modem cable)
Partner equipment
SG1 SG2
5 7
Circuit
1
Shielding wires should

be connected to the FG
at the subsystem side. FG
Grounding of
up to 100 ohms
Grounding of up to 100 ohms
Figure B3.5.1-4 FG Connection

n AKB136 Cable Connection

For the partner equipment, jumper J1 should be provided (see the figure below) upon ship-
ment. (If it is not, provide jumper 1 for short-circuiting.) To meet the above requirement, the
FG and SG may be directly connected.
Partner equipment
D-sub25 side
7 7 SG
SG Circuit
FG
1 J1
1 FG
AKB136 cable
FG
Figure B3.5.1-5 Example of Using AKB136 Cable
If the SG and FG signals in the partner equipment RS-232C communications circuit are not
connected floated signal grandings of the communication circuits at both the ALR111 and
partner equipment will result, in lowering noise resistance.
To prevent this, use an AKB131 or AKB132 cable.
Connect pin No. 1 (for the frame ground) and pin No. 7 (for the signal ground) together at the
partner equipment. In addition, as a means of grounding the shielding wires of this cable, Fig-
ure below illustrates that the shielding wires can be connected to the FG terminal at the part-
ner equipment in cases where pin No. 1 is disconnected at the partner equipment.
Partner equipment
D-sub25 side
7 7 SG
SG Circuit
FG
1
1
Open
To FG cable To ground
(two ring terminals
may be connected
AKB131 cable or FG to each other.)
AKB132 cable
Figure B3.5.1-6 Cable Connection for Isolated Communications Circuit
n Connection to Partner Equipments

The ALR111 and partner equipment are connected by a cable up to 15 meters in length.
If the ALR111 is connected to a subsystem, the subsystem requires frame grounding with a
grounding resistance of up to 100 ohms.
If the cable is longer than 15 meters, always use a modem that its frame is grounded.

B3.5.2 RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module

RCV 1 2
SND 1 2
Figure B3.5.2-1 Terminal of Communication Module (ALR121)
Table B3.5.2-1 RS-422/RS-485 Interface Terminal

Terminal name Signal name Remarks
TX+ Send Data positive phase signal
TX- Send Data negative phase signal
RX+ Receive Data positive phase signal
RX- Receive Data negative phase signal
SG Signal Ground Signal common retrace line
n ALR121 External Connection

When connecting Model ALR121 with external equipment, two methods for 1 to 1 and 1 to n
(n: up to 32) are available. The figure below shows the configuration.

Connection of model
ALR121 with System configuration
external equipment
ALR121
1:1
External
equipment
ALR121
1:n
(n:up to 32 pieces
of equipment)
External External External
equipment equipment equipment
Figure B3.5.2-2 System Configuration When Connecting Model ALR121 with External Equipment
n ALR121 FG Connection
Set up the RS-422/RS-485 shield as shown below.
Grounding for the FG must be grounding (with resistance up to 100 ohm) on the connected
side (subsystem side).
The cable shield between Model ALR121 and the subsystem side must be connected to the
FG on the subsystem side, not to the FG on Model ALR121.
The cable shield is connected to Subsystem
ALR121 the FG on the subsystem side.
SG SG
FG
AKB161 or AKB162 cable
FG
Grounding (100 ohm or less)
Figure B3.5.2-3 FG Connection
n Connection with External Equipment

Four-wire and two-wire types are provided for the connection of Model ALR121 with external
equipment. Each type has 1 to 1 and 1 to n connections.


External
ALR121 FA500 MELSEC
equipment
TX+ TX+ SDB SDA

R2
TX- TX- SDA SDB
RX+ RX+ RDB RDA

R1 R2
RX- RX- RDA RDB
SG SG SG SG
FG FG FG

Figure B3.5.2-4 1 to 1 Connection in 4-wire Type

When ALR121 is specified for 2-wire connection by the builder, “Tx+ and Rx+” and “Tx- and
Rx-” are automatically connected within the module.
ALR121 External equipment
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
R1 R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
FG

Figure B3.5.2-5 1 to 1 Connection in 2-wire Type


TX+ TX+
TX+ TX+
TX- TX- R2
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX+ RX+
R1 RX- RX- R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
SG SG
FG FG
FG

Figure B3.5.2-6 1 to n Connection in 4-wire Type

When ALR121 is specified for 2-wire connection by the builder, “Tx+ and Rx+” and “Tx- and
Rx-” are automatically connected within the module.
TX+ TX+
TX+ TX+
TX- TX-
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
RX+ RX+
R1 RX- RX- R2
RX- RX-
SG SG
SG SG
FG FG
FG

Figure B3.5.2-7 1 to n Connection in 2-wire Type

B3.5.3 Connection of Ethernet Communication Module

The signal cables used for connecting Ethernet communication modules are 10BASE-T twis-
ted-pair cables. The connector type is RJ45.
ALE111
Figure B3.5.3-1 Ethernet Communication Module

B3.5.4 Signal Cable Connection to FOUNDATION fieldbus

There are two ways of wiring signal cables to FOUNDATION fieldbus communication mod-
ules: using pressure clamp terminal blocks (Model: ATF9S) or connecting to ALF111 by
AKB336 cable via a connector and receiving signals from the field equipment via a terminal
board (Model: AEF9D).
ALF111 ALF111
Pressure clamp terminal block connection Connection via connectors
RCV 1 2 3 4 RCV 1 2 3 4
SND 1 2 3 4 SND 1 2 3 4
Figure B3.5.4-1 FOUNDATION fieldbus Communication Module
n Connection with Field Equipment (When Using Pressure Clamp

Terminal Blocks)
The signal cables from the field device should be connected to the + and - terminals of the
pressure clamp terminal block (Model: ATF9S).
Do not connect anything to terminals for channels that are not used.
Use shield lines for cables from the field device to the FG terminal. If two or more channels
are in use, no more than two shield lines can be connected to one FG terminal. When instal-
ling the wiring on a control station using a pressure clamp terminal block, do not connect the
shield lines of the cables to the FG terminal of ATF9S but to the ground bar of the cabinet
(isolated from the cabinet itself).
The power unit should be placed as close as possible and using a cable shorter than 1 meter
to connect. Use a type A cable and connect the cable shield to the same potential as the FG
terminal of the I/O node if the distance exceeds 1 meter.
Note that, when installing wiring within the cabinet, the shield line should be connected to the
shield ground bar within the cabinet as well.

l Single Operation
ALF111 with ATF9S
+
- To power
supply unit
CH1 +
- To field equipment
CH2 Shield
CH3
CH4
FG
Figure B3.5.4-2 Signal Cable Wiring of FOUNDATION fieldbus (Single Operation)
l Dual-Redundant Operation
ALF111 with ATF9S ALF111 with ATF9S
+ +
To power
- supply unit - To field equipment
CH1 CH1 +
+
Shield
- -
CH2 CH2
CH3 CH3
CH4 CH4
FG
Figure B3.5.4-3 Signal Cable Wiring of FOUNDATION fieldbus (Dual-Redundant Operation)
n Connection with Field Devices (When Using Terminal Boards)
Figure B3.5.4-4 Terminal Board (Model: AEF9D)
The terminal board (Model: AEF9D) and ALF111 should be connected using AKB336 cables.
The shield line of the AKB336 cable should be connected to the FG terminal of ALF111.
The shield lines of the cables from the field device should be connected to the ground bar of
the cabinet (isolated from the cabinet itself). Connect only signal cables to the upper side of
the screw terminals of the terminal board . The power supply unit should be connected to the
lower side of the screw terminal board.
The wiring length between the power supply unit and the terminal board should be within 1
meter.

AEF9D Terminal board
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- NC
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- NC
for Power supply unit
Grounding bar for the shield inside the cabinet

(isolated from cabinet)
to Field equipment
Figure B3.5.4-5 Signal Cable Wiring of Fieldbus (When Using Terminal Boards)
Make sure to install a terminator (Model: YCB138) if ALF111 terminates the network, e.g. if
the network is not terminated by a power supply unit with terminator.
AEF9D Terminal board
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- N.C.
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- N.C.
to Field equipment Terminator (YCB138)
Figure B3.5.4-6 Installation of Terminator
CAUTION
If the following circumstances, exist at the same time the vacant port should be terminated
with a pair of terminators.
• When using AEF9D terminal board
• When ALF111 is in dual-redundant configuration
• When any of the four ports is vacant
The reason is that the port will be communicate to both the active and standby ALF111 even if
the port is vacant.
n Setting Elements
If a pressure clamp terminal block is used and ALF111 is terminating the network, the termina-
tor should be turned “ON.” Move the sockets of J1 and J4 (Ch1 and Ch4) in the front of
ALF111 to the “ON” side in order to turn the terminator “ON.” Remove the plastic panel when
changing the setting.
The terminator is set to “OFF” when the terminal block is shipped from the factory.

RCV 1 2 3 4
SND 1 2 3 4
ON OFF
J1
J1
J2
J2
J3
J3
J4
J4
Figure B3.5.4-7 Terminator Setting

B3.5.5 Connection with Terminal Boards

The figures below show the signal names and terminal numbers of a terminal board, as well
as the connection from a terminal board to a FOUNDATION fieldbus communication module.
n Connection between AEF9D and FOUNDATION fieldbus

Connect to both connectors if an
I/O module is made dual-redundant.
1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC 1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC 1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC 1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC
1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC 1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC 1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC 1+ 1- 4+ 4- NC
Figure B3.5.5-1 AEF9D Terminal Board
l When Connecting ALF111

FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS
Signal 1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- N.C.
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- NC
Terminal No.
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- NC
Signal FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS FBUS N.C.
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4-
Figure B3.5.5-2 AEF9D Signal Name and Terminal Number
n Example of Implementation of FOUNDATION fieldbus

Communication Module ALF111
To make fieldbus connection using the ALF111, the power supply unit for the fieldbus must be
prepared as shown below.
The following shows an example of ALF111 implementation (1U=44.45 mm).
Confirm each device specification as to temperature before mounting.

19-inch rack
ESB bus
Primary
power distribution unit
PW601/PW602
+ + + +
24 V DC
– 24 V DC
– 24 V DC
– 24 V DC
–
+ + + +
OUT OUT OUT OUT
4U ALF111 – – – –
READY READY READY READY
TN1 TN1 TN1 TN1
ALF111+ATF9S
AKB336
+
CH1
–
+
–
(20PIN-20PIN)
+
CH2
–
+
–
+
–
+
5U
CH3
–
+
–
+
CH4
–
AEP9D
1U
4U
FG
To MAIN PDB
AEF9D
End Plate (both ends)

3U
U U
L L
MTL5995
To Field device (Power supply unit for Fieldbus) + MTLMS010 (spacer)
Figure B3.5.5-3 ALF111 Installation Example

B3.5.6 Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP

Communication Module (ALP111)
ALP111
CN1
CN2
Figure B3.5.6-1 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
Table B3.5.6-1 Pin Assignment of PROFIBUS-DP Interface Connector

1 – Shield
2 – –
3 I/O A-line
5 – DGND
6 – VP +5 V
7 – –
8 I/O B-line
9 – –
IMPORTANT
Note the followings if ALP111 modules are dual-redundantly configured.
• According to the PROFIBUS-DP specification, both ends of a PROFIBUS-DP segment
should be properly terminated. And, both the PROFIBUS-DP terminators need to be con-
stantly provided with power. If the power supply for any terminator fails, the communica-
tion status of the whole PROFIBUS-DP segment will become instable.
• When the ALP111 modules are dual-redundantly configured, if the PROFIBUS-DP cables
in a segment are connected in daisy chain topology, any one of the ALP111 modules
should not be placed at the end of the segment cable. It is recommended to place an ac-
tive terminator at the end of the segment cable. Thus, the communication abnormality of
the whole PROFIBUS-DP segment can be avoided when the ALP111 module that closer
to the end of cable encounters trouble.
• When the ALP111 modules are dual-redundantly configured, to replace the ALP111 mod-
ule at the end of the cable, a special procedure is required to prevent the communication
failure. Please contact Yokogawa’s sales agents for details.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the PROFIBUS-DP, refer to:
3, “PROFIBUS-DP (ALP111)” in the Communication with PROFIBUS systems (IM 33K03P10-50E)

B3.5.7 Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP

Communication Module (ALP121)
ALP121
CN1
CN2
Figure B3.5.7-1 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module
Table B3.5.7-1 Pin Assignment of PROFIBUS-DP Interface Connector

1 – Shield
2 – –
3 I/O A-line
5 – DGND
6 – VP +5 V
7 – –
8 I/O B-line
9 – –
IMPORTANT
The redundant scheme can be configured using ALP121 consists of dual-module redundancy
and dual-network redundancy.
Note the followings if ALP121 modules are dual-redundantly configured.
• According to the PROFIBUS-DP specification, both ends of a PROFIBUS-DP segment
should be properly terminated. And, both the PROFIBUS-DP terminators need to be con-
stantly provided with power. If the power supply for any terminator fails, the communica-
tion status of the whole PROFIBUS-DP segment will become instable.
• When the ALP121 modules are dual-redundantly configured, if the PROFIBUS-DP cables
in a segment are connected in daisy chain topology, any one of the ALP121 modules
should not be placed at the end of the segment cable. It is recommended to place an ac-
tive terminator at the end of the segment cable. Thus, the communication abnormality of
the whole PROFIBUS-DP segment can be avoided when the ALP121 module that closer
to the end of cable encounters trouble.
• When the ALP121 modules are dual-redundantly configured, to replace the ALP121 mod-
ule at the end of the cable, a special procedure is required to prevent the communication
failure. Please contact Yokogawa’s sales agents for details.

SEE
ALSO For more information about PROFIBUS-DP, refer to:
4, “PROFIBUS-DP (ALP121)” in the Communication with PROFIBUS systems (IM 33K03P10-50E)

<B3.6 Signal Cable Connection to I/O Module with Built-in Barrier> B3-71
B3.6 Signal Cable Connection to I/O Module

with Built-in Barrier
A drawing and a table for describing the wiring of the I/O module with built-in barrier and the
I/O channels numbers are shown as follows.
The I/O module with built-in barrier can be connected only with the pressure clamp terminals.
n Cautions Regarding to I/O Module with Built-in Barrier
CAUTION
Before pulling out modules or doing the similar maintenance works in the hazardous areas
(Zone 2), it is necessary to confirm that explosive gases are not presented in the ambient at-
mosphere. Moreover, the maintenance work must be performed by the professional personals
who have been educated and trained with the knowledge of explosive products and skill of
explosive prevention.

B3.6.1 Installation of Isolating Partition

When applying the intrinsically safe I/O modules to the Field Control Unit or Node Unit, the
isolating partition needs to be installed between the intrinsically safe I/O modules and non-in-
trinsically safe modules (Power Supply Modules, Processor Modules, Bus Interface Modules
and so forth) to isolate the two areas.
n Installing Isolating Partition to Field Control Unit (Models: AFF50S/

AFF50D, AFV10S/AFV10D, AFV30S/AFV30D)
The component number of the Isolating Partition Kit is T9083ND.
An Isolating Partition Kit consists of the following parts:
• Partition A: For isolating the areas of intrinsically safe I/O modules and non-intrinsically
safe modules.
• Partition B: For isolating the cables of intrinsically safe I/O modules and V net.
• Mounting Screws: Two pieces for fixing Partition B.
How to install the isolating partition is illustrated in the following figure.
1. Put the Partition B on the cable tray, and use the two mounting screws to fix it.
2. Insert the Partition A to the slot in between the areas of intrinsically safe I/O modules and
non intrinsically safe modules (One slot will be occupied).
3. Make sure that the cables of the I/O modules in the intrinsic safe area and the cables of
the modules in the non-intrinsic safe area are completely isolated by the isolating partition
kit.
Isolating Partition inserted
The modules in the
Field Control Unit non-intrinsic safe area
I/O modules in the

intrinsic safe area
Isolating partition
Isolating partition B
Isolating partition B mounting screw Isolating partition A
Figure B3.6.1-1 Installation of Isolating Partition (Field Control Unit)
n Isolating Partition to Node Unit (Models: ANB10S/ANB10D, ANR10S/

ANR10D, ANB11S/ANB11D)
The component number of the Isolating Partition is T9083NA.
This component is for isolating the intrinsically safe I/O modules and non-intrinsically safe
modules.

How to install the isolating partition is illustrated in the following figure.
Insert the isolating partition T9083NA to the slot in between the areas of intrinsically safe I/O
modules and non-intrinsically safe modules (One slot will be occupied).
And then, make sure that the cables of the I/O modules in the intrinsic safe area and the ca-
bles of the modules in the non-intrinsic safe area are completely isolated by the isolating parti-
tion.
Isolating Partition inserted
The modules in the
non-intrinsic safe area
Node Unit
I/O modules in the

intrinsic safe area
Isolating partition
Isolating partition
Figure B3.6.1-2 Installation of Isolating Partition (Node Unit)

B3.6.2 Cautions Regarding to Maintenance of I/O Module

with Built-in Barrier
The following procedure should be observed when maintaining the I/O modules with built-in
barriers.The LED displays are explained in the following style.
• LED= [STATUS, ---, ---] only the STATUS lamp is lit.
• LED= [STATUS, ACT, DX] all lamps are lit.
n Replacing Modules
l If the module to be replaced is not in dual-redundant configuration
1. Remove the terminal block of the module.
2. Loosen the screws that fixing the module, then pull out the module.
3. Install a new module, then tighten the screws to fix the module.
4. Restore the terminal block to the module.
l If the module to be replaced is in dual-redundant configuration and

standing by
1. Remove the terminal block of the module.
4. Confirm that the LED status is LED=[STATUS,---,DX].
5. Restore the terminal block to the module.
l If the module to be replaced is in dual-redundant configuration and

running
In order to replace a module running in dual-redundant configuration, it is necessary to switch
the module’s control right and to make the module into standing by status. Thus, the replace-
ment is performed with the following steps.
Step 1. : Switch the control right to the dual-redundantly configure module. (As described in
the later section of "■ Switching control right of dual-redundantly configured modules”)
Step 2. : Replace the module in the same procedure of replacing a standby module. (As de-
scribed in this section "● If the module to be replaced is in dual-redundant configuration and
standing by" )
TIP For the module in dual-redundant configuration and running in control side, if the connection with the field de-
vices is severed, the input of process variables becomes IOP status and the control loop may move to Man
mode. Nevertheless, the IOP occurrence varies with the IOM settings, any of the following conditions exists,
the IOP occurs.
• If pulling out the terminal block connector by pulling out the upper part first.
• If the module is set with 50 ms high-speed scan.
n Switching control right of dual-redundantly configured modules

There are two ways to switch control right from the running module to the standby module. It
is recommended to use the method a. when switching modules’ control right.
a. Perform IOM Download to the Running Module on HIS.

On FCS status display view of HIS, choose the module (which is running) then start IOM
load.
b. Pulling Out the Running Module from Backboard
IMPORTANT
Do not remove the terminal block if the module is running. Otherwise, the IOP may occur and
the related control loops may move to MAN mode. The above steps for switching control right
do not trigger IOP occurrence though the PV may suffer a certain fluctuation. The PV fluctua-
tion affected by switching control right varies with the type of the modules.
When switching modules’ control right by the method b, please operate the following.
1. Confirm that the LED status of the running module is LED= [STATUS, ACT, DX]
2. Confirm that the LED status of the adjacent standby module is LED= [STATUS, ---, DX]
3. Loosen the screws that fixing the running module, then pull out the module.
4. Confirm that the LED status of the adjacent module changes to LED= [STATUS, ACT,
DX].
5. Push the pulled out module back to connect to the backboard and tight the screws to fix
the module.
6. Confirm that the LED status of the module is LED= [STATUS, ---, DX]
n Cautions Regarding to Terminal Block Connector of I/O Modules

with Built-in Barriers
When connecting the connector of terminal block to the I/O modules, the following points
need to be noted.
• It is necessary to plug in and pull out the connector promptly so as to avoid the connector
is tilted and halfway connected.
• When the terminal block is removed from the I/O module, the connector pins of the I/O
module should be intact.
• If the connector is halfway plugged for more than one second, or if the pins of the discon-
nected connector are touched, the diagnosis circuits and the safety protection circuits
may treat this circumstance as a dangerous abnormality so as to shutoff the power supply
to the module. Thus the module failure will occur.
• When the module failure occurs, the LED lamp [STATUS] turns off. Under this situation, it
is necessary to remove the module from the backboard, and put it back after two or more
seconds.
n Cautions on Removing I/O Modules with Built-in Barriers from

Backboard
When removing the I/O modules from the backboard, and then install it to the backboard
again, the following points need to be noted.
1. When the I/O module is removed from the backboard, at least two-seconds wait-time is
required to installing the module back to the backboard. If the I/O module is in a dual-re-
dundant configuration, at least five-seconds wait-time is required. And whether the mod-
ule function switches to the standby module also needs to be confirmed before installing
the removed module to the backboard.

2. When the module is revoked from the backboard for a while, the diagnosis circuits and
the safety protection circuits may treat this circumstance as a dangerous abnormality so
as to shutoff the power supply to the module. Thus the module failure will occur. However,
the standby module in dual-redundant configuration will not fail.
3. When the module failure occurs, the LED lamp [STATUS] turns off. Under this situation, it
is necessary to remove the module from the backboard, and put it back after two or more
seconds.
n Cautions on Using I/O Modules with Built-in Barriers

The FIO current output modules with built-in barriers are designed with the safety concept
that when the over-current or the over-voltage occurs in the external circuits, the I/O modules
will be forced to failure state to guarantee the safety. The I/O modules are forced to failure
state under the following circumstances:
1. Forced to Failure State by Current/Voltage Limiter
For ASI533, ASD533 and ASI133, when the output encounters abnormalities due to the
over-current or over-voltage caused by the internal error of the module or the short-circuit
of the wiring, the current/voltage limiter circuit in the module becomes active to stop the
output, the module will be forced to the failure state. This feature is necessary for satisfy-
ing the standards of intrinsically safety and explosion protection.
2. Forced to Failure State by Read-back
Read-back is one of the diagnostic capabilities of the I/O modules. Read-back function of
ASI533 and ASD533 can detect the following abnormalities:
• Internal errors regarding the output in the module circuits;
• Abnormalities of the terminals and the field wirings.
(Short circuits among the channels or between the multi-points and earth terminal)
For explosion protection, the intrinsically safety circuits must be prevented from the errors
caused by incorrect wirings, damaged cables or short circuits. For the FIO modules with
the built-in barriers, if a read-back error is found, it does not only indicate the abnormali-
ties occurred in the module but also indicate that the abnormalities may have occurred in
the field wirings that weakened the intrinsically safety and explosion protection capabili-
ties. Thus the module will be forced to the failure state so as to prevent the possible acci-
dent that may result to an explosion.
For the above purpose, the read-back capability of the FIO modules will be set to ON by
default.
When a module is forced to failure state, take care of the following cautions:
1. For Non-Redundantly Configured Module
Replace the failed module with a new one. If the module starts working normally, it indi-
cates that the error was caused by module’s abnormality. Otherwise, if the new module
becomes failure state, it indicates that the failure was caused by other abnormalities such
as wiring short circuits. In this case, a thorough check should be preformed to the con-
nection terminals and field wirings so as to guarantee the intrinsically safety circuits for
explosion protection.
2. For Redundantly Configured Modules
If an active module fails and the activities are transferred to the standby module, the I/O
loop is working properly; it indicates that the problem is caused by the internal error of the
module. Replacing the abnormal module will solve the problem.
However, if both modules become failure state after transferring activities to the standby
module, it indicates that the problem may have occurred in the common circuits such as
the terminals used by both modules as well as the field wirings (for an example, the short-
circuit occurs between the channels). In this case, a thorough check should be performed
to the connection terminals and field wirings so as to guarantee the intrinsically safety cir-
cuits for explosion protection.

For detailed information about the procedure for specific channels that caused the abnor-
malities, please contact Yokogawa agents.
Before replacing the modules or doing similar maintenance works in the hazardous area
(Zone 2), it is necessary to turn off the power supply and to confirm that the explosive
gases are not present in the ambient atmosphere. Moreover, the maintenance works
must be performed by the personals who have been educated and trained with the knowl-
edge of explosive products and skill of explosive prevention.
SEE
ALSO For more information about read-back capability, refer to:
“● FIO Analog Input/Output : FFCS series/KFCS2/KFCS” of “■ Categories of I/O Modules : FFCS series/
KFCS2/KFCS” of A3.4, “Configuring Process I/O of FFCS series, KFCS2 and KFCS” in the Field Control
Stations Reference (IM 33K03E10-50E)

B3.6.3 Combinations of Input/Output Module and Terminal

Block
There are various methods for connecting cables to I/O modules, such as single/dual-redun-
dant operation, isolated/non-isolated, and directly coupled/via a terminal board. In each case,
it is possible to combine an I/O module with adapters or terminal blocks according to the pur-
pose.
The table below lists the model names of the different combinations of I/O modules and termi-
nal blocks that can be used.
n Analog and Digital I/O Modules with Built-In Barrier

Table B3.6.3-1 I/O Modules with Built-In Barrier and Terminal Block
Model Name
Single Dual-redundant
– Analog I/O Module
ASI133 8-channel, 4 to 20 mA input, Isolated ATSA3S ATSA3D
ASI133-H 8-channel, 4 to 20 mA input, Isolated ATSA3S ATSA3D
with HART communication function
ASI533 8-channel, 4 to 20 mA output, Isolated ATSS3S ATSS3D
ASI533-H 8-channel, 4 to 20 mA output, Isolated ATSS3S ATSS3D
with HART communication function
AST143 16-channel, TC/mV input, Isolated ATST4S ATST4D
ASR133 16-channel, RTD/POT input, Isolated ATSR3S ATSR3D
– Digital I/O Module
ASD143 16-channel, NAMUR compatible, Isolated ATSB4S ATSB4D
ASD533 8-channel, 12 V at I=45 mA, output, Isolated ATSD3S ATSD3D

B3.6.4 I/O Modules with Built-in Barriers (Models: ASI133,

ASI533, AST143, ASR133, ASD143 and ASD533)
n Signal Wiring to I/O Module

Vary with the model of analog input modules and vary with devices connected, the terminals
for connecting the signal cables are different. Refer to the following table and connect the ca-
ble to the proper terminals.
Table B3.6.4-1 Input Terminal Types for Analog Input Modules

Model
Signal Name I/O Signal
Name
ASI133 IN□.1 2-wire transmitter input + – –
IN□.2 2-wire transmitter input - Current input +
GND – Current input -
ASR133 IN□.1 2-wire RTD/POT input a+ 3-wire RTD/POT input a+ 4-wire RTD/POT input a+
IN□.2 – – 4-wire RTD/POT input a
IN□.3 – 3-wire RTD/POT input b 4-wire RTD/POT input b
IN□.4 2-wire RTD/POT input b- 3-wire RTD/POT input b- 4-wire RTD/POT input b-
n Analog Input Module, 8-Channel (Model: ASI133)

CH No. Signal Terminal No. Signal
IN1.1 A1 B1 IN1.2
CH1
N.C. A2 B2 GND
IN2.1 A3 B3 IN2.2
CH2
N.C. A4 B4 GND
IN3.1 A5 B5 IN3.2 Input Terminal Types for ASI133
N.C. A6 B6 GND I/O signal connection
Signal name 2 wire 4 wire
IN4.1 A7 B7 IN4.2
CH4 passive active
N.C. A8 B8 GND
IN n.1 Input +
N.C. A9 B9 N.C. IN n.2 Input - Input +
IN5.1 A10 B10 IN5.2 GND Input -
CH5
N.C. A11 B11 GND n:channel number
IN6.1 A12 B12 IN6.2
CH6
N.C. A13 B13 GND
IN7.1 A14 B14 IN7.2
N.C. A15 B15 GND
IN8.1 A16 B16 IN8.2
CH8 N.C.: No Connection
N.C. A17 B17 GND
N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
Figure B3.6.4-1 ASI133 External Connection

n Analog Output Module, 8-Channel (Model: ASI533)


CH1 OUT1+ A1 B1 OUT1-
N.C. A2 B2 N.C.
N.C. A4 B4 N.C.
N.C. A6 B6 N.C.
N.C. A8 B8 N.C.
N.C. A9 B9 N.C.
N.C. A11 B11 N.C.
N.C. A13 B13 N.C.
N.C. A15 B15 N.C.
N.C.: No Connection
N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
Figure B3.6.4-2 ASI533 External Connection
n Thermocouple/mV Input Module, 16-Channel (Model: AST143)


CH1 IN1+ A1 B1 IN1- • Do not install a device that generates heat directly under the
CH2 node unit on which the thermocouple module is installed.
IN2+ A2 B2 IN2- • Do not install the module in a place directly facing air flow from
CH3 IN3+ A3 B3 IN3- a ventilation fan.
CH4 • Do not install the module next to a bus interface module.
IN4+ A4 B4 IN4-
• Do not install a module that generates 3W or more of heat next to
N.C. A5 B5 N.C. the thermocouple module.
CH5 If this cannot be avoided, they should be kept at least one slot apart.
IN5+ A6 B6 IN5-
• Thermocouples or compensation conducting wires connected to
CH6 IN6+ A7 B7 IN6- a pressure clamp terminal block must satisfy the following
CH7 IN7+ A8 B8 IN7- requirements:
CH8 •The wire diameter must be 1.25 mm2 or less. The same wire
IN8+ A9 B9 IN8- diameter must be used for all connections in one terminal block.
CH9 IN9+ A10 B10 IN9- •They must be connected in the order from CH1 without leaving
CH10 any space.
IN10+ A11 B11 IN10-
CH11 IN11+ A12 B12 IN11-
CH12 IN12+ A13 B13 IN12-
N.C. A14 B14 N.C. * RJC is built into the pressure clamp terminal
CH13 IN13+ A15 B15 IN13-
CH14 IN14+ A16 B16 IN14-
N.C.: No Connection
CH15 IN15+ A17 B17 IN15-
CH16 IN16+ A18 B18 IN16-
Figure B3.6.4-3 AST143 External Connection

l Cautions Regarding to Wiring of AST143 Field Cable

To fulfill the requirements of EMC according to IEC 61000, it is necessary to use screened
cable. (shielded multicore cable with one shield for all channels is sufficient).
l Cautions Regarding to the Thermocouples Connected to AST143

The thermocouples connected to AST143 must be ungrounded type. If you desire to use the
grounded type thermocouples, you need to consult to Yokogawa agents for advices.
n RTD/POT Input Module, 8-Channel (Model: ASR133)

IN1.1 A1 B1 IN1.2
CH1 IN1.3 A2 B2 IN1.4
IN2.1 A3 B3 IN2.2
CH2 IN2.3 A4 B4 IN2.4 Input Terminal Types for ASR133
N.C. A5 B5 N.C. I/O signal connection
Signal name
IN3.1 A6 B6 IN3.2 2 wire 3 wire 4 wire
CH3 IN n.1 Input a+ Input a+ Input a+
IN3.3 A7 B7 IN3.4
IN n.2 - - Input a
IN4.1 A8 B8 IN4.2
IN n.3 - Input b Input b
CH4 IN4.3 A9 B9 IN4.4 IN n.4 Input b- Input b- Input b-
IN5.1 A10 B10 IN5.2 n:channel number
CH5 IN5.3 A11 B11 IN5.4
IN6.1 A12 B12 IN6.2
CH6 IN6.3 A13 B13 IN6.4
N.C. A14 B14 N.C.
IN7.1 A15 B15 IN7.2
CH7 IN7.3 A16 B16 IN7.4
N.C.: No Connection
IN8.1 A17 B17 IN8.2
CH8 IN8.3 A18 B18 IN8.4
Figure B3.6.4-4 ASR133 External Connection
l Cautions Regarding to Wiring of ASR133 Field Cable

To fulfill the requirements of EMC according to IEC 61000, it is necessary to use screened
cable. (shielded multicore cable with one shield for all channels is sufficient).

n Digital Input Module, 16-Channel (Model: ASD143)


CH1 IN1+ A1 B1 IN1-
CH2 IN2+ A2 B2 IN2-
CH3 IN3+ A3 B3 IN3-
CH4 IN4+ A4 B4 IN4-
N.C. A5 B5 N.C.
CH5 IN5+ A6 B6 IN5-
CH6 IN6+ A7 B7 IN6-
CH7 IN7+ A8 B8 IN7-
CH8 IN8+ A9 B9 IN8-
CH9 IN9+ A10 B10 IN9-
CH10 IN10+ A11 B11 IN10-
CH11 IN11+ A12 B12 IN11-
CH12 IN12+ A13 B13 IN12-
N.C. A14 B14 N.C.
CH13 IN13+ A15 B15 IN13-
CH14 IN14+ A16 B16 IN14-
N.C.: No Connection
CH15 IN15+ A17 B17 IN15-
CH16 IN16+ A18 B18 IN16-
Figure B3.6.4-5 ASD143 External Connection
n Digital Output Module, 16-Channel (Model: ASD533)


N.C. A2 B2 N.C.
N.C. A4 B4 N.C.
N.C. A6 B6 N.C.
N.C. A8 B8 N.C.
N.C. A9 B9 N.C.
N.C. A11 B11 N.C.
N.C. A13 B13 N.C.
N.C. A15 B15 N.C.
N.C.: No Connection
N.C. A17 B17 N.C.
N.C. A18 B18 N.C.
Figure B3.6.4-6 ASD533 External Connection

<B4. Maintenance of Input & Output Devices (For FIO)> B4-1
B4. Maintenance of Input & Output

Devices (For FIO)
This chapter explains how to perform routine maintenance of input/output devices, as well as
how to remove/install node units and I/O modules.
CAUTION
this manual.

<B4.1 Routine Maintenance of Input/Output Devices> B4-2
B4.1 Routine Maintenance of Input/Output

Devices
There are two ways of inspecting input/output devices. The status of whether the I/O module
status display LEDs are turned on or off, can be checked visually, or the system status can be
checked in the KFCS status display view.
n Precautions against Static Electricity

When performing maintenance work, the following items should be observed to prevent elec-
trostatic interference.
• When storing or carrying maintenance parts, be sure to enclose them in an antistatic bag.
(For shipment these parts are enclosed in an antistatic bag labeled with precautions
against electrostatic charge.)
• During maintenance work use a wrist strap with a ground wire via a grounding resistance
of 1 M ohm. Be sure to ground the wrist strap.
• When performing maintenance work on a desk or a table, place a conductivity sheet
grounded via a grounding resistance of 1 M ohm. The maintenance person must wear a
wrist strap while performing maintenance work. Take any plastic and other materials that
can easily be charged away from the work area.
• Exercise caution so as not to touch any of the maintenance parts while the wrist strap
and a conductivity sheet are not being used.
Wrist strap Conductive sheet
1 M ohm
1 M ohm
Grounding resistance
of 1 M ohm
Wrist strap
When working with a card or a unit that include battery

on a conductive sheet, set the BATTERY ON/OFF
Connect the wrist strap to the earth terminal switch to the OFF position or remove the battery.
or unpainted part of the frame (grounded).
Figure B4.1-1 Example of Using a Wrist Strap and Conductive Sheet
The wrist strap and conductive sheet are available from Yokogawa’s sales agents.

B4.1.1 Inspection by Status Display LEDs

This section explains how to inspect I/O modules and common sections of input/output devi-
ces.
n Inspection of LEDs
I/O modules, bus interface modules, and power supply modules have status display LEDs. It
can easily be identified whether or not a module is operating normally by checking whether
these LEDs are turned on or off.
Table B4.1.1-1 Types and Functions of Status Display LEDs of Common Modules and Input/Output
Modules
Modules name Indicator Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
Power supply SYS +5 V output normal +5 V output abnormal
module
FLD +24 V output normal +24 V output abnormal
ESB bus STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
interface
slave SEL During data transmission to I/O mod- No transmission
module ule
RSP During data reception from I/O module No reception
ER Bus STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
interface
master ACT Module is operating normally The module is stand-by
module DX Module is set to dual-redundant oper- Module is set to single operation
ation
RCV-1 Receiving data Data is not received
SND-1 Sending data Data is not sent
ER Bus STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
interface
slave SND Sending data Data is not sent
module RCV Receiving data Data is not received
I/O STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
module
ACT Performing input/output Input/output operation is stopped
DX Dual-redundant operation Non dual-redundant operation
Optical STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
ESB Bus
Repeater RCV Receiving ESB bus frame Not Receiving
Master Module SND Sending ESB bus frame Not Sending
OPT RCV Receiving optical frame Not Receiving
OPT SND Sending optical frame Not Sending
NODE When control unit or node unit ANT10U is installed
is in stalled DIP switch: 0

Modules name Indicator Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
Optical STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
ESB Bus
Repeater ESB RCV Receiving ESB bus frame Not Receiving
Slave Module ESB SND Sending ESB bus frame Not Sending
OPT RCV Receiving optical frame Not Receiving
OPT SND Sending optical frame Not Sending
NODE When control unit or node unit ANT10U is installed
is in stalled DIP switch: 0
SEL Receiving ESB bus frames Not Receiving
to the host node.
RSP Sending data from the host I/O mod- Not Sending
ule
ADRS Setting nest address All DIP switches are set to 0s.
PARITY Setting parity DIP switch is set to 0s.
Table B4.1.1-2 Functions of Status Display LEDs of Ethernet Communication Module

Module name Indicator Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
Ethernet Communication STATUS The hardware is working nor- The hardware is faulty
module mally
ALE111
ACT Module is operating normally The module is stand-by
DX Dual-redundant operation Single operation/Dual-redun-
dant operation abnormal
RCV Receiving data Standby status
SND Sending data Standby status
LINK Link established Link not established
Table B4.1.1-3 Types and Functions of Status Display LEDs of Communication Modules
Serial Communication STATUS The hardware is working nor- The hardware is faulty.
module mally.
ALR111
ALR121 ACT Module is operating normally The module is stand-by
RCV1 Receiving RS1. Standby status
SND1 Sending RS1. Standby status
RCV2 Receiving RS2. Standby status
SND2 Sending RS2. Standby status

FOUNDATION fieldbus STATUS The hardware is working nor- The hardware is faulty.
Communication module mally.
ALF111
ACT Module is operating normally The module is stand-by
RCV1 Receiving H1 1. Standby status
SND1 Sending H1 1. Standby status
Table B4.1.1-4 Types and Functions of Status Display LEDs of Communication Modules
PROFIBUS-DP STATUS The hardware is working The hardware is faulty.
communication module normally.
ALP111
ALP121 ACT Controlling status Standby status
DX The module is set to du- The module is set to sin-
al-redundant operation. gle operation.
RUN Operating normal Otherwise
ALP111 COM Any one of the defined No device is communi-
slave devices is commu- cating.
nicating.
ALP121 COM All of the defined slave Any one of the devices is
devices is communicat- not communicating.
ing.
n Notice on I/O Module LED Indication

When disconnecting the front connector of the module, the LED (STATUS) will not react to in-
dicate the phenomenon. If the module is redundantly configured, the module will be switched
to standby position and the other module will takeover.
On the builder, whether to check the disconnection of the front connector can be specified. If
the module is put into redundant configuration, the option for checking the disconnection of
front connector will become default setting. Under this circumstance, the module will act as
follows. In order to switch the module to standby when its front connector is disconnected, this
option needs to be checked for redundantly configured module.
Table B4.1.1-5 Action by Default When Front Connector Disconnected

Module Setting LED Act by Default (*1)
Check Front Con- STATUS,ACT,DX Takeover
Redundancy nector Connec-
tion Connected Disconnected
Non-redundant No (Default) ●●○ ●●○ —

Redundant Yes (Default) Control ●●● ●○● Switching
Standby ●○● ●●●
*1: LED indication statuses
○:ON

●:OFF
When the default setting is changed, the action changes as follows.
Table B4.1.1-6 Action Other Than Default When Front Connector Disconnected
Module Setting LED Act by Default (*1)
Check Front Con- STATUS,ACT,DX Takeover
Redundancy nector Connec-
tion Connected Disconnected
Non-redundant Yes ●●○ ●●○ IOM Fail

Redundant No Control ●●● ●●● No Switching
Standby ●○● ●○●
*1: LED indication statuses
○:ON
●:OFF
When the front connector is disconnected, the module becomes FAIL status. When the con-
nector is connected again, the module will recover from the FAIL status right away, no need to
reset the module by pulling it out and pushing it back.

B4.1.2 Inspection by KFCS Status Display View

The KFCS status display view can be displayed from the System Status Overview of a Hu-
man Interface Station (HIS). It is possible to check the operation status of a control station,
the status of the I/O modules, and the status of the communication buses in the network via
the KFCS status display view.
It is recommended to check this window periodically, not only when troubles occur, to inspect
the operation status of each station.
The figure below shows an example of a KFCS status display view.
.SF FCS0101 FCS Status Display

FCS
FCS
IOM
MYPJT Domain : 01 V net1 V net2

FCS0101 MAN L R
: 1 Stand-By
Station No
Control
Type : AFG30D Hard Ready
Maintenance
PSU
SB301
CPU
CPU
SB301
PSU
Revision : R5.01.00
Generation :
09/22/2011 13 : 29
CPU Idle Time : 34Sec

Comm Load Ave : 0%
Cur : 0%
Test Mode : OFF
ControlStatus : RUN
1 2
Comm I/O : ON 1 2 3 4 5 RMT 6 7 8

COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
TEMP
TEMP
Air in
I/O FAIL
Air out
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Battery ( L, R ) COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
FAN PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
FCU ( N1, N2 )
Door (1, 2, 3, 4)
Battery ( L, R )
READY
Figure B4.1.2-1 KFCS Status Display view

B4.1.3 Inspection by FFCS-V Status Display View

The FFCS-V status display view can be displayed from the System Status Overview of a Hu-
manInterface Station (HIS). It is possible to check the operation status of a control station, the
status of the I/O modules, and the status of the communication buses in the network via the
FFCS-V status display view.
It is recommended to check this window periodically, not only when troubles occur, to inspect
the operation status of each station.
The figure below shows an example of FFCS-V status display view.
.SF FCS0101 Station Status Display

FCS
FCS
IOM
MYPJT Domain : 01 Vnet/IP1 Vnet/IP2

FCS0101 MAN
Stand-By
Station No :1
Control
Type : AFV40D Hard Ready
CPU Maintenance
CPU
PSU
PSU
Revision : R5.01.00
Generation :
09/22/2011 8:30
01
CPU Idle Time : 58sec PSU PSU 1

Comm Load Ave : 0% 2
Cur : 0%
Test Mode : OFF 1 2
ControlStatus : RUN
02 03 04 05 06 07 08
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
Comm I/O : ON PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
TEMP
09 10 11 12 13 14
CPU ( L, R )
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
FCU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
Battery ( L, R )
Battery ( L, R )
HKURDY ( L, R )
1 CPU_CB 2 NODE_CB 3 TB_CB 4 TB_CB 5 NODE_CB 6 TB_CB 7 TB_CB 8 CB0201 9 NODE_CB

HKBus HKBus HKBus HKBus HKBus HKBus HKBus HKBus HKBus
TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP TEMP
FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN
PSU R PSU R PSU R PSU R PSU R PSU R PSU R PSU R PSU R
PSU L PSU L PSU L PSU L PSU L PSU L PSU L PSU L PSU L
TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R TB_PSU R
TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L TB_PSU L
Ready
Figure B4.1.3-1 FFCS-V Status Display View (with a cabinet)

<B4.2 Replacing Common Modules> B4-9
B4.2 Replacing Common Modules

This section explains how to remove/install power supply modules and bus interface modules.
Dual-redundant power supply modules and bus interface modules can be removed or instal-
led without turning off the power supply of a node unit.
IMPORTANT
If ESB buses or ER buses are in dual-redundant configuration, the power supply modules and
bus interface modules are provided for both segments. When replacing the modules, remove
the modules of one segment and install a new on first. Only when the segment is correctly
running, then to remove and install the modules of the other segment.

B4.2.1 Exchange Bus Cables

Check the hardware status on FCS status display view.
The procedures for KFCS/KFCS2 is different from the procedure for Vnet/IP FFCS-L, FFCS-
V.
n Procedure of Exchanging ESB Bus Cables: KFCS/KFCS2

1. When exchanging a bus cable, the corresponding bus becomes abnormal. It is necessary
to confirm that the communication to all the nodes and I/O modules by the other bus is
properly performed.
2. Remove the ESB bus coupler unit (Model: AIP532) at the side where the bus cable is to
be exchanged.
3. Exchange the bus cables.
4. Put back the removed ESB bus coupler unit.
5. Confirm that all the related parts are running properly.
n Procedure of Exchanging ESB Bus Cables: FFCS-L, FFCS-V

1. When exchanging a bus cable, the corresponding bus becomes abnormal. It is necessary
to confirm that the communication to all the nodes and I/O modules by the other bus is
properly performed.
2. Remove the ESB bus coupler module (Model: EC401, EC402) at the side where the bus
cable is to be exchanged.
3. Exchange the bus cables.
4. Connect the new ESB bus cable to the ESB bus branch connector of the ESB bus cou-
pler module.
When twisting the ESB bus branch connector, the torque should be around 0.3 N•m.
5. Confirm that all the related parts are running properly.
n Procedure of Exchanging ER Bus Cables: KFCS/KFCS2, FFCS-L,

FFCS-V
1. Check on FCS status display view or the LED on EB401 module to confirm that the ER
bus to be exchanged is on the standby side. (When EB401 is standby, ACT is unlit.)
If the EB401 is in control, it is necessary to switch the control right to the other EB401.
2. Exchange the ER bus cable. When replacing an ER bus cable, all nodes on the ER bus
will be indicated as abnormal.
3. Then confirm that all the nodes on the bus are running properly.

B4.2.2 Replacing Power Supply Modules

Power supply modules can be replaced according to the procedure described below.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check that the status display LED of the power supply module to be removed is
turned off before removing the power supply module.
Remove the connector of the power supply cables from the power distribution unit and turn off
the power supply before removing the power supply module.
n Procedure for Removing Power Supply Modules

1. Shut off the power supply of the power supply module to be removed.
In the case of dual-redundant modules, shut off the power supply of the power supply
module on the side to be removed.
2. Remove the fixing screws of the power supply module. There is one screw located at the
upper part and two screws located at the bottom part.
3. Pull the power supply module forward and remove it from the base unit.
n Procedure for Installing Power Supply Modules
IMPORTANT
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws for fixing the power supply module. As a
guideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the power supply module following the above steps of the “Procedure for Removing
Power Supply Modules” in the reverse order.
1. Place the power supply module on the base unit.
2. Fix one screw at the upper part and two screws at the bottom part of the power supply
module.
3. Plug in the connector of the power supply cable of the module to the power distribution
unit to supply power.

B4.2.3 Replacing ESB Bus Interface Slave Module

ESB bus interface slave module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replaced
according to the procedure described below.
n Procedure for Removing ESB Bus Interface Slave Module

1. Remove the fixing screws of the ESB bus interface slave module. There is one screw lo-
cated at the upper part and another located at the bottom part.
2. Pull the ESB bus interface slave module forward and remove it from the base unit.
3. Remove the upper and lower part screws of the branch connector from the ESB bus in-
terface slave module.
4. Remove the ESB bus branch connector. But do not disconnect the ESB bus cable con-
nected to the branch connector.
n Procedure for Installing ESB Bus Interface Slave Module
IMPORTANT
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws for fixing the ESB bus interface slave module.
As a guideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the ESB bus interface slave module following the above steps of the “Procedure for
Removing ESB Bus Interface Slave Module” in the reverse order.
1. Set the ESB address of the ESB bus interface slave module to be installed to the same
address as the removed ESB bus interface slave module.
2. Install the Branch connector on the installed ESB bus interface slave module.
3. Fix the upper and lower part screws on the installed ESB bus branch connector.
4. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ESB bus interface slave module with your fingers
and place it on the base unit.
5. Fix one screw at the upper part and another at the bottom part of the ESB bus interface
slave module.

B4.2.4 Replacing ER Bus Interface Master Module

ER bus interface master module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replaced
according to the procedure described below.
n Procedure for Removing ER Bus Interface Master Module

1. Remove the communication cable of the ER bus interface master module to be removed.
Remove the insulating sheet and disconnect the T-type connector from the BNC connec-
tor of the ER bus interface master module. At this point, do not remove the cables and
terminal resistor connected to the T-type connector.
2. Remove the fixing screws of the ER bus interface master module. There is one screw lo-
cated at the upper part and another located at the bottom part.
3. Pull the ER bus interface master module forward and remove it from the base unit.
n Procedure for Installing ER Bus Interface Master Module
IMPORTANT
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws for fixing the ER bus interface master module.
Install the ER bus interface master module following the above steps of the “Procedure for
Removing ER Bus Interface Master Module” in the reverse order.
1. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ER bus interface master module with your fingers
2. Fix one screw at the upper part and another at the bottom part of the ER bus interface
master module.
3. Connect the communication cable to the installed ER bus interface master module.
4. Install the insulating sheet.

B4.2.5 Replacing ER Bus Interface Slave Module

ER bus interface slave module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replaced ac-
cording to the procedure described below.
n Procedure for Removing ER Bus Interface Slave Module

1. Remove the communication cable of the ER bus interface slave module to be removed.
Remove the insulating sheet and disconnect the T-type connector from the BNC connec-
tor of the ER bus interface slave module. At this point, do not remove the cables and ter-
minal resistor connected to the T-type connector.
2. Remove the fixing screws of the ER bus interface slave module. There is one screw loca-
ted at the upper part and another located at the bottom part.
3. Pull the ER bus interface slave module forward and remove it from the base unit.
n Procedure for Installing ER Bus Interface Slave Module
IMPORTANT
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws for fixing the ER bus interface slave module.
Install the ER bus interface slave module following the above steps of the “Procedure for Re-
moving ER Bus Interface Slave Module” in the reverse order.
1. Set the address setting switch of the ER bus interface slave module to be installed to the
same address as the removed ER bus interface slave module.
The ER bus interface slave module are working with the settings remembered when the
power supplied to the module. Thus, when the settings are changed while the module are
installed in base unit and with power supply on, the changed settings become valid after
the restart the power supply once.
2. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ER bus interface slave module with your fingers
3. Fix one screw at the upper part and another at the bottom part of the ER bus interface
slave module.
4. Connect the communication cable to the installed ER bus interface slave module.
5. Install the insulating sheet.

B4.2.6 Replacing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module

(Model: ANT401, ANT411)
Replace Optical ESB bus repeater master module according to the following procedure.
n Procedure for Removing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module

1. Remove the fiber-optic cable connected from the optical ESB bus repeater master mod-
ule. Cap the cable to prevent dust infiltration.
2. Pull the optical ESB bus repeater master module forward and remove it from the base
unit.
3. Remove the connector unit for ESB bus. But do not disconnect the ESB bus cable con-
nected.
n Procedure for Installing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module
IMPORTANT
Use a phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws for fixing the optical ESB bus repeater master
module. As a guideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the optical ESB bus repeater master module following the steps of the “Procedure for
Removing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module” in the reverse order.
1. Screw the connector unit for ESB bus to the optical ESB bus repeater master module.
2. Install the optical ESB bus repeater master module into the base unit.
3. Uncap the fiber-optic cable and connect it to the optical ESB bus repeater master mod-
ule.
The fiber-optic cable has an IN end and an OUT end. Be sure you connect the correct
end.
4. Confirm on HIS that there is not error message from the diagnostic information.

B4.2.7 Replacing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module

(Model: ANT502, ANT512)
Replace Optical ESB bus repeater slave module according to the following procedure.
n Procedure for Removing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module

1. Remove the fiber-optic cable connected from the optical ESB bus repeater slave module.
Cap the cable to prevent dust infiltration.
2. If the HK cable is connected, you need to disconnect the HK cable.
3. Pull the optical ESB bus repeater slave module forward and remove it from the base unit.
4. Remove the connector unit for ESB bus. But do not disconnect the ESB bus cable con-
nected to the connector unit for ESB bus.
n Procedure for Installing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module
IMPORTANT
Use a phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws for fixing the optical ESB bus repeater slave
module. As a guideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the optical ESB bus repeater slave module following the steps of the “Procedure for
Removing Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module” in the reverse order.
1. Screw the connector unit for ESB bus to the optical ESB bus repeater slave module.
2. Install the optical ESB bus repeater slave module into the base unit.
3. If HKU is used, you need to connect the HK cable.
4. Uncap the fiber-optic cable and connect it to the optical ESB bus repeater slave module.
The fiber-optic cable has an IN end and an OUT end. Be sure you connect the correct
end.
5. Confirm on HIS that there is not error message from the diagnostic information.

<B4.3 Replacing Input/Output Modules> B4-17
B4.3 Replacing Input/Output Modules

In this section, installation and maintenance as well as replacement of the I/O modules of FIO
series are explained.

B4.3.1 Notices on Maintenance of FIO Series I/O Modules

Notices on maintenance of FIO series I/O modules are explained in this section. LED indica-
tions are explained as follows:
LED=[STATUS,---,---] only the STATUS lamp is lit.
LED=[STATUS,ACT,DX] all lamps are lit.
n Replacing Modules
SEE
B4.3.3, “How to Replace Input/Output Modules” on page B4-21
l Replacing a Module of not in Dual-Redundant Configuration

1. Remove the front signal cable. If the pressure clamp terminal block is used, remove the
terminal block.
2. Loosen the screws fixing the module, then pull out the module.
4. Restore the front signal cable or the terminal block.
l Replacing the Standby Module of a Pair of Dual-Redundantly Configured

Modules
1. Remove the front signal cable. If the pressure clamp terminal block is used, remove the
terminal block.
4. Confirm that the LED status is LED= [STATUS, ---, DX]
5. Restore the front signal cable or the terminal block.
l Replacing the Controlling Module of a Pair of Dual-Redundantly

Configured Modules
It is necessary to switch the control right from the controlling module to the standby module
adjacent to it. Therefore, it is necessary to switch the controlling module to standby status.
Do as described in the later section of “■ Switching Control Right of Dual-Redundantly Config-
ure Modules” so as to switch the module to standby.
And then, do as described in the previous section of “● Replacing the Standby Module of a
Pair of Dual-Redundantly Configured Modules.”
TIP When the controlling module is disconnected from the field instruments, IOP may occur due to the drastic PV
changes and the control loops may turn to manual mode. IOP occurrence varies with IOP settings and the
way of disconnecting the cables. However, under any of the following circumstances, the IOP will definitely
occur.
• If the I/O module’s detecting cable disconnection is disabled.
• If pulling out the signal cable connector by pulling out the upper part first.
• If the module is set with 50 ms high-speed scan.

n Switching Control Right of Dual-Redundantly Configure Modules

There are two ways to switch control right from the controlling module to the standby module.
It is recommended to use the method 1. when switching modules’ control right.
1. Perform IOM download to the controlling module on HIS.
On FCS status display view of HIS, choose the module (which is running) then start IOM
load.
2. Confirm that the LED status of the adjacent standby module is LED= [STATUS, ---,DX].
Pull out the controlling module from the backboard
IMPORTANT
Do not remove signal cable or terminal block for switching control right. When signal cable or
terminal block of a controlling module is removed, IOP may occur and the control loop may
turn to manual mode. The above steps for switching control right do not trigger IOP occur-
rence though the PV may suffer a certain fluctuation. The PV fluctuation affected by switching
control right varies with the type of the modules.

B4.3.2 Notices about FIO Series Contact I/O Modules

Notices about FIO series contact I/O modules are explained in this section. The following pro-
cedure must be observed for safety purpose.
n Plug In and Plug Out the Connectors

l How to Plug In and Plug Out the Connectors
The connectors need to be plugged in or plugged out in a stipulated sequence.
To plug in or plug out the connectors or terminal blocks on ADV141, ADV142 and ADR541,
the sequences described in the following figure must be observed.
ADV141 or
ADV142 or
ADR541 Connector
1 2
AKB332/AKB333/AKB334
2 1
Plug-in Right Left Plug-out Left Right
AKB332/AKB333/AKB334
AEC4D
1 2 2 1
Plug-in Upper Lower Plug-out Lower Upper
Figure B4.3.2-1 Plug-In and Plug-Out Sequences

B4.3.3 How to Replace Input/Output Modules

This section explains how to install an I/O module on a node unit, as well as how to remove it
from the node unit. I/O modules can be removed and installed without turning off the power
supply of the node.
n Removing from and Installing on Base Units
Base unit
Screws
I/O module
Figure B4.3.3-1 Removing I/O Modules
l Removal Procedure
1. Remove the cables for external wiring and terminal block.
2. Remove the fixing screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the lower part
of the I/O module.
3. Pull the I/O module forward and remove it from the base unit.
1. Install the I/O module following the above steps of the “Removal Procedure” in the re-
verse order.
2. The tightening torque of the fixing screws should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
3. Install the cables for external wiring and terminal block.
n Procedures for Removing and Installing Connection Blocks

Remove the connector cover part of the external connection cable (if connecting via a MIL
connector) or the terminal block (if connecting via a pressure clamp terminal block) before re-
placing the I/O module.

I/O modules
Pressure clamp
terminal block
Screws
Connector cover
MIL connector
Figure B4.3.3-2 Removing Terminal Blocks
l Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fixing screws. There are two screws in the case of a terminal block or a MIL
connector cover.
2. Pull the terminal block forward and remove it from the I/O module.
1. Install the terminal block following the above steps of the “Removal Procedure” in the re-
verse order.
2. The tightening torque of the fixing screws should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
n Replacing Dual-Redundant Connection Input/Output Modules

Dual-redundant connection I/O modules must be connected to consecutive slots beginning
from an odd number.
l Removal and Installation Procedure

1. Check the LED displays of the pair of I/O modules in dual-redundant connection to see
that the STATUS and DX LEDs are lit for both modules and ACT is lit for only one of
them.
2. Remove the four screws at the upper and lower parts of the terminal block.
3. Remove the terminal block while supporting it so as not to apply too much stress to the
flat cable.
4. While supporting the terminal block, remove the connector connected to the I/O module
whose ACT LED is not lit.
5. Remove the two screws of the I/O module whose ACT LED is not lit, and replace it with
an adjusted I/O module. Fix the screws of the replaced I/O module.
6. Reinstall the flat cable connector.
7. Fix the screws of the terminal block.
8. Download the setting information to the replaced I/O module.

Flat cable
Duplexed pressure
clamp terminal block
I/O module
Figure B4.3.3-3 Connection of Dual-Redundant Connection Cables
In case the left ACT LED is not lit In case the right ACT LED is not lit
Figure B4.3.3-4 Removing Dual-Redundant Connection Cables
n Procedure for Replacing ALP121 Module
IMPORTANT
• Do not connect or disconnect the PROFIBUS-DP cable to ALP121 module while the
ALP121 module is running.
• When replacing the ALP121 module during maintenance, connecting or disconnecting
the cable to or from the ALP121 module should follow the procedures below.
l Removal Procedure
1. Remove the fixing screws at the upper part and the lower part of the ALP121 module
without disconnecting the PROFIBUS-DP cable from the ALP121 module.
2. Pull the ALP121 module forward and remove it from the base unit.
3. Disconnect the PROFIBUS-DP cable from the ALP121 module.
1. Connect the PROFIBUS-DP cable to the ALP121 module.
2. Install the ALP121 module to the base unit while the PROFIBUS-DP cable is connected.
3. Tighten the screws for fixing the ALP121 module to approximately 0.5 N·m torque.

n Cautions on Connecting PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master

When connecting the PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master such as a gateway unit to a PROFIBUS-
DP segment of ALP121, the procedures below should be followed.
l Procedure of Connecting PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master

1. The software in the PC where the PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master is resided should be
stopped so as to stop the communication.
2. Connect the PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master to the PROFIBUS-DP segment.
3. Start the software in the PC where the PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master is resided so as to
start the communication.
l Procedure of Disconnecting PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master

1. The software in the PC where the PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master is resided should be
stopped so as to stop the communication.
2. Disconnect the PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master from the PROFIBUS-DP segment.

<B4.4 Exchange Node> B4-25
B4.4 Exchange Node

Do the followings for exchanging a node
• Switch off the power supply of the node
• This can be done even the FCS is running
If this performed while the FCS is running (online), it is necessary to be very careful to carry
out the following procedures.
n Procedure of Exchanging ESB Bus Node Unit

1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O modules
on the FCS status display view.
2. Switch off the power supply of the node that to be exchanged.
3. Leave the ESB cable connected, then remove the branch connector from the SB401 for
ESB bus 1.
4. Confirm on the FCS status display view that there is no abnormality occurred other than
the node to be exchanged.
5. Leave the ESB cable connected, then remove the branch connector from the SB401 for
ESB bus 2.
6. Exchange the node. And confirm that the SB401 address is correct.
7. Connect branch connector to the new SB401.
8. Switch on the node power supply.
9. Confirm that the exchanged node is running properly on the FCS status display view.
n Procedure of Adding ESB Bus Node Unit

1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O modules
on the FCS status display view.
2. Set the new node address before switching on the node power supply. Make sure the ad-
dress setting is correct and not identical.
3. Connect the ESB bus to the node. At first, disconnect AIP532 of ESB bus 1 so that only
the bus is running. And confirm on the FCS status display view that all I/O modules and
their internal buses are running properly with only one side bus.
4. Connect the SB401 on the left side of the added node to ESB bus 1.
5. Connected the AIP532 into the nest.
6. Confirm on the FCS status display view that the ESB bus 1 is running properly.
7. Do the same to the ESB bus 2.
8. On “System View”, add a new node and configure the node.
9. Confirm on the FCS status display view that the newly configured node is running proper-
ly.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the “configure the node”, refer to:
2.5.1, “Creating a Node” in the Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM 33K03G21-50E)

<B4.4 Exchange Node> B4-26
n Procedure of Changing ER Bus Node Unit

1. On the FCS status display view, check the status of the nodes adjacent on both sides of
the node to be changed.
2. Switch off the power supply of the ER bus node unit that to be removed.
3. Leave the ER bus cable connected; then remove the branch connector from the EB501 of
ER bus 1.
4. Confirm on the FCS status display view that there is no other abnormality occurred be-
sides the ER bus node unit you just disconnected.
5. Leave the ER bus cable connected; then remove the branch connector from the EB501 of
ER bus 2.
6. Change the ER bus node unit. And confirm that the EB501 address is correctly set.
7. Connect branch connector you removed at the step 3 to the EB501 of the new ER bus
node unit.
8. Switch on the ER bus node unit power supply.
9. Confirm that the changed ER bus node unit is running properly on the FCS status display
view.
n Procedure of Adding a Remote Node

1. Make sure the power of the node unit to be added is off.
2. Set the addresses of the two EB501 modules that are in dual-redundant configuration.
For user-defined settings, EB501 RS ports and node numbers need to be set. The ad-
dresses for left and right sides are different.
3. At first, connect the standby side. Disconnect the ER bus and connect it to the EB501 of
the added remote node. Make sure that the left side and right side are not reversed.
4. Confirm on the FCS status display view that all nodes are running properly except the
newly added one.
5. Then connect the ER bus of the other side. Pull out the EB401 so as to switch the control
right. At this moment, the communication stops for two or three seconds.
6. Disconnect the ER bus of the newly standby side bus and connect it to EB501. Then con-
firm on FCS status display view that all nodes are running properly.
7. Switch on the added node power.
8. On “System View”, add a new node and configure the node.
9. Confirm on the FCS status display view that the newly configured node is running proper-
ly.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the node number setting, refer to:
B2.3.8, “ER Bus Interface Slave Module (Model: EB501)” on page B2-33

<B4.5 Parts Replacement> B4-27
B4.5 Parts Replacement

IMPORTANT
sults.

nance.
Table B4.5-1 Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans

Recommen-
Replacement
Part name Part number ded replace- Remarks
by user
ment cycle
At the ambient tempera-
Power supply module (100 - 120
PW481 8 years Yes ture(*1)of 40 deg. C or
V AC)
lower
Power supply module (220 - 240
PW482 8 years Yes ture (*1) of 40 deg. C or
V AC)
lower
Power supply module (24 V DC) PW484 8 years Yes ture (*1) of 40 deg. C or
lower
(PW481) 8 years No
Electrolytic capacitor (in a power
(PW482) 8 years No ture (*1) of 40 deg. C or
supply unit)
lower
(PW484) 8 years No
S9109VK 8 years No For PW481 and PW482
Power supply internal fuse
A1546EF 8 years No For PW484
*1: When FFCS-V(19" Rack Mountable Type) is installed in the cabinet,the ambient temperature means the temperature inside
the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.

Blank Page
<B5. Relay Boards (for FIO)> B5-1
B5. Relay Boards (for FIO)

There are two types of relay boards: mechanical relay boards and solid state relay boards.

<B5.1 Overview> B5-2
B5.1 Overview
The following models of mechanical relay boards and solid state relay boards are available:
• Mechanical relay input board (Model: ARM15A)
• Mechanical relay dry contact (NO) output board (Model: ARM55D)
• Mechanical relay wet contact output board (Model: ARM55W)
• Mechanical relay wet contact output board with switch (Model: ARM55T)
• Mechanical relay dry contact (NO or NC) output board (Model: ARM55C)
• Solid state relay input board (Model: ARS15B)
• Solid state relay input board (mounted on DIN rail) (Model: ARS15M)
• Solid state relay output board (mounted on DIN rail) (Model: ARS55M)
n Specification
SEE
ALSO For more information about the specification of relay boards, refer to:
The general specification “Relay Boards (for FIO) (GS 33K50H60-50E)”
n Relay Input Board

A relay input board receives contact signals or voltage input signals from field equipment. The
signals are output through the dedicated cable from one of the connectors CN1 or CN2 and
can be used as inputs for a digital input module (Model: ADV151 or ADV161). It can also be
connected to a dual-redundant digital input module.
Each relay input board has 32 connection channels, and is equipped with a relay, an opera-
tion indication lamp, and a terminal for each of the channels.
n Relay Output Board

A relay output board receives status output signals from a digital output module (Model:
ADV551 or ADV561) via relays, amplifies the signals at the contact points, and outputs the
amplified signals to field equipment through its terminals. It can also be connected to a dual-
redundant digital output module.
Each relay output board has 32 connection channels, and is equipped with a relay, an opera-
tion indication lamp, and a terminal for each of the channels.
There are two types of relay outputs for mechanical relay boards: dry contact output and wet
contact output.
A dry contact output outputs a contact signal without an applied voltage while a wet contact
output outputs a contact signal with an applied voltage.

<B5.2 Handling Relay Boards> B5-3
B5.2 Handling Relay Boards

Please take the following precautions when handling relay boards.
n Handling Precautions
IMPORTANT
• Prepare a 24 V DC power supply in order to drive the relays.
• Do not connect any other signal than NC to the terminal labeled “NC.”
• If signals are connected to adjacent terminals, they must be wired in such a way that the
insulating sleeves of the solderless terminals do not overlap.
• Do not push the center of relay case strongly. The relay might be malfunctioned.
The figure below shows the position mark that indicates the orientation of relays.
Relay position mark Mark on the relay
POSITION
RELAY
Figure B5.2-1 Relay Position Mark

<B5.3 Names of Individual Parts> B5-4
B5.3 Names of Individual Parts

The figure below shows the name of each part of a relay board.
The figure shows an ARM55W board.
Cable connector for I/O module
(when dual-redundant)
Cable connector Protected by a cover when not used
for I/O module
Relay position mark Operation Fuse (power supply)
Relay indicating lamp
Power supply
terminal for relays
terminal for the wet terminal for the wet
Cable tray Field terminal
contact outputs contact outputs
(TM1-2) Protective
Hole for mounting rack Field terminal grounding
(M5 screw hole, 4 position) (TM1-1) Fuse (for signal wire
terminal
to the field device)
Figure B5.3-1 Names of Individual Parts on Relay Board (Model: ARM55W)

<B5.4 Cable Connection> B5-5
B5.4 Cable Connection

This section explains how to connect cables from a digital I/O module to field equipment.

B5.4.1 Components
The following equipment is required in order to connect a relay board to a digital I/O module.
An ADV561 module is a 64-channel module; two sets of relay boards and connection cables
(Model: AKB337) are required per ADV561 module.
Table B5.4.1-1 Components

Connectable Digital I/O
Signal Modules
Models Name Contact points Terminal
cable Terminal
Modules
blocks
ARM15A Mechanical relay board contact 32-point M4 AKB33 ADV151 ATD5A
input screws 1
AKB33 ADV161 –
7
ARM55D Mechanical relay board dry 32-point M4 AKB33 ADV551 ATD5A
contact output (NO) screws 1
AKB33 ADV561 –
7
ARM55 Mechanical relay board wet 32-point M4 AKB33 ADV551 ATD5A
W contact output (NO) screws 1
AKB33 ADV561 –
7
ARM55T Mechanical relay board wet 32-point M4 AKB33 ADV551 ATD5A
contact output with switch (NO) screws 1
AKB33 ADV561 –
7
ARM55C Mechanical relay board dry 32-point M3.5 AKB33 ADV551 ATD5A
contact output (NO or NC) screws 1
(M4 in
power AKB33 ADV561 –
input 7
part)
ARS15B Solid state relay board contact 32-point M4 AKB33 ADV151 ATD5A
input screws 1
AKB33 ADV161 –
7
ARS15M Solid state relay board voltage 32-point Pres- AKB33 ADV151 ATD5A
input DIN rail mountable) sure 1
clamp
termi- AKB33 ADV161 –
nals 7
ARS55M Solid state relay board TRIAC 32-point Pres- AKB33 ADV551 ATD5A
output, transistor output (DIN (NO) sure 1
rail mountable) clamp
termi- AKB33 ADV561 –
nals 7
The figure below shows how to connect cables.

An example of connecting an ADV551 module and an ARM55W board using an AKB331 ca-
ble is shown in the figure.

Dedicated cable KS cable

(AKB331) interface adaptor
Relay board (ARM55W)
Digital I/O module

(ADV551)
Field cable
Figure B5.4.1-1 Cable Connection
It is recommended to use 0.9 mm2 or 1.25 mm2wires for the signal wiring to the field equip-
ment.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to attach a connector cover to connector areas to which cables are not connected,
in order to prevent dust from entering and to protect the connector pins.
One connector cover is supplied per relay board.

B5.4.2 Contact Output, Ground Wiring
n Contact Output Wiring

In case an inductive load is connected to an output, make sure to connect a spark killer circuit
(an RC-connection in series in case of an AC power supply, a diode in case of a DC power
supply) in parallel with the load in order to protect the contact.
The same arrangement must be made for a solid state relay output as well.
Contact Contact
Diode R C
Power Power
supply supply
Inductive
load
Inductive load such

as solenoide valve
System side External circuit System side External circuit
DC power supply AC power supply
Figure B5.4.2-1 Use of Spark Killer
n Ground Wiring
CAUTION
The grounding wire must be connected to the dedicated grounding terminal specified for the
device.
ARS15M and ARS55M do not have grounding terminal.
SEE
ALSO For more information about power cables and grounding wires, refer to:

B5.4.3 Wiring Field Equipment

This section shows the signal names and terminal numbers of a relay board, as well as how
to connect to a digital I/O module.
n Terminal Wiring to Field Equipment

The relay boards employ M4 screws as terminals for connecting to the field equipment and
power supply, except ARM55C, which employs M3.5 screws as terminals for connecting to
the field equipment.
The table below lists standard dimensions for ring terminals with insulating sleeves.
l Wires and Ring Terminals Used

Make sure to use ring terminals with insulating sleeves for the wire terminals. Moreover, it is
recommended to use ring terminals and crimping tools made by the same manufacturer.
insulating sleeve
inside diameter
Hole diameter
C

Nominal Insulating
cross sec- Hole diame- Ring outside Dimension
Screw used Ring terminal sleeve
tional area ter diameter "C"
(mm) length (mm) inside diame-
(mm) (mm) (mm)
(mm2) ter (mm)
1.25 3.5 3.7 or more 6.8 or less approx. 21 3.6 or more 4.0 or more
2.0 3.5 3.7 or more 6.8 or less approx. 21 4.3 or more 4.0 or more
l Wiring to Pressure Clamp Terminals
Table B5.4.3-2 Dimensions of sleeves and cables

Peel-off length Lengthpart of
Terminal No. Sleeves Cable thickness (mm2) (mm) sleeve (mm)
TM1 (1 to 32) Without sleeves 0.5 to 2 (AWG20 to 14) 8 –
With sleeves 0.5 to 2 (AWG20 to 14) 8 8
TM2 (+, -) Without sleeves 0.5 to 2 (AWG20 to 14) 9 –
With sleeves 0.5 to 1.5 (AWG20 to 16) 9 8

IMPORTANT
When not using sleeve a single wire cable should be used.
Cable
Core
Peel the coating

Sleeve with insulating cover Sleeve (without insulating cover) off for this length
Figure B5.4.3-2 Sleeve and Cable
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to connect wires to pressure clamp terminals, refer to:
B3.2.1, “Direct-Coupled Connection Using Pressure Clamp Terminals” on page B3-8
n ARM15A Mechanical Relay Input Board

connectors for dual-redundancy.
FUSE FUSE
FLD FLD FUSE
L(1~16) R(17~32)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
FLD(+) 1A 2A 15A 16A NC FLD(+) 17A 18A 31A 32A +

FLD(–) 1B 2B 15B 16B NC FLD(–) 17B 18B 31B 32B -
L R
TM1
Protective grounding terminal
Figure B5.4.3-3 ARM15A Mechanical Relay Input Board
Signal name LL (+) IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN7A IN8A IN9A IN10A IN11A IN12A IN13A IN14A IN15A IN16A NC
TM1 (Left) FLD(+) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A NC
Terminal No. FLD(-) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B NC
Signal name LN (-) IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B IN5B IN6B IN7B IN8B IN9B IN10B IN11B IN12B IN13B IN14B IN15B IN16B NC
Signal name RL (+) IN17A IN18A IN19A IN20A IN21A IN22A IN23A IN24A IN25A IN26A IN27A IN28A IN29A IN30A IN31A IN32A 24V
FLD(+) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A +
TM1 (Right)
Terminal No. FLD(-) 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B -
Signal name RN (-) IN17B IN18B IN19B IN20B IN21B IN22B IN23B IN24B IN25B IN26B IN27B IN28B IN29B IN30B IN31B IN32B 0V
Figure B5.4.3-4 ARM15A Signal Name and Terminal Number

CAUTION
• The “+” and “-” terminals used for connecting the power supply for the internal circuits of
the relay board are placed at the far right of the TM1 (Right) terminal bank.
• The terminals used for connecting the power supply for the field equipment are placed as
follows:
“FLD (+)” and “FLD (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Left) terminal bank for channels 1 to 16.
“FLD (+)” and “FLD (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Right) terminal bank for channels 17 to
32.
• Before wiring is started, the protective cover for the terminals needs to be removed. And
the cover should be put back after the wiring is completed.
• It is recommended to place mediate switches or breakers in the power supply wirings so
that the power supply of each circuit can be shutoff individually during maintenance.
n ARM55D Mechanical Relay Dry Contact Output Board

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1A 2A 15A 16A NC NC 17A 18A 31A 32A NC

1B 2B 15B 16B NC NC 17B 18B 31B 32B NC
Figure B5.4.3-5 ARM55D Mechanical Relay Dry Contact Output Board
Signal name 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A
NC NC
TM1 (Left) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A NC NC

Terminal No. 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B NC NC
Signal name NC NC
Signal name NC 24V
TM1 (Right) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A NC +
Terminal No. 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B NC -
Signal name NC 0V
Figure B5.4.3-6 ARM55D Signal Name and Terminal Number

CAUTION
n ARM55W Mechanical Relay Wet Contact Output Board

FUSE
1.6A
POSITION
RELAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
FUSE
250V
F
1.6A
L(+) 1A 2A 15A 16A NC L(+) 17A 18A 31A 32A

L(-) 1B 2B 15B 16B NC L(-) 17B 18B 31B 32B
R
Figure B5.4.3-7 ARM55W Mechanical Relay Wet Contact Output Board
LL OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name NC
(+) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A
TM1 (Left) L(+) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A NC
Terminal No. N(-) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B NC
LN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name NC
(-) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
RL OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name 24V
TM1 (Right) L(+) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A +
Terminal No. N(-) 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B -
RN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name 0V
Figure B5.4.3-8 ARM55W Signal Name and Terminal Number

CAUTION
• The terminals used for connecting the power supply for the wet outputs are as follows:
“L (+)” and “N (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Left) terminal bank for channels 1 to 16.
“L (+)” and “N (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Right) terminal bank for channels 17 to 32.
Exercise caution to avoid mistaking these terminals with the power supply for driving the
relays.
Do not use a higher output power supply voltage than the rated voltage for the wet output
relay board. The power supply must be prepared externally.
n ARM55T Mechanical Relay Wet Contact Output Board with Switch

FUSE
AUTO OFF ON 1.6A
POSITION
RELAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
FUSE
250V
F
1.6A
L(+) 1A 2A 15A 16A NC L(+) 17A 18A 31A 32A

L(-) 1B 2B 15B 16B NC L(-) 17B 18B 31B 32B
R
Figure B5.4.3-9 ARM55T Mechanical Relay Wet Contact Output Board with Switch
LL OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name NC
TM1 (Left) L(+) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A NC
Terminal No. N(-) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B NC
LN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name NC
RL OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name 24V
TM1 (Right) L(+) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A +
Terminal No. N(-) 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B -
RN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Signal name 0V
Figure B5.4.3-10 ARM55T Signal Name and Terminal Number

CAUTION
• The terminals used for connecting the power supply for the wet outputs are as follows:
“L (+)” and “N (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Left) terminal bank for channels 1 to 16.
“L (+)” and “N (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Right) terminal bank for channels 17 to 32.
Exercise caution to avoid mistaking these terminals with the power supply for driving the
relays.
Do not use a higher output power supply voltage than the rated voltage for the wet output
relay board. The power supply must be prepared externally.
n ARM55C Mechanical Relay Dry Contact Output Board

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
TM2
1A 2A 15A 16A 17A 18A 31A 32A

1B 2B 15B 16B 17B 18B 31B 32B
1C 2C 15C 16C 17C 18C 31C 32C
Figure B5.4.3-11 ARM55C Mechanical Relay Dry Contact Output Board

Signal name OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TM1 (Left)
Terminal No.
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C 9C 10C 11C 12C 13C 14C 15C 16C
Signal name OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 24V
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A TM2
TM1 (Right) +
Terminal No.
17C 18C 19C 20C 21C 22C 23C 24C 25C 26C 27C 28C 29C 30C 31C 32C -
Figure B5.4.3-12 ARM55C Signal Name and Terminal Number
CAUTION
• The “+” and “-” TM2 terminals are used for connecting the power supply for the internal
circuits of the relay board.
• Connect the field equipment wiring to terminals “nA” and “nC” in case of a-contact output
and to terminals “nB” and “nC” in case of b-contact output. (n:terminal number)
Select either the a-contact or the b-contact configuration for each channel and connect to
appropriate terminals.
n ARS15B Solid State Relay Input Board

FUSE
CN1 CN2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
FUSE
250V
F
1.6A
FLD(+) 1A 2A 17A 18A 31A 32A

FLD(-) 1B 2B 17B 18B 31B 32B
Figure B5.4.3-13 ARS15B Solid State Relay Input Board

Signal name L (+) IN1A IN2A IN3A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN7A IN8A IN9A IN10A IN11A IN12A IN13A IN14A IN15A IN16A
TM1 (Left) FLD(+) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A
Terminal No. FLD(-) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
Signal name N (-) IN1B IN2B IN3B IN4B IN5B IN6B IN7B IN8B IN9B IN10B IN11B IN12B IN13B IN14B IN15B IN16B
Signal name IN17A IN18A IN19A IN20A IN21A IN22A IN23A IN24A IN25A IN26A IN27A IN28A IN29A IN30A IN31A IN32A 24V
TM1 (Right) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A +
Terminal No. 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B -
Signal name IN17B IN18B IN19B IN20B IN21B IN22B IN23B IN24B IN25B IN26B IN27B IN28B IN29B IN30B IN31B IN32B 0V
Figure B5.4.3-14 ARS15B Signal Name and Terminal Number
CAUTION
• The “+” and “-” TM1 (Right) terminals are used for connecting the power supply for the
internal circuits of the relay board.
• The terminals used for connecting the power supply for the field equipment are placed as
follows: “FLD (+)” and “FLD (-)” at the far left of the TM1 (Left) terminal bank.
n ARS15M Solid State Relay Input Board (mounted on DIN rail) and
ARS55M Solid State Relay Output Board (mounted on DIN rail)
The field cables and power supply cables of ARS15M and ARS55M are connected using
pressure clamp terminals.
TM2 FUSE
24V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
TM2
+
-
1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
Figure B5.4.3-15 ARS15M, ARS55M
Signal (ARS15M) IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16
name (ARS55M) OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
TM1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Terminal No. A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
Signal (ARS15M) IN17 IN18 IN19 IN20 IN21 IN22 IN23 IN24 IN25 IN26 IN27 IN28 IN29 IN30 IN31 IN32
name (ARS55M) OUT17 OUT18 OUT19 OUT20 OUT21 OUT22 OUT23 OUT24 OUT25 OUT26 OUT27 OUT28 OUT29 OUT30 OUT31 OUT32
TM1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Terminal No. A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
Figure B5.4.3-16 ARS15M or ARS55M Signal Name and Terminal Number

CAUTION
the relay board are placed at the far right of the TM2 terminal bank.

<B5.5 Circuit Diagrams> B5-18
B5.5 Circuit Diagrams

The figures below show the circuit diagrams for the different relay boards.
n ARM15A
ADV151 Photo-coupler
or
ADV161
1 16 17 32
Fuse
1A
24 V DC +
power supply -
for internal circuit
RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32
Fuse Fuse
1A 1A
+ +
FLD FLD
- -
24 V DC 24 V DC
power supply power supply
for field device 1A 1B 16A 16B 17A 17B 32A 32B
for field device
(1 to 16ch ) (17 to 32ch )
External contact input
Figure B5.5-1 ARM15A Circuit Diagram
n ARM55D
ADV551 1 32
or 24 V DC
ADV561
Fuse RL1 RL32

1.6 A
24 V DC +
power supply
-
1A 1B 32A 32B
Dry contact output
Figure B5.5-2 ARM55D Circuit Diagram

n ARM55W
ADV551 1 16 17 32
or 24 V DC
ADV561
24 V DC
power supply Fuse RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32
for internal circuit 2A
+
-
L(+) L(+)
N(-) N(-)
for field device for field device
(1 to 16ch ) (17 to 32ch )
Fuse Fuse
1.6 A 1.6 A
1A 1B 16A 16B 17A 17B 32A 32B
Wet contact output
Figure B5.5-3 ARM55W Circuit Diagram
n ARM55T
ADV551
or 1 16 17 32
ADV561 24 V DC
AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON
SW1 SW16 SW17 SW32
24 V DC
power supply Fuse RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32
for internal circuit 1.6 A
+
-
L(+) L(+)
N(-) N(-)
for field device for field device
(1 to 16ch ) (17 to 32ch )
Fuse Fuse
1.6 A 1.6 A
1A 1B 16A 16B 17A 17B 32A 32B
Wet contact output
Figure B5.5-4 ARM55T Circuit Diagram

n ARM55C
ADV551
or 1 32
ADV561 24 V DC
RL1 RL32
Fuse
2A
24 V DC +
power supply
for internal circuit -
1 1 1 32 32 32
A B C A B C
Dry contact output

terminal A : "a" contact
terminal B : "b" contact
Figure B5.5-5 ARM55C Circuit Diagram
n ARS15B
ADV151
or Photo-coupler
ADV161
1 32
Fuse
1A
24 V DC +
power supply
Photo-coupler
Fuse
1.6 A
DC power supply +
for field device FLD
-
1A 1B 32A 32B
Figure B5.5-6 ARS15B Circuit Diagram

n ARS15M
ADV151
or Photo-coupler
ADV161
1 32
Fuse
1.6 A
24 V DC +
power supply
-
rectification/ rectification/
isolation Solid state relay isolation
circuit circuit
1A 1B 32A 32B
For ARS15M-1, 2:
AC voltage input
For ARS15M-3:
DC voltage input
Voltage input (A : +, B : -)
Figure B5.5-7 ARS15M Circuit Diagram
n ARS55M
ADV551
or 1 32
ADV561 24 V DC
Fuse
24 V DC 1A
+
power supply
switch circuit Solid state relay switch circuit
1A 1B 32A 32B
Triac output (ARS55M-1, 2)

Transistor output (ARS55M-3 A : +, B : -)
Figure B5.5-8 ARS55M Circuit Diagram

<B5.6 Maintenance> B5-22
B5.6 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to mount a relay board and replace parts.
CAUTION
this manual.
SEE
ALSO For more information about precautions regarding static electricity, refer to:
B4.1, “Routine Maintenance of Input/Output Devices” on page B4-2

B5.6.1 Mounting Relay Boards

Relay boards can be mounted in racks, on wall surfaces, or on DIN rails.
n Securing Cable Area

Make sure to secure the system cable area shown in the figures below in all the mounting
methods.
unit : mm
130 or more
100 or more
(cable area)
(cable area)
System cable
Cable tray
Rack mountable Wall mountable
Figure B5.6.1-1 System Cable Area
n Mounting in a Rack
A relay board can be mounted in a cabinet or a 19-inch wide rack in an instrument board ac-
cording to the following procedure.
Fixed in a rack or cabinet
M5 screw
Figure B5.6.1-2 Mounting in a Rack
n Mounting on a Wall Surface

A relay board can be mounted on a flat wall surface according to the following procedure. You
will need to specify that the relay board will be mounted on a wall surface when ordering it.
Drill holes for the wall surface mounting fittings in advance according to the dimensions
shown in the figure below.

unit : mm
(482.6)
6.35±0.2
465.1±1.6
M5 screw, 4 positions
(133.35) *2
120.65±0.4
Device mounting area
*1
The dimensions of *1 and *2 are 165.1 ± 0.4 mm
6.35±0.2
and 177.8 mm, respectively, for ARM55W.
Figure B5.6.1-3 Wall Surface Mounting Dimensions
M5 screw
Fixed on a wall surface
Wall mount bracket
Figure B5.6.1-4 Mounting on a Wall Surface
l Mounting Procedure
1. Fix the attached mounting fittings on the wall surface at two locations in both the left and
right sides with M5 screws (in the orientation shown in the figure above).
2. Fix the relay board to the wall surface mounting fittings with M5 screws.
n Mounting on DIN Rails

The DIN rails of the standards shown in the figures below can be used.

Cross-section view of DIN rail Front view of DIN rail
A B C
Compatible DIN Rails
Symbol Section view IEC standard EN standard
TH35-15 A IEC 60715 EN 50022
G32 B IEC 60715 EN 50035
TH35-7.5 C IEC 60715 EN 50022
Figure B5.6.1-5 Compatible DIN Rails and Shapes
l Mounting on a DIN Rail

A relay board can be mounted on a DIN rail according to the following procedure.
The figures below illustrate how to mount a relay board on an IEC 60715 TH35-15 or EN
50022 rail.
Locate the four attachments for mounting on the DIN rail on the back of the relay board.
1. Hook “groove a” of the four attachments onto the upper side of the DIN rail.
Lift the bottom part of the relay board toward you so that the relay board is tilted, then
hook “groove a” onto the upper side of the DIN rail securely.
2. Press the tilted relay board in, until it is placed in an upright position.
The bottom side of the DIN rail fits into “groove b,” and the relay board is fixed.
The upper and bottom sides of IEC 60715 G32 and EN 50035 fit into “groove c” and “groove
d,” respectively.
Mounting on a DIN rail
Groove a 1. Hook
Groove c
Groove d DIN rail
Groove b 2. Press in
Figure B5.6.1-6 Mounting on a DIN Rail
The figures below show how a relay board is mounted on each of the compatible DIN rail
types.
unit : mm
DIN rail
160 or more
System cable area
IEC 60715 TH35-15, IEC 60715 G32, IEC 60715 TH35-7, 5,
EN 50022 EN 50035 EN 50022
Figure B5.6.1-7 Relay Boards Mounted on Different DIN Rail Types

l Dismounting from a DIN Rail

A relay board can be dismounted from a DIN rail according to the following procedure.
1. Insert your finger in the space at the back of the relay board and press the A part shown
in the figures below in the direction indicated.
The hook of the B part shown in the figures is lowered, yielding a clearance between the
bottom part of the DIN rail and “groove b.”
2. Pull the bottom part of the relay board lightly toward you.
The attachment is detached from the DIN rail.
3. In a similar way, the four attachments are detached in turn and the relay board is dis-
mounted from the DIN rail.
B part
B part
A part
A part
Figure B5.6.1-8 Dismounting from a DIN Rail

B5.6.2 Parts Replacement

The relay board parts shown in the table below have defined life spans.
IMPORTANT
sults.
CAUTION
• Prevent tools from entering inside the relay board during maintenance; it may cause elec-
tric shock or failure.
• Do not insert or remove relays or fuses while voltage is applied or current is being con-
ducted to terminals; there is a danger of electric shock. If it is necessary to insert or re-
move relays or fuses while current is applied, please contact Yokogawa’s sales agents.

The table below shows the recommended replacement cycle, for maintenance planning.
Table B5.6.2-1 Relay Board Parts Having Defined Life Spans

Recommended re-
Part name Part No. Applied relay board
placement cycle
Relay S9165VM 100000 times ARM15A, ARM55D, ARM55W, ARM55T
Relay S9163VM 100000 times ARM55C
n Fastening Torque of Solid State Relay

When installing the ARS15M and ARS55M solid state relays, the fastening torque is about 0.3
N•m.
n Fuse List
The fuses used in the relay board are listed as follows.
Table B5.6.2-2 Relay Board Fuse List

Internal Power Supply Circuits Field Signal Circuits
Nominal Volt- Nominal Voltage/
Model Part No. Piece 1 Part No. Type Piece
age/Current Current
ARM15A S9527VK 125 V/1 A 1 S9527VK 125 V/1 A - 2

Internal Power Supply Circuits Field Signal Circuits
Nominal Volt- Nominal Voltage/
Model Part No. Piece 1 Part No. Type Piece
age/Current Current
ARM55D S9528VK 125 V/1.6 A 1 - - - -
ARM55W S9528VK 125 V/1.6 A 1 A1422EF 250 V/1.6 A F 64
ARM55T S9528VK 125 V/1.6 A 1 A1422EF 250 V/1.6 A F 64
ARM55C S9529VK 125 V/2 A 1 - - - -
ARS15B S9527VK 125 V/1 A 1 A1422EF 250 V/1.6 A F 1
ARS15M S9529VK 125 V/2 A 1 - - - -
ARS55M S9529VK 125 V/2 A 1 A1554EF(*1) 250 V/4 A F 32
*1: The fuse plugged on solid state relay.
n Dismounting Cable Trays

Each relay board comes with a cable tray where the wiring to the field equipment can be stor-
ed.
If the cable tray is not necessary, it can be dismounted according to the following procedure.
1. Locate the three square holes in the cable tray. Loosen the screws in the square holes
using a screwdriver in all three places.
2. Lift the cable tray approximately 5 mm up while the screws are still loosened.
3. The relay board and cable tray are separated.

<B6. Relay Boards (for RIO and ST compatible FIO)> B6-1
B6. Relay Boards (for RIO and ST

compatible FIO)
This chapter explains the relay board implemented with RIO and ST compatible FIO.

B6.1 Overview
The relay boards for RIO and ST compatible FIO consist of relay input type and relay output
type, both types consist of 16-point board and 32-point board.
n Specification
SEE
ALSO For more information about relay board specifications, refer to:
“Relay Boards” (GS 33K55R40-50E) of General Specifications
n Relay Input Board

When a discrete signal is passed from the field to the relay board, the relay converts the sig-
nal into one or two contact signals. If only converted to one signal, the signal, with many other
discrete signals, is sent to discrete input module through CN1 connector. If converted to two
signals, one signals is sent to I/O module through CN1 connector and the other is connected
to a terminal. Each input signal has a relay, a status indicator lamp and a set of terminals.
n Relay Output Board

When a status signal is passed from the discrete output module to the relay board, the relay
converts the signal into one or two contact signals and output it into the field device via termi-
nals.
There are two types of relay boards for 16-point output and 32-point output. Each point has a
relay, a status indicator lamp and a set of terminals.
The output signals from the relays consist of two types, dry output signals and wet output sig-
nals.
The dry output signal does not have voltage but the wet output signal has voltage. The relay
boards consist of the following types:
• Relay board for dry output only
• Relay board for wet output only
• Relay board for both dry and wet outputs

<B6.2 Handling Relay Boards> B6-3
B6.2 Handling Relay Boards

Please take the following precautions when handling relay boards.
n Handling Precautions
IMPORTANT
• Prepare a 24 V DC power supply in order to drive the relays.
• Prepare an 125 V AC/DC power supply as the power source for the wet outputs. The ter-
minal of the power source for wet output is the marked L(+) and N(-) located at the left
side of TM1 terminal. It is important not to confuse it with the terminals of relay power.
• If signals are connected to adjacent terminals, they must be wired in such a way that the
insulating sleeves of the ring terminals do not overlap.
• When install or remove the relays, the legs of the relay must not be bended. The relay
should be pullout or pushback straightly.
The figure below shows the position mark that indicates the orientation of relays.
Relay position mark Mark on the relay
POSITION
RELAY
Figure B6.2-1 Relay Position Mark

<B6.3 Names of Individual Parts> B6-4
B6.3 Names of Individual Parts

The figure below shows the name of each part of a relay board.
The figure shows an MRI-224, MRI-234, MRO-224 and MRO-234 board.
Terminal
Operation protection
indicating lamp Relay disconnection
Relay Field terminal (TM2) cover Cable connector
prevention holder
for I/O module
Hole for mounting rack

(M5 screw hole, 4 position)
Protective grounding
terminal
Field terminal (TM1) Power supply terminal Fuse (power supply
for relay for internal circuit)
Figure B6.3-1 Names of Individual Parts on Relay Board


This section explains how to connect cables from a digital I/O module to field equipment.

B6.4.1 Components
The following equipment is required in order to connect a relay board to a digital I/O module.
Table B6.4.1-1 Components

Connectable I/O Modules Signal
Name Models Description
for RIO for FIO cable
Relay Input MRI-114 ADM11C ADV859, ADV159 KS2 –
Board
(16 points) MRI-124 ADM11C ADV859, ADV159 KS2 with Repeat Relay Contact Output (NO):
16 Points
MRI-134 ADM11C ADV859, ADV159 KS2 with Repeat Relay Contact Output (NC):
16 Points
Relay Input MRI-214 ADM12C ADV869, ADV169 KS9 –
Board
(32 points) MRI-224 ADM12C ADV869, ADV169 KS9 with Repeat Relay Contact Output (NO):
32 Points
MRI-234 ADM12C ADV869, ADV169 KS9 with Repeat Relay Contact Output (NC):
32 Points
Relay Output MRO-114 ADM51C ADV859, ADV559 KS2 Relay Contact Output (NO): 1 point
Board each
(16 points)
MRO-124 ADM51C ADV859, ADV559 KS2 Relay Contact Output (NO): 2 points
each
MRO-134 ADM51C ADV859, ADV559 KS2 Relay Contact Output (NO) (NC): 1
point each
MRO-144 ADM51C ADV859, ADV559 KS2 Relay Wet Output (NO): 1 point each
with AUTO/OFF/ON SW
Relay Contact Output (NO): 1 point
each
Relay Output MRO-214 ADM52C ADV869, ADV569 KS9 Relay Contact Output (NO): 1 point
Board each
(32 points)
MRO-224 ADM52C ADV869, ADV569 KS9 Relay Contact Output (NO): 2 points
each
MRO-234 ADM52C ADV869, ADV569 KS9 Relay Contact Output (NO) (NC): 1
point each
with AUTO/OFF/ON SW
Relay Contact Output (NO): 1 point
each
The figure below shows how to connect cables.

It is recommended to use 0.9 mm2 or 1.25 mm2wires for the signal wiring to the field equip-
ment.

Relay board KS cable

interface adaptor
Digital I/O
module
Dedicated cable
Field cable
Figure B6.4.1-1 Cable Connection

B6.4.2 Contact Output, Ground Wiring

SEE
ALSO For more information about contact output, ground wiring, refer to:
B5.4.2, “Contact Output, Ground Wiring” on page B5-8


Wiring field equipment for RIO and ST compatible FIO is the same as for FIO.
However, pressure clamp terminals are not available for RIO and ST compatible FIO.
SEE
ALSO For more information about wiring field equipment, refer to:
B5.4.3, “Wiring Field Equipment” on page B5-9

<B6.5 Cable Connection and Circuit Diagrams> B6-10
B6.5 Cable Connection and Circuit Diagrams

The relay board appearance drawings, terminal diagrams and circuit diagrams of the RIO and
ST compatible FIO relay boards are provided in this chapter.
CAUTION
• The “+” and “-” terminals to the right side of TM1-2 are the terminals of power source for
relay board internal circuits.
• Prepare an 125 V AC or 125 V DC power supply as the power source of the wet output
signals. The terminal of the power source for wet output is the marked L(+) and N(-) loca-
ted at the left side of TM1-1 terminal.
• When wiring a terminal, the protection cover of the terminal can be removed. But the cov-
er must be restored when the wiring is completed.
• It is recommended to use a switch or breaker in each power supply wiring, so that the
power supply of individual circuit can be turned on/off for maintenance.

B6.5.1 MRI-114 Relay Input Board

This relay input board can be used with input module ADM11C, ADV859 and ADV159.
Figure B6.5.1-1 MRI-114 Relay Input Board
Signal name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16
TM1 A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B + -
Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
Figure B6.5.1-2 MRI-114 Signal Name and Terminal Number
No.1 output
CN1
40 39 10 9
RL1 RL16
F1
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL
16
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B
Figure B6.5.1-3 MRI-114 Circuit Diagram


The repeat contacts of the relays (the second contact outputs on the circuit diagram) are nor-
mally open (NO).
TM2 A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
terminal
Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
No.1 output No.2 output
CN1 TM2 1A 1B 16A 16B

40 39 10 9
RL1 RL16 RL1 RL16
F1
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL
16
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B


The repeat contacts of the relays (the second contact outputs on the circuit diagram) are nor-
mally close (NC).
Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
terminal
Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
CN1 TM2 1A 1B 16A 16B

40 39 10 9
RL1 RL16 RL1 RL16
F1
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL
16
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B


TM1(Left)
Input terminal 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
Signal name CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH29 CH30 CH31 CH32 24V
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A +
TM1(Right)
Input terminal 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B -
0V
No.1 output
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11
RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32
F1
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL RL RL
16 17 32
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B TM2 17A 17B 32A 32B


TM2 (Left) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A
Output terminal 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
TM2 (Right) 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A

0V
CN1 TM2 1A 1B 32A 32B

50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11
RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32 RL1 RL32
F1
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL RL RL
16 17 32
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B 17A 17B 32A 32B




0V
CN1 TM2 1A 1B 32A 32B

50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11
RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32 RL1 RL32
F1
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL RL RL
16 17 32
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B 17A 17B 32A 32B

B6.5.7 MRO-114 Relay Output Board

This relay output board can be used with output module ADM51C, ADV859 and ADV559.
Figure B6.5.7-1 MRO-114 Relay Output Board
Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
Figure B6.5.7-2 MRO-114 Signal Name and Terminal Number
ADM51C or
ADV859 or 1 16
ADV559
CN1
40 39 10 9
RL1 RL
F1 16
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL16
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B
Dry contact output
Figure B6.5.7-3 MRO-114 Circuit Diagram


Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
terminal
Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
ADM51C or 1 16
ADV859 or
ADV559
CN1
40 39 10 9
RL1 RL
F1 16
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL16 RL1 RL16
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B TM2 1A 1B 16A 16B
Dry contact output Dry contact output


Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
terminal
Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
ADM51C or
1 16
ADV859 or
ADV559
CN1
40 39 10 9
RL1 RL
F1 16
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL16 RL1 RL16
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B TM2 1A 1B 16A 16B


TM1 L N A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B + -
Output (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
ADM51C or
1 16
ADV859 or
ADV559
CN1
40 39 10 9
RL1 RL
F1 16
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
AC/DC L(+)
125 V or less N(-)
RL1 RL16
F101 F201 F116 F216

TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B
Wet contact output


Output (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
ADM51C or
ADV859 or 1 16
ADV559
CN1
40 39 10 9
AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON

SW1
SW16
RL1 RL
F1 16
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
AC/DC L(+)
125 V or less N(-)
RL1 RL16
F101 F201 F116 F216

TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B
Wet contact output


Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
terminal
Output (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24VDC
terminal
ADM51C or
ADV859 or 1 16
ADV559
CN1
40 39 10 9
RL1 RL
F1 16
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
AC/DC L(+)
125 V or less N(-)
RL1 RL16
RL1 RL16
F101 F201 F116 F216
TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B TM2 1A 1B 16A 16B
Wet contact output Dry contact output


TM1 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A

TM1 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 29A 30A 31A 32A +
Output terminal 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B -
0V
ADM52C or
ADV869 or 1 16 17 32
ADV569
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11 8 7 4 3
RL1 RL RL RL
F1 16 17 32
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL32
TM1 1A 1B 32A 32B
Dry contact output




0V
ADM52C or
ADV869 or 1 16 17 32
ADV569
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11 8 7 4 3
RL1 RL RL RL
F1 16 17 32
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL32 RL1 RL32
TM1 1A 1B 32A 32B TM2 1A 1B 32A 32B




0V
ADM52C or
ADV869 or 1 16 17 32
ADV569
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11 8 7 4 3
RL1 RL RL RL
F1 16 17 32
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
RL1 RL32 RL1 RL32
TM1 1A 1B 32A 32B TM2 1A 1B 32A 32B


TM1 (Left) L (+) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A
Output terminal N (-) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
0V
ADM52C or
ADV869 or 1 16 17 32
ADV569
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11 8 7 4 3
RL1 RL RL RL
F1 16 17 32
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
AC/DC L(+)
125 V or less N(-)
RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32
F101 F201 F116 F216 F117 F217 F132 F232

TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B TM1 17A 17B 32A 32B
Wet contact output


0V
ADM52C or
ADV869 or 1 16 17 32
ADV569
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11 8 7 4 3
AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON AUTO OFF ON

SW1 SW16 SW17 SW32
RL1 RL RL RL
F1 16 17 32
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
AC/DC L(+)
125 V or less N(-)
RL1 RL16 RL17 RL32
F101 F201 F116 F216 F117 F217 F132 F232

TM1 1A 1B 16A 16B TM1 17A 17B 32A 32B
Wet contact output



0V
ADM52C or
ADV869 or 1 16 17 32
ADV569
CN1
50 49 48 47 46 31 30 29 28 27 26 11 8 7 4 3
RL1 RL RL RL
F1 16 17 32
1.6 A
+
24 V DC
-
AC/DC L(+)
125 V or less N(-)
RL1 RL32
RL1 RL32
F101 F201 F132 F232
TM1 1A 1B 32A 32B TM2 1A 1B 32A 32B
Wet contact output Dry contact output

B6.6 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to mount a relay board and replace parts.
CAUTION
this manual.
SEE

B6.6.1 Mounting Relay Boards

The RIO and ST compatible FIO relay boards can be mounted in racks.
SEE
ALSO For more information about mounting RIO and ST compatible FIO relay boards, refer to:
“n Mounting in a Rack” on page B5-23
n Relay Disconnection Prevention Holder

A metal frame, relay disconnection prevention holder, is provided for each model of relay
board so as to prevent the relays from disconnection.
Installation of the relay disconnection prevention holder is indicated as follows.
B.H.Screw
Y9314LB (M3x14)
2-3.5 hole
Relay disconnection
prevention holder
Relay
Figure B6.6.1-1 Relay Disconnection Prevention Holder


The relay board parts shown in the table below have defined life spans.
IMPORTANT
sults.
CAUTION
• Prevent tools from entering inside the relay board during maintenance; it may cause elec-
tric shock or failure.
• Do not insert or remove relays or fuses while voltage is applied or current is being con-
ducted to terminals; there is a danger of electric shock. If it is necessary to insert or re-
move relays or fuses while current is applied, please contact Yokogawa’s sales agents.

The table below shows the recommended replacement cycle, for maintenance planning.
Table B6.6.2-1 Relay Board Parts Having Defined Life Spans

Recommended replacement
Parts name Parts No. Applied relay board
cycle
Relay A1725MR 100000 times All models of MRI
Relay S9165VM 100000 times MRO-114, 144, 154, 214, 244, 254
Relay S9162VM 100000 times MRO-124, 164, 224, 264
Relay S9163VM 100000 times MRO-134, 234
n Parts Replacement
The table below shows a list of replacement parts for relay board maintenance.
Table B6.6.2-2 Relay Board Parts Replacement

Parts Name Parts No. Description
Fuse S9528VK 1.6 A : for power supply
S9527VK 1 A : for load

Parts Name Parts No. Description
Terminal protection S9430VK Acrylic cover for 16-point MRI and MRO boards without power
cover terminals
S9431VK Acrylic cover for 16-point MRI and MRO boards with power ter-
minals
S9380VK Acrylic cover for 32-point MRI and MRO boards without power
terminals
S9381VK Acrylic cover for 32-point MRI and MRO boards with power ter-
minals
Screw Y9304LB Mounting screw (M3x4) for terminal cover
Relay disconnection T9056HY For 16-points MRI
prevention holder
T9056HV For 32-points MRI
T9056HQ For 16-points MRO
T9056HR For 32-points MRO
Screw Y9314LB Mounting screw (M3x14) for relay fastening

<B7. Signal Conditioner Cards and Nests> B7-1
B7. Signal Conditioner Cards and Nests

In this chapter, the signal conditioner cards and nests where the signal conditioner cards are
installed will be explained.

B7.1 Overview
This chapter gives an overview of signal conditioner cards and signal conditioner nests.
n Signal Conditioner Cards and Nests

Signal conditioner cards are capable of converting input and output signals, of isolating inputs
from outputs, and of isolating signals from power supply. Signal conditioner cards are used by
inserting them into a signal conditioner nest.
A signal conditioner nest can house up to 16 signal conditioner cards. A signal conditioner
nest is connected to I/O module(s) with KS cable.
n Specifications
SEE
ALSO For more information about the specifications of signal conditioner cards and signal conditioner nests, refer
to:
• The General Specifications “Signal Conditioner Cards (GS 33K50H80-50E)”
• The General Specifications "Signal Conditioner Nests (GS 33K50H70-50E).”
n List of Signal Conditioner Cards

The table below lists the available types of signal conditioner cards.
Table B7.1-1 Signal Conditioner Cards

Mod-
Types Names
els
Input cards ET5 Thermocouple input card (with built-in microprocessor)
ER5 Resistance thermometer sensor input card (with built-in microprocessor)
ES1 Potentiometer input card (with built-in microprocessor)
EM1 mV input card (with built-in microprocessor)
EH1 Input isolator card (1 to 5 V)
EH5 Input isolator card (1 to 5 V with square root) (with built-in microprocessor)
EA1 2-wire transmitter input card
EA2 2-wire transmitter input card (used with BRAIN series)
EA5 2-wire transmitter input card (with square root) (with built-in microprocessor)
EA7 2-wire transmitter input card (with HART communication function)
EP1 Pulse train input card
EP3 Frequency input card (with built-in microprocessor)
Output cards EC0 Control output isolator card (4 to 20 mA input / 4 to 20 mA output)
EC7 Control output isolator card (with HART communication function)
EA0 Output isolator card (1 to 5 V input / 4 to 20 mA output)
EH0 Output isolator card (1 to 5 V input / 1 to 5 V output)
Through cards EX1 Input/output through card
Communica- ESC Communication card for BRAIN terminal
tion cards

n Signal Conditioner Nests

Two types of signal conditioner nests are available: model MHM, control I/O signal conditioner
nest, and model MHC, I/O signal conditioner nest.
l Model MHM: Control I/O Signal Conditioner Nest

An MHM is a 19-inch rack mountable type nest that converts control I/O signals. MHC is con-
nectable to any of the following analog I/O modules.
Table B7.1-2 Analog I/O Modules Connectable to MHM

Types Models Names
For FIO AAB841 Analog I/O module
(1 to 5 V input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/ 8-channel output, non-isolated)
AAB842 Analog I/O module
(1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, non-
isolated)
AAP849 Pulse Input/analog output module for compatible PAC
(pulse count input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, non-Isola-
ted)
For RIO AMC80 Multipoint control analog I/O module
(1 to 5 V input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, non-isolated)
An MHM can house 16 signal conditioner cards (8 for inputs and 8 for outputs) and 1 commu-
nication card (Model ESC).
MHMs for AC power supply and MHMs for DC power supply are available. The height of the
AC-powered MHM is 5U, and the height of the DC-powered MHM is 3U (U: Unit; 1U=44.45
mm). Two types of AC-powered MHMs are available: 100 V models and 220 V models. For
both types, you can select between ‘single’ and ‘dual-redundant’ power supplies. Dual-redun-
dant power supply allows you to replace the power supply unit under power.
MHM is provided with two connectors for I/O to support dual-redundant analog I/O modules
and a ‘connector for secondary output’ for outputting input signals to another device such as a
recorder. For maintenance such as replacing outputting signal conditioner cards, a connector
for ‘Model SPBD Standby Manual Stations’ to backup ‘manipulated outputs’ is provided. Also,
AC-powered MHM has ‘alarm output terminals for AC power supply units.’
l Model MHC: I/O Signal Conditioner Nest

An MHC is a 19-inch rack mountable type nest that converts I/O signals. MHC is connectable
to any of the following analog I/O modules.
Table B7.1-3 Analog I/O Modules Connectable to MHC

Types Models Names
For FIO AAV141 Analog input module (1 to 5 V, 16-channel, non-isolated)
AAB141 Analog input module (1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA, 16-channel, non-isolated)
(1 to 5 V input, 1 to 5 V output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, non-isolated) (*1)
(1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA input, 4 to 20 mA output, 8-channel input/8-channel output, non-
isolated) (*1)
AAV542 Analog output module (-10 to +10 V, 16-channel, non-isolated)
AAP149 Pulse input module for compatible PM1
(pulse count, 16-channel, 0 to 6 kHz, non-isolated)
*1: For connecting AAB841 and AAB842 to an MHC, use the terminal block, ATV4A. With ATV4A, the output of AAB841 and
AAB842 will be 1 to 5 V.

An MHC can house 16 signal conditioner cards and 1 Communication card (called ESC card).
MHCs for AC power supply and MHCs for DC power supply are available. The height of the
AC-powered MHC is 5U, and the height of the DC-powered MHC is 3U (U: Unit; 1U=44.45
mm). Two types of AC-powered MHCs are available: 100 V models and 220 V models. For
both types, you can select between ‘single’ and ‘dual-redundant’ power supplies. Dual-redun-
dant power supply allows you to replace the power supply unit under power.
MHC has a ‘connector for secondary output’ for outputting input signals to another device
such as a recorder. Also, AC-powered MHC is provided with ‘alarm output terminals for AC
power supply units.’

<B7.2 Signal Conditioner Cards/Nests and Name of Each Part> B7-5
B7.2 Signal Conditioner Cards/Nests and Name

of Each Part
This chapter describes parts of the Signal Conditioner Card and the Signal Conditioner Nest.
n Signal Conditioner Card

The following figures illustrate parts of a Signal Conditioner Card.
Span Adjustments (*1) Tag No. Label
Connector
Main Label
Zero Adjustment
(*1)
Grip
Terminal Cover
Unit
Model MODEL SUFF Style Range INPUT
°C
ET5 *C 0 - 100
Input Type (*2)
Pt100(ITS-90)
TAG No. TAG No.
YOKOGAWA
Main Label Tag No. Label Tag No. Label

(without range) (with range)
*1: Zero Adjustment and Span Adjustment are applicable only to EA1, EA2, EH1, EA0, and EH0 cards.
*2: Input Type is applicable only to ET5 and ER5 cards, indicating the following.
ET5: Type K, E, J, T, R, S, B, N (JIS:1995, IEC:1995(ITS-90) )
ER5: Pt100(ITS-90)=JIS:1997/IEC:1995(ITS-90)Pt100
Pt100(IPTS-68)=JIS:1989(IPTS-68)Pt100
JPt100=JIS:1989JPt100
Pt50=JIS:1981Pt50
Figure B7.2-1 Names of Individual Parts on Signal Conditioner Card
n Signal Conditioner Nest

The following figures illustrate parts of a signal conditioner nest.

l MHM: Control I/O Signal Conditioner Nest (for AC Power Supply)

Alarm output terminals
L
for AC power supply Power supply
units N terminal
A
Power supply unit 2 (*2) Power supply unit 1 ESC card Grounding terminal
communication B
Power supply Power supply terminals (*1) SG
unit RDY lamp unit RDY lamp
CN3 Connector
CN1 Connector
CN2 Connector
A C Slot for ESC card

Slots for signal conditioner card (*3)
Connector
for SPBD (*4)
B + -
Signal input terminals Signal output terminals
*1: The ESC card communication terminals are for Yokogawa servicemen’ s use only.
*2: Power supply unit 2 is mounted for dual-redundant power supply only.
*3: Inputting signal conditioner cards must be connected to the odd-numbered slots from the leftmost, and the outputting
signal conditioner cards must be connected to the even-numbered slots from the left.
*4: EA7 cannot be used with SPBD standby manual station.
Figure B7.2-2 Names of Individual Parts on MHM (for AC Power Supply)
l MHM: Control I/O Signal Conditioner Nest (for DC Power Supply)

+
A Power supply
ESC card
- terminal
communication B
Slots for signal conditioner card (*2) terminals (*1) Grounding terminal
SG
CN1 Connector
CN2 Connector
Connector for SPBD (*3) Slot for ESC card

A C
CN3 Connector
B + -
Signal input terminals Signal output terminals
*2: Inputting signal conditioner cards must be connected to the odd-numbered slots from the leftmost, and the outputting
signal conditioner cards must be connected to the even-numbered slots from the left.
*3: EA7 cannot be used with SPBD standby manual station.
Figure B7.2-3 Names of Individual Parts on MHM (for DC Power Supply)

l MHC: I/O Signal Conditioner Nest (for AC Power Supply)

Alarm output terminals
for AC power supply L Power supply
units N terminal
A Grounding terminal
Power supply unit 2 (*2) Power supply unit 1 ESC card
communication B
Power supply Power supply terminals (*1) SG
unit RDY lamp unit RDY lamp
CN1 Connector
CN2 Connector
A C A C Slot for ESC card

Slots for signal conditioner card (*3)
B B
Signal terminals
*2: Power supply unit 2 is mounted for dual-redundant power supply only.
*3: If connected to an AAB841 Analog I/O module, the inputting signal conditioner cards must be connected to the 1st
through 8th slots from the leftmost, and the outputting signal conditioner cards must be connected to the 9th through
16th slots from the leftmost.
Figure B7.2-4 Names of Individual Parts on MHC (for AC Power Supply)
l MHC: I/O Signal Conditioner Nest (for DC Power Supply)

+ Power supply
ESC card A
- terminal
communication B
Slots for signal conditioner card (*2) terminals (*1) Grounding terminal
SG
CN1 Connector
CN2 Connector
A C A C Slot for ESC card
B B
Signal terminals
*2: If connected to an AAB841 Analog I/O module, the inputting signal conditioner cards must be connected to the 1st
through 8th slots from the leftmost, and the outputting signal conditioner cards must be connected to the 9th through
16th slots from the leftmost.
Figure B7.2-5 Names of Individual Parts on MHC (for DC Power Supply)


This chapter describes cable connection of a signal conditioner nest.

B7.3.1 Components
This section describes how to connect a signal conditioner nest to analog I/O module(s) and
other devices.
Use the correct cable specified in the following table for connecting a signal conditioner nest
to analog I/O module(s).
Table B7.3.1-1 Cable for Each Nest Model and I/O Module
Connectable Analog
Contact
Models Names Signal cable I/O Modules Remarks
points
(Terminal blocks)
MHM Control I/O KS1 AAB841 (ATM4A) 8-points in- Optional dualredundant I/O
Signal put / module
Conditioner 8-points
Nest output
AAB842 (ATM4A) 8-points in- Optional dualredundant I/O
put/ module
8-points
output
AAP849 8-points in- Optional dualredundant I/O
put / module
8-points
output
AMC80 8-points in- Optional dualredundant I/O
put / module
8-points
output
MHC I/O Signal KS2 AAV141(ATK4A) 16-points
Conditioner input
Nest
AAB141 (ATK4A) 16-points The input signal to EA7 is a 4 -
input 20mA current signal.
AAB841(ATV4A) 8-points in- Outputs 1 to 5 V
put /
8-points
output
AAB842 (ATV4A) 8-points in- Outputs 1 to 5 V
put/ The input signal to EA7 is a 4 -
8-points 20mA current signal.
output
AAV542(ATK4A) 16-points
input
AAP149 16-points
input
The following figure shows an example of connecting an AC-powered MHM to other devices.

AAB841, etc.
(Dual-redandant configuration)
FFCS
MHM Control I/O Signal Conditioner Nest
CN3 KS1 cable

Connector
CN1
Connector
CN2
Connector
KS4 Cable
Connector for SPBD

A C
TE08 terminal block

B + -
Signal input Signal
terminals output terminals
Recorder
SPBD
Standby
manual
Transmitter Valve station
Figure B7.3.1-1 Connecting MHM to Other Devices
The following figure shows an example of connecting an AC-powered MHC to other devices.

AAV141, etc,
FFCS
MHC I/O Signal Conditioner Nest
KS2 cable
CN1
Connector
CN2
Connector
KS2 cable
TE16 terminal block
Signal terminals
Recorder
Transmitter/Valve
Figure B7.3.1-2 Connecting MHC to Other Devices

B7.3.2 Power Supply Wiring

This section describes power supply wiring to the signal conditioner nest.
CAUTION
• When constructing power cables, use conduits to pass through cabinets for the following
purposes:
• The power cables could be cut by the metal plates if the cables are unprotected.
• The connection could be loosening from the weight of the power cable itself if the ca-
ble is unsupported.
• Switch off the power supply, then use tester to confirm that there is no power flow on the
power cables.
• Power cables should be placed at least 1 cm away from signal cables.
IMPORTANT
It is recommended to use a switch or breaker in the power supply wiring, so that the power
supply can be turned on/off for individual node units at maintenance.
n Wiring from Power Supply

Connect the power-supplying cable to the power-supply terminals on the signal conditioner
nest with M4 screws.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the power-supply terminals on the signal conditioner nest, refer to:
“n Signal Conditioner Nest” on page B7-5
For more information about the detailed power supply wiring, refer to:
n Wires and Ring Terminals Used

At the end of the wire, the ring terminals with insulating sleeves should be crimped. The ring
terminals and the crimp-on tool should come from the same maker.
The ring terminal specification is as follows.
insulating sleeve
inside diameter
Hole diameter


Nominal cross Insulating

sectional area Screw used Hole diameter Ring outside Ring Terminal sleeve
(mm) (mm) diameter (mm) length (mm) inside diameter
(mm2) (mm)
1.25 4 4.3 or more 8.5 or less approx.21 3.6 or more
2.0 4 4.3 or more 8.5 or less approx.21 4.3 or more

B7.3.3 Alarm Output for AC Power Supply Units and

Grounding
This section describes wiring to alarm output terminals for AC power supply units, and
grounding.
n Wiring to Alarm Output for AC Power Supply Units

AC-powered signal conditioner nests are provided with alarm output terminals for AC power
supply units. With the alarm output terminals for AC power supply unit, if the power supply
unit fails, the contact for output opens; if normal, the contact for output closes (NC).
The contact opens in the following abnormal cases.
• For single power supply, if the power supply unit fails.
• For dual-redundant power supply, if one of the two power supply units fails.
Make sure of the following when using the contact output:
• Avoid applying AC voltage directly to the contact output terminals, and always keep the
voltage within the rated value.
• When an external relay is driven by this contact, be sure to install a spark killer in order to
protect the relay contact.
Spark killer
External relay
24 V DC
READY contact
Figure B7.3.3-1 Use of Spark Killer
SEE
ALSO For more information about the alarm output terminals for AC power supply units on the signal conditioner
nest, refer to:
n Grounding
CAUTION
The grounding cable shall be connected to the grounding terminal which is located next to the
power supply terminal.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the grounding terminal on the Signal Conditioner Nest, refer to:
For more information about Grounding, refer to:


This section describes wiring field equipment to the signal conditioner nest.
n Terminals Connecting to Field Equipment

The terminals on the Signal Conditioner Nest to connect to field equipment are M4 screws.
l Wires and Ring Terminals Used

The specifications of the ring terminal are determined by the nominal cross sectional area
of the signal cable, the screw size, connector dimensions and so on.
IMPORTANT
• The wires should conform the equivalent specification of JIS C 3312.
Insulating sleeve
inside diameter
Hole diameter
C
Table B7.3.4-1 Ring Terminal Dimension

Nominal Insulating
cross Hole diame- Ring outside Dimension
Screw size Ring terminal sleeve
sectional ter diameter “C”
(mm) (mm) inside diame-
(mm) (mm) (mm)
area (mm2) ter (mm)
1.25 4 4.3 or more 8.2 or less approx.21 3.6 or more 7.0 or more
2.0 4 4.3 or more 8.7 or less approx.21 4.3 or more 7.1 or more
n Wiring to Field-connecting Terminals for Each Signal Conditioner

Card
On the signal conditioner nest, 3 field-connecting terminals, A, B, and C are provided for each
signal conditioner card. The wiring to the 3 field-connecting terminals differs depending on the
type of the signal conditioner cards as shown in the following figure.

Terminal Code
Signal Conditioner Card
A B C
EM1 + –
RJC Sensor
Thermocouple
ET5 (*1) RJC Sensor

Connect to Connect to
B terminal C terminal
ER5 (*2)
ES1 (*3)
100 % 0%
2-wire (voltage,
+ –
connect)
Power
EP1, 2-wire power supply Signal
supply
EP3
Power
3-wire power supply + –
supply
EH1, EH5 + –
EA1, EA2, EA5, EA7 + –

(*4) (*5)
– +
EH0, EA0, EC0, EC7 + –

EX1 + –
*1: The reference junction compensation sensor (RJC sensor) is attached to ET5. Connected it to B and C terminals of
signal conditioner.
*2: Must be wiring resistance of A as same as B.
*3: Must be wiring resistance of A as same as C.
*4: B terminal is used when combined with BARD safety barrier.
*5: In the case of 4-to-20 mA input that requires no transmitter power supply, connect to C-terminal (+) and B-terminal (-).
Input resistance of EA1, EA2, and EA5 is 250 ohm.
For EA7, input resistance is equivalent to 250 ohm (voltage drop is 5 V or less, at 20 mA input).
Figure B7.3.4-2 Wiring to Field-connecting Terminals for Each Signal Conditioner Card
SEE
ALSO For more information about wiring EP1 and EP3 to field equipment, refer to:
“l Setting Jumper Pins (applicable to EP1 and EP3 Cards)” on page B7-23

B7.4 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to mount the signal conditioner nests and how to replace signal
conditioner cards and other components.
CAUTION
this manual.
SEE

B7.4.1 Mounting Signal Conditioner Nest

This section describes how to mount the signal conditioner nest onto a rack and cautionary
information.
n Mounting a Signal Conditioner Nest onto a Rack

Observe the following when you mount a signal conditioner nest onto a rack.
l Isolation from the Rack

Isolate the signal conditioner nest from the rack by attaching insulating bushings. Fasten a
pair of insulating bushings together to each of the screw holes on the signal conditioner nest
to prevent the signal conditioner nest from touching the rack. And then screw the signal condi-
tioner nest to the rack. After screwing the signal conditioner nest to the rack, confirm that the
signal conditioner nest is electrically isolated. Insulating bushings are supplied with the signal
conditioner nest.
WARNING
When you install the ‘signal conditioner nest with insulating bushings attached’ on a rack, do
not keep the signal conditioner nest hung on loose screws for a long time. Too much force
may apply to the insulating bushings and cause damaged or broken insulating bushings.
1. Fasten a pair of insulating bushings together to each of the screw holes on the signal
conditioner nest.
The tapering end of the insulating bushings must come to the front side where a screw
enters.
2. Using four M5 screws, fix the device onto the rack.

● How to install insulating bushings
Insulating
Insulating bushing
bushing
(with a tapering)
M5 Screw
Rack
Signal conditioner nest

(front)
Rack
M5 Screws
Figure B7.4.1-1 Example of Mounting Signal Conditioner Nest on a Rack
IMPORTANT
Be sure to turn OFF power to the signal conditioner nest before you mount or dismount the
signal conditioner nest. If the power supply to the signal conditioner nest is dual-redundant,
turn OFF both the power supply units.
Turn OFF power to the signal conditioner nest as follows:
• If a switch or breaker connected to the nest is used, turn it off.
• If no switch or breaker is used, disconnect the power-supplying cable.
If multiple signal conditioner nests exist, all the nests should be grounded by connecting to
the earth terminal (protective, less than 100 ohm) separately.
n Cautions for Mounting Signal Conditioner Nests

Conditions for and restrictions on mounting signal conditioner nests are given below.
signal conditioner nests for AC power supply (100 V and 220 V) and signal conditioner nests
for DC power supply (24 V) are available.
The height of the AC-powered signal conditioner nest is 5U (Unit: 1U = 44.45 mm). The height
of the DC-powered signal conditioner nest is 3U. Observe the following when you mount mul-
tiple signal conditioner nests on top of each other onto the cabinet.
• There must be at least 100-mm space between the bottom of the cabinet and the bottom
of the lowest mounted nest (see the following figure).
• There must be at least 100-mm space between the top of the cabinet and the ceiling of
the control room. Provide a ventilation opening (at least 200 cm2) on the top of the cabi-
net (see the following figure).

• The 5U-sized signal conditioner nests and the 3U-sized signal conditioner nests must not
be installed on the same cabinet.
• When you install the 5U-sized signal conditioner nests on top of each other, 4 nests from
the top of the rack must be the max. If you want to install 5 nests or more, there must be
a space of at least 3U between the 4th nest and the 5th nest for heat ventilation, or you
must attach a heat shield plate between the 4th nest and the 5th nest (see the following
figure (a)).
• When you install the 3U-sized signal conditioner nests on top of each other, 3 nests from
the top of the rack must be the max. If you want to install 4 or more 3U-sized nests, there
must be a space of at least 3U between the 3rd nest and the 4th nest for heat ventilation,
or you must attach a heat shield plate between the 3rd nest and the 4th nest (see the
following figure (b)).
• If you have to install four 3U-sized signal conditioner nests on top of each other, a fan unit
(Model: SCFAN1) must be installed under the 4th signal conditioner nest. The SCFAN1
must touch the bottom of 4th signal conditioner nest (see the following figure (c)).
Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling
At least Ventilation At least Ventilation At least Ventilation

100 mm Opening 100 mm Opening 100 mm Opening
5U 3U 3U
3U 3U
5U
3U 3U
5U 3U 3U
Front Front Front
3U
5U Heat Shield
3U Plate 3U
Fan Unit
3U
3U 3U
5U Heat Shield
Plate At least At least
At least 100 mm 100 mm
100 mm
(a) (b) (c)
Figure B7.4.1-2 Restrictions on Mounting Signal Conditioner Nests

B7.4.2 Replacing Signal Conditioner Cards

Follow the steps below to replace signal conditioner cards.
n Steps for Replacing Signal Conditioner Cards

1. Hold the grip on the mounted signal conditioner card, draw it toward you and remove the
card.
2. Insert a new signal conditioner card along its guide rail on the nest and connect the card
to the connector on the back board.
3. If the terminal cover on the signal conditioner card is up, push it down.
Grip
Terminal Cover
Figure B7.4.2-1 Replacing Signal Conditioner Card
IMPORTANT
On the ET5 in style A and style B cards, an RJC sensor is embedded in the terminal cover. If
you replace the ET5 in style A or style B cards, be sure to push the terminal cover down to
make sure the RJC sensor touches the terminals.
n Cautions for Replacing Signal Conditioner Cards

Observe the following when you replace signal conditioner cards.
l Confirming Ranges (for ET5, ER5, ES1, EM1, and EP3 Cards)
On the ET5, ER5, ES1, EM1, and EP3 cards, the following items are factory-preset accord-
ing to user’s specification.
• Range
• Burnout detection setting (UP/DOWN/OFF) (*1)
*1: Burnout detection setting is not applicable to EP3 card.
The Range is shown on the Tag No. Label on the face of signal conditioner card. Make sure
that the Range of the replacing card is the same as that of the replaced card.
To check the burnout detection setting, use a BRAIN Terminal. Connect the BRAIN Terminal
to the card and check the burnout detection setting.

You can change the range and burnout detection setting on the BRAIN Terminal. If you
change the range, correct the range shown on the Tag No. Label, too.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to use the BRAIN Terminal, refer to:
B7.5, “Setting on BRAIN Terminal” on page B7-29
For more information about the Tag No. Label on signal conditioner cards, refer to:
“n Signal Conditioner Card” on page B7-5
l Connecting an RJC Sensor (applicable to ET5 in Style C cards)

On the ET5 in Style A and B cards, an RJC sensor is embedded in the terminal cover on the
signal conditioner card. But with the ET5 in style C cards, the RJC sensor is supplied as a
standard accessory and it must be connected to the terminals B and C on the signal condi-
tioner nest.
If you replace an ET5 in style A or in style B card with an ET5 in style C card, or if you add an
ET5 in style C card to the signal conditioner nest, connect the RJC sensor to the terminals B
and C on the signal conditioner nest.
RJC Sensor
A terminal C terminal
Connect to Connect to
B terminal C terminal
RJT Sensor
B terminal
Figure B7.4.2-2 Connecting an RJC Sensor
SEE
ALSO For more information about connecting an RJC sensor, refer to:
“n Wiring to Field-connecting Terminals for Each Signal Conditioner Card” on page B7-16
l Setting Jumper Pins (applicable to EP1 and EP3 Cards)

With the EP1 pulse train input cards and the EP3 frequency input cards, the following setting
elements exist.
The setting is made by inserting a jumper socket into the jumper pins as shown in the follow-
ing figures.
Change the settings if necessary. Defaults are set to OFF for all.
• Setting load resistance value
Set the load resistance value for current pulses.
• Filter
If a dry contact (such as a mechanical relay) with inputs of 10 Hz or less pulses causes
chattering noises, turn the filter “ON” to eliminate the noises.
• Selecting power supply to transmitter (applicable to EP3 cards only)
For connecting an EP3 card to a three-wire transmitter, select the voltage of power supply
(12 V DC 30 mA or 24 V DC 30 mA).
Setting jumper pins to ON: 12 V DC , Setting jumper pins to OFF: 24 V DC

200
510 (500) For current-pulse load resistance
1K
FILTER For filtering inputs
(12 V/24 V DC) For switching ‘power supply for transmitter’
(Applicable to EP3 only)
ON OFF
Figure B7.4.2-3 Jumper Pins on EP1 and EP3 Cards
Plug a jumper socket to jump the pin2 and pin3.

OFF
Jumper socket Plug a jumper socket to jump the pin1 and pin2.
ON
jumper pins
1 2 3
ON OFF
Figure B7.4.2-4 Setting Jumper Pins to ON/OFF with a Jumper Plug
Table B7.4.2-1 Jumper Pin Settings and Load Resistance Values

Jumper pin settings
Load resistance
200 510(500) (*1) 1K
OFF OFF ON 1 k ohm
OFF ON OFF 510 ohm (500 ohm) (*1)
OFF ON ON 338 ohm (333 ohm) (*1)
ON OFF OFF 200 ohm
ON OFF ON 167 ohm
ON ON OFF 147 ohm (143 ohm) (*1)
ON ON ON 126 ohm (125 ohm) (*1)
*1: The values in parentheses indicate those of EP3 cards.
The following figures show the settings of jumper pins depending on input types.
IMPORTANT
Note that the position of the terminals A and B on the EP1 and EP3 cards is reversed from
the position of the corresponding terminals on the connected I/O module for pulse inputs
(Models: APM11, AAP135, AAP149, and AAP849).

EP1/EP3
Jumper pin
B 200
Transmitter 510(500) (*1)
A 1K
FILTER
OFF OFF ON OFF
C RL FIL
Set all resistances to OFF.

If noise must be eliminated, set Filter to ON.
*1: The value in ( ) is of EP3.
Figure B7.4.2-5 No-Voltage Contact Input
EP1/EP3
Jumper pin
B 200
Transmitter 510(500) (*1)
+ A 1K
FILTER
OFF OFF ON OFF
- C RL FIL

Set Filter to OFF.
Figure B7.4.2-6 Voltage Pulse Input
EP1/EP3 Jumper pin

Transmitter
B 200
510(500) (*1)
1K
A FILTER
ON OFF
ON OFF
RL FIL Set resistance(s) to ON based on
C
the preceding table.
(An example of setting to 1 k ohm)
Set Filter to OFF.
EP1/EP3 Jumper pin

Transmitter
B 200
510(500) (*1)
A 1K
FILTER
OFF OFF ON OFF
C RL FIL

Set Filter to OFF.

l Setting Jumper Pins (applicable to EA7 Cards)

To enable or disable the HART communication of EA7, the jumper sockets are used for jump-
ing the jumper pins of J10 and jumper pins of J110.
The factory default position for the slide switch on HART board is STD position.
HART
OFF ON
HART board
J110
STD
SP
OFF ON
HART
J10
Slide switch
Figure B7.4.2-9 Jumper Pin on EA7 Card
Table B7.4.2-2 Enable or Disable HART Communication of EA7

HART communication function
Jumper
ON OFF
J10
OFF ON OFF ON
J110
OFF ON OFF ON
IMPORTANT
EA7 Card is used with the following type of HART compatible field devices of YOKOGAWA,
the slide switch should be placed to SP position.
• Temperature Transmitter YTA (Style1 and 2) produced before 2003. (*1)
• Vortex flowmeters DY, DYA produced before 2003. (*1)
• Magnetic flowmeters AM11, AE, AE14, SE and SE14.
*1: The slide switch can be placed to SP position despite the above products are sold to customers in 2003 or later.
Otherwise, keep the slide switch to STD position.
l Setting Jumper Pins (applicable to EC7 Card)

To enable or disable the HART communication of EC7, a jumper socket is used for jumping
the jumper pins of J110.

J110
OFF ON
HART
Figure B7.4.2-10 Jumper Pin on EC7 Card
Table B7.4.2-3 Enable or Disable HART Communication of EC7

HART communication function
Jumper
ON OFF
J110
OFF ON OFF ON


IMPORTANT
sults.

nance.
Table B7.4.3-1 Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans

Recommen-
Part num- Replacement by
Part name ded replace- Remarks
ber user
ment cycle
Power supply unit S9101UD 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg
(for 100/110/115/120 V AC)
S9100UD 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg
(for 220/230/240 V AC)

<B7.5 Setting on BRAIN Terminal> B7-29
B7.5 Setting on BRAIN Terminal

On the BRAIN Terminal, BT200, parameters of a signal conditioner card with a built-in micro-
processor can be displayed and changed. This chapter describes how to display and change
the parameters of a signal conditioner card using the BRAIN Terminal, BT200.

B7.5.1 BRAIN Terminal

This section describes the BRAIN Terminal, BT200.
n BRAIN Terminal, BT200

Available models of signal conditioner card with built-in microprocessor that can be connected
to the BRAIN Terminal are listed below. These models retain the set values to parameters.
• ET5:Thermocouple input card
• ER5:Resistance thermometer sensor input card
• ES1:Potentiometer input card
• EM1:mV input card
• EH5:Input isolator card
• EA5:2-wire transmitter input card
• EP3:Frequency input card
BRAIN Terminal, BT200 is a portable terminal used for communicating with devices that sup-
port BRAIN communications. Connect the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 to a signal conditioner
card with a built-in microprocessor to enable you to display and set parameters.
SEE
ALSO For more information about BRAIN Terminal, BT200, refer to:
The User’s Manual “BT200 BRAIN Terminal” (IM 01C00A11-01E)
For more information about parameters of signal conditioner cards, refer to:
B7.5.3, “Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards” on page B7-37
n Connecting to a Signal Conditioner Card

You can directly connect the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 to a signal conditioner card or connect
via a signal conditioner nest.
For directly connecting to the signal conditioner card, connect the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 to
the extension card (Model: EXT). This connects the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 and the signal
conditioner card, one-to-one.
For connecting via a signal conditioner nest, you must connect a communication card (Model:
ESC) to the signal conditioner nest first. Then connect the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 to the
ESC card on the signal conditioner nest. When you use the BT200 via the ESC card, you
must specify the slot number of the signal conditioner card before you set the parameter(s).
The following figure shows the connection between the BT200 and the signal conditioner
card. Use the Communication Cable with 5-pin connector (Part No. : F9182EE) specified for
the BT200 in either case.

Signal conditioner nest
Extension card (EXT card)
Signal Conditioner Card
Communication Cable
with 5-pin connector Communication card (ESC card)
BRAIN Terminal, BT200
Figure B7.5.1-1 Connecting to a Signal Conditioner Card
n Keys and Their Functions

l Key Layout and Monitor Display
The following figure shows the key layout and monitor displays on the BRAIN Terminal,
BT200.
LCD
(21 characters
× 8 lines)
If BATTERY is shown on the
display, it indicates that the
battery is weak.
Function keys MENU PANEL Messages

Movement keys Use to execute the MENU BATTERY
· Select items. commands displayed at A : DISPLAY
B : SET
· Move the cursor. the bottom of the screen. C : ADJUST
Menu choices
· Change pages. (up to six displayed)
Panel title
Power ON/OFF key ENT key HOME SET ADJ ESC Function commands
· Enters selected items.
Alphanumeric keys · Sets up input data on the PARAMETER PANEL
· Enter digits. connected instrument. PARAMETER
A01: INPUT
· Enter letters in · Runs BT200 functions. 300 deg C
combination with A02: OUTPUT Parameters
75.0 %
the shift keys. A03: STATUS (up to three displayed)
00
Shift keys DATA DIAG ESC Function commands
Figure B7.5.1-2 Key Layout and Monitor Displays

l Function Keys
The function of each function key is determined by your choice of menu and is shown as the
function commands in the monitor.
Table B7.5.1-1 List of Function Commands

Command Function
ADJ Displays the ADJ menu
CAPS/caps Selects uppercase or lowercase
CLR Erases input data or deletes all data
DATA Updates parameter data
DEL Deletes one character
DIAG Calls the self-check panel
ESC Returns to the most recent display
HOME Displays the menu panel
NO Quits setup and returns to the previous display
OK Proceeds to the next panel
PARM Enters the parameter number setup mode
SET Displays the SET menu
SLOT Returns to the slot selection panel
UTIL Calls the utility panel
COPY (*1) Prints out parameters on display
FEED (*1) Paper feed
LIST (*1) Lists all parameters in the menu
PON/POFF (*1) Automatic printout mode on or off
PRNT (*1) Changes to the print mode
GO (*1) Starts printing
STOP (*1) Cancels printing
*1: These commands are available on BT200-P00 (BRAIN Terminal with a Printer) only.
n Functional Structure
The BRAIN Terminal, BT200 has the online functions and offline functions as shown in the fol-
lowing figure.

<POWER SWITCH ON> (In the instance of connecting to CT5 Style B signal conditioner card) [PARAMETER PANEL]
PARAM
B10: ZERO
0.0 deg C
[STARTUP PANEL] [INITIAL DATA PANEL] B11: SPAN
--WELCOME-- PARAM PARAM
BRAIN TERMINAL 01: MODEL B04: COMMENT2
ID: BT200 CT5* B BTM TEMP
02: TAG NO. [MENU PANEL] B06: TYPE
check connection TIC-101
push ENTER key 03: SELF CHECK MENU PARAM
GOOD A:DISPLAY B01: TAG NO. 1
(*1) B:SET
UTIL FEED OK TIC-101
C:ADJUST B02: TAG NO. 2
B03: COMMENT1
TOWER (*1)
HOME SET ADJ ESC DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
[Offline] [Online]
BT200 is connected (ESC)
UTILITY to an ESC card.
1.ID
2.security code SLOT FUNC SET
3.LANGUAGE SELECT 1.MENU B01: TAG NO.1
4.LCD CONTRAST SLOT NO. 2.UPLOAD TO BT200 TIC-101
5.PRINTER ADJUST 3.DOWNLOAD TO INST TIC-101
00 4.PRINT ALL DATA
ESC
CLR HOME SET ADJ ESC CODE CAPS CLR ESC
[SLOT PANEL] [FUNCTION PANEL] [SETUP PANEL]
*1: Available on BT200-P00 (BRAIN Terminal with a Printer) only.
Figure B7.5.1-3 Functional Structure of BRAIN Terminal BT200

B7.5.2 Using BRAIN Terminal

This section describes the steps to display and change parameters of a signal conditioner
card using the BRAIN Terminal, BT200.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to use the BRAIN Terminal, BT200, refer to:
n Steps to Display Parameters

Follow the steps below to display parameters of a signal conditioner card on the BRAIN Ter-
minal, BT200 monitor. An ET5 card in style C is used as an example.
1. Power on the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 and connect the cable to an EXT card or ESC
card.
2. Press the ENT key.
3. If the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 is connected to an ESC card, [SLOT PANEL] appears.
SLOT
SLOT NO.
00
CLR
Figure B7.5.2-1 SLOT PANEL
TIP If the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 is connected to an EXT card, [INITIAL DATA PANEL] appears instead of [SLOT
PANEL]. In that case, skip the steps 3 and 4 and go to the step 5.
4. Enter the slot number of the signal conditioner card for which parameters you want
shown. Press the ENT key.
5. [INITIAL DATA PANEL] appears.
6. Press the ENT key with [INITIAL DATA PANEL] on. [MENU PANEL] appears.
MENU
A:DISPLAY
B:SET
C:ADJUST
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.2-2 MENU PANEL
7. Use the Movement keys and select a menu (“A:DISPLAY”, “B:SET”, or “C:ADJUST”), and
then press the ENT key. [PARAMETER PANEL] appears.
PARAM
A01: INPUT
300 deg C
A02: OUTPUT
75.0 %
A03: STATUS
00
DATA DIAG ESC
Figure B7.5.2-3 PARAMETER PANEL (Case where “A:DISPLAY” is selected)
8. Use the Movement keys and the function keys as necessary to switch panels.

n Steps to Change Parameters

Follow the steps below to change parameters of a signal conditioner card on the BRAIN Ter-
minal, BT200 monitor. The Tag NO. of an ET5 in style C card is used as an example.
1. Power on the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 and connect the cable to an EXT card or ESC
card.
2. Press the ENT key.
3. If the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 is connected to an ESC card, [SLOT PANEL] appears.
SLOT
SLOT NO.
00
CLR
TIP If the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 is connected to an EXT card, [INITIAL DATA PANEL] appears instead of [SLOT
PANEL]. In that case, skip the steps 3 and 4 and go to the step 5.
4. Enter the slot number of the Signal Conditioner Card for which parameters you want to
change. Press the ENT key.
5. [INITIAL DATA PANEL] appears.
6. Press the ENT key with [INITIAL DATA PANEL] on. [MENU PANEL] appears.
MENU
A:DISPLAY
B:SET
C:ADJUST
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.2-5 MENU PANEL
7. Use the Movement keys and select “B:SET” or “C:ADJUST”, and then press the ENT key.
[PARAMETER PANEL] appears.
PARAM
B01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
B02: TAG NO. 2
B03: COMMENT 1
TOWER
DATA DIAG ESC
Figure B7.5.2-6 PARAMETER PANEL (Case where “B:SET” is selected on the MENU PANEL)
8. Use the Movement keys and select the parameter you want to change. Press the ENT
key. [SETUP PANEL] appears.
SET
B01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
TIC-101
CODE CAPS CLR ESC
Figure B7.5.2-7 SETUP PANEL (Case where “B01:TAG NO. 1” is selected on the PARAMETER PANEL)

9. Using the Shift key and Alphanumeric keys, enter a new parameter.
SET
B01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
TRC-101a
CODE CAPS CLR ESC
Figure B7.5.2-8 SETUP PANEL (Case where “TRC-101a” is entered)
10. Press the ENT key, and the value you entered flashes. Confirm that the value is correct
and press the ENT key again. This will change the parameter stored in the signal condi-
tioner card.
SET
B01: TAG NO. 1
TRC-101a
NG OK
Figure B7.5.2-9 SETUP PANEL (when setting is completed)
11. If you complete the setting, press the F4 key “OK”, and [PARAMETER PANEL] will ap-
pear.
If you want to undo the setting, press the F3 key “NG”. And do the setting again.

B7.5.3 Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards

This section describes the parameters for the signal conditioner cards.
n Lists of Parameters
Parameters for signal conditioner cards are determined by their Style.
The following tables list parameters for each Style.
l Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style A
Table B7.5.3-1 List of Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style A (1/2)
Data
No. Item Name
EM1 ET5 ER5
01 Model MODEL EM1*A ET5*A ER5*A
02 Tag number TAG NO 16 alphanumeric characters
03 Self-diagnosis SELF CHK OK, GOOD or ERROR
A Display item DISPLAY
A01 Input value INPUT -50.00 to 150.00 mV -273.0 to 2000.0 deg -210.0 to 670.0 deg
C C
A02 Output value OUTPUT -6.3 to 106.3 %
A03 Status STATUS FF (two digits hexadecimal)
A04 Rev. No. REV NO 0.00n (n: Rev. No.)
B Set item SET
B01 Tag number 1 TAG NO.1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of tag
number)
B02 Tag number 2 TAG NO.2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of tag num-
ber)
B03 Comment 1 COM- 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of com-
MENT1 ments)
B04 Comment 2 COM- 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of com-
MENT2 ments)
B05 ER5 input type INP TYPE PT/JPT (*1)
B06 ET5 input type INP TYPE K/E/J/T/R/S/B
B07 ES1,EM1 input INP TYPE H RANGE/L RANGE
type
B08 ES1 total resist- RESIST
ance
B09 Temperature unit UNIT deg C/deg F/K deg C/deg F/K
B10 Zero point ZERO -50.00 to 150.00 mV -273.0 to 1999.0 deg -210.0 to 670.0 deg
C (*2) C (*2)
B11 Span SPAN 10.0 to 100.00 mV 20.0 to 2272.0 deg C 1.0 to 880.0 deg
(*2) C(*2)
B12 Burnout BURN OUT OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN
B13 Set error SET ERR OK or ERROR
C Adjustment item ADJUST
C01 0% output cor- OUT 0% -1.00 to 1.00 % -1.00 to 1.00 % -1.00 to 1.00 %
rection
C02 100% output cor- OUT 100% -1.00 to 1.00 % -1.00 to 1.00 % -1.00 to 1.00 %
rection

Data
No. Item Name
EM1 ET5 ER5
C03 BURN-OUT cor- WIRING R EXECUTE/RESET EXECUTE/RESET EXECUTE/RESET
rection (BURN-OUT correc- (BURN-OUT correc- (Wiring resistance
/Wiring resist- tion) (*3) tion) (*3) error correction) (*4)
ance error cor-
rection
*1: PT=JIS:1989(IPTS-68)Pt100, JPT=JIS:1989JPt100
*2: The values shown here are those that can be set on BRAIN Terminal. The measurable values are indicated in the General
Specification.
*3: If the external leadwire resistance value is large, an error is caused by BURN-OUT current. The BURN-OUT correction is a
function to correct this error. Use this function when you use the BARD safety barrier.
*4: The wiring resistance error correction is a function to correct the error caused by the imbalanced external leadwire resistance
value. Use this function when you use the BARD safety barrier.
Table B7.5.3-2 List of Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style A (2/2)
Data
No. Item Name
ES1 EA5/EH5
01 Model MODEL ES1*A EA5*A/EH5*A
03 Self-diagnosis SELF CHK OK, GOOD or ERROR
A Display item DISPLAY
A01 Input value INPUT 0.0 to 2000.0 OHM -6.3 to 106.3 %
A02 Output value OUTPUT -6.3 to 106.3 %
A04 Rev. No. REV NO 0.00n (n: Rev. No.)
B Set item SET
B01 Tag number 1 TAG NO.1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of
tag number)
B02 Tag number 2 TAG NO.2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of
tag number)
B03 Comment 1 COMMENT1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of
comments)
B04 Comment 2 COMMENT2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of
comments)
B05 ER5 input type INP TYPE
B06 ET5 input type INP TYPE
B07 ES1,EM1 input type INP TYPE H RANGE/L RANGE
B08 ES1 total resistance RESIST 100.0 to 2000.0 OHM
B09 Temperature unit UNIT
B10 Zero point ZERO 0.0 to 2000.0 OHM
B11 Span SPAN 10.0 to 2000.0 OHM
B12 Burnout BURN OUT OFF/UP/DOWN
B13 Set error SET ERR OK or ERROR
C Adjustment item ADJUST
C01 0% output correction OUT 0% -1.00 to 1.00 % -1.00 to 1.00 %
C02 100% output correc- OUT 100% -1.00 to 1.00 % -1.00 to 1.00 %
tion
C03 BURN-OUT correction/ WIRING R EXECUTE/RESET
Wiring resistance error (Wiring resistance error cor-
correction rection) (*1)

*1: The wiring resistance error correction is a function to correct the error caused by the imbalanced external leadwire resistance
value. Use this function when you use the BARD safety barrier.
l Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style B
Table B7.5.3-3 List of Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style B (1/2)
Data
No. Item Name
EM1 ET5 ER5
01 Model MODEL EM1*B ET5*B ER5*B
03 Self-diagnosis SELF CHK GOOD or ERROR
A00 Display item DISPLAY
A01 Input value INPUT nnn.nn mV (*1) nnnn.n deg C (*1) nnn.n deg C (*1)
A02 Output value OUTPUT nnn.n % (*1)
A04 Rev. No. REV NO n.000 (n: Rev. No.)
B00 Set item SET
number)
B02 Tag number 2 TAG NO.2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of tag
number)
B03 Comment 1 COM- 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of
MENT1 comments)
MENT2 ments)
B05 ER5 input type INP TYPE PT/JPT (*2)
B06 ET5 input type INP TYPE B/E/J/K/T/R/S/N
B07 Low cut LOW CUT
B08 ES1 total resistance RESIST
B09 Temperature unit UNIT deg C/deg F/K deg C/deg F/K
B10 Zero point ZERO nnn.nn mV (*1) nnnn.n deg C (*1) nnn.n deg C (*1)
B11 Span (*3) SPAN nnn.nn mV (*1) nnnn.n deg C (*1) nnn.n deg C (*1)
B12 Burnout BURN OUT OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN
C00 Adjustment item ADJUST
C01 0% output correction OUT 0% -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 %
C02 100% output correc- OUT 100% -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 %
tion
C03 BURN-OUT correc- WIRING R EXECUTE/RESET EXECUTE/RESET
tion (BURN-OUT correc- (BURN-OUT correc-
tion) (*4) tion) (*4)
C04 Input zero adjust- ZERO ADJ nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn OHM
ment RST/INC/DEC (*1) RST/INC/DEC (*1) RST/INC/DEC (*1)
C05 Input span adjust- SPAN ADJ nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn OHM
C06 Input zero adjust- ZERO ADJ
ment
C07 Input span adjust- SPAN ADJ
ment
*1: "n" denotes one numeric character.
*2: PT=JIS:1989(IPTS-68)Pt100, JPT=JIS:1989JPt100

*3: The values shown here for Span are those that can be set on BRAIN Terminal. The measurable values are indicated in the
General Specification.
Table B7.5.3-4 List of Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style B (2/2)
Data
No. Item Name
ES1 EA5/EH5 EP3
01 Model MODEL ES1*B EA5*B/EH5*B EP3*A (*1)
A01 Input value INPUT nnnnn.n OHM (*2) nnn.n % (*2) nnnnn.n Hz (*2)
A04 Rev. No. REV NO n.000 (n: Rev. No.)
B00 Set item SET
number)
number)
B03 Comment 1 COM- 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of
MENT1 comments)
MENT2 ments)
B07 Low cut LOW CUT 0.3 to 100.0 % nnnnn.n Hz (*2)
(*3)
B08 ES1 total resistance RESIST nnnnn.n OHM (*2)
(*4)
B10 Zero point ZERO nnnnn.n OHM (*2) nnnnn.n Hz (*2)
(*3)
B11 Span (*4) SPAN nnnnn.n OHM (*2) nnnnn.n Hz (*2)
(*3)
tion
C03 BURN-OUT correc- WIRING R
tion
C04 Input zero adjust- ZERO ADJ nnn.nnn mV
ment RST/INC/DEC (*2)
C05 Input span adjust- SPAN ADJ nnn.nnn mV
ment RST/INC/DEC (*2)
C06 Input zero adjust- ZERO ADJ nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
ment
C07 Input span adjust- SPAN ADJ nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
ment

*1: For EP3 cards, the parameters in this table are those for the Style A cards.
*2: "n" denotes one numeric character.
*3: For EP3 cards, the significant figure for Low cut, Zero point, and Span is 4 digits from the head.
*4: The values shown here for ES1 total resistance and Span are those that can be set on BRAIN Terminal. The measurable
values are indicated in the General Specification.
l Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style C
Table B7.5.3-5 List of Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style C (1/2)
Data
No. Item Name
EM1 ET5 ER5
01 Model MODEL EM1*C ET5*C ER5*C
A01 Input value INPUT nnn.nn mV (*1) nnnn.n deg C/K (*1) (*2)
A04 Rev. No. REV NO nnnn.xxx (nnnn: Rev. No. of ROM, xxx:Rev. No. of EEPROM)
B00 Set item SET
number)
number)
B03 Comment 1 COM- 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of com-
MENT1 ments)
MENT2 ments)
B05 ER5 input type INP TYPE PT/JPT/PT100-90/
PT50(*3)
B06 ET5 input type INP TYPE K/E/J/T/R/S/B/N
B07 Low cut LOW CUT
B08 ES1 total resistance RESIST
B09 Temperature unit UNIT deg C/-----/K (*4)
B10 Zero point ZERO nnn.nn mV (*1) nnnn.n deg C/K (*1) nnnn.n deg C/K (*1)
(*2) (*2)
B11 Span (*5) SPAN nnn.nn mV (*1) nnnn.n deg C/K (*1) nnnn.n deg C/K (*1)
(*2) (*2)
B12 Burnout BURN OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN
OUT
C01 0% output correction OUT 0% -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 %
C02 100% output correc- OUT -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 % -10.00 to 10.00 %
tion 100%
C03 BURN-OUT correc- WIRING R EXECUTE/RESET EXECUTE/RESET
tion (BURN-OUT correc- (BURN-OUT correc-
tion) (*6) tion)(*6)
C04 Input zero adjust- ZERO nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn OHM
ment ADJ RST/INC/DEC (*1) RST/INC/DEC (*1) RST/INC/DEC (*1)
C05 Input span adjust- SPAN ADJ nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn mV nnn.nnn OHM

Data
No. Item Name
EM1 ET5 ER5
C06 Input zero adjust- ZERO
ment ADJ
C07 Input span adjust- SPAN ADJ
ment
C08 RJC ON/OFF RJC ON/OFF
*1: “n” denotes one numeric character.
*2: If you select Suffix code /DF, and if you select “deg F” for the parameter B09, the unit, deg F is shown.
*3: PT=JIS:1989(IPTS-68)Pt100, JPT=JIS:1989JPt100, PT100-90=JIS:1997/IEC:1995(ITS-90)Pt100, PT50=JIS:1981Pt50
*4: Do not select “----”. If you select Suffix code /DF, this parameter field shows “deg C/deg F/K,” and you can select any of the
three.
*5: The values shown here for Span are those that can be set on BRAIN Terminal. The measurable values are indicated in the
General Specification.
Table B7.5.3-6 List of Parameters for Signal Conditioner Cards in Style C (2/2)
Data
No. Item Name
ES1 EA5/EH5
01 Model MODEL ES1*C EA5*C/EH5*C
A01 Input value INPUT nnnnn.n OHM (*1) nnn.n % (*1)
A04 Rev. No. REV NO nnnn.xxx (nnnn: Rev. No. of ROM, xxx: Rev. No. of EEPROM)
B00 Set item SET
B01 Tag number 1 TAG NO.1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of
tag number)
B02 Tag number 2 TAG NO.2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of
tag number)
B03 Comment 1 COMMENT1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the former half of
comments)
B04 Comment 2 COMMENT2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in the latter half of
comments)
B07 Low cut LOW CUT 0.3 to 100.0 %
B08 ES1 total resistance RESIST nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
(*2)
B10 Zero point ZERO nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
B11 Span(*2) SPAN nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
tion

Data
No. Item Name
ES1 EA5/EH5
C03 BURN-OUT correc- WIRING R
tion
C04 Input zero adjustment ZERO ADJ nnn.nnn %
RST/INC/DEC (*1)
C05 Input span adjustment SPAN ADJ nnn.nnn %
RST/INC/DEC (*1)
C06 Input zero adjustment ZERO ADJ nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
C07 Input span adjustment SPAN ADJ nnnnn.n OHM (*1)
C08 RJC ON/OFF RJC
*1: “n” denotes one numeric character.
*2: The values shown here for ES1 total resistance and Span are those that can be set on BRAIN Terminal. The measurable
values are indicated in the General Specification. In particular, if you set a value larger than 2 kΩ to Span, measurement be-
comes incorrect. Be sure to set a value that is not larger than 2 kΩ to Span.
n Parameter Details
Parameters which need to be detailed are listed below.
l STATUS (A03)
This parameter indicates the result of self check with status detail codes. The following tables
list the status detail codes that the STATUS (A03) can take and their meanings.
Table B7.5.3-7 Status Detail Codes (in Style A)

Status de- Self
Meaning Release conditions
tail codes check
40 OK Power failure history Set “00”.
20 GOOD WDT timeout history Set “00”. Power-off clears this status.
10 ERROR Wrong parameter Set a correct parameter. During the set-
ting, output is held. Power-off clears this
status.
08 ERROR Input overshoots. Enter a value within the range. Power-off
(Input value is outside the range of -6.3 clears this status.
to 106.3 %)
Table B7.5.3-8 Status Detail Codes (in Style B)

Status de- Self
tail codes check
40 GOOD Power failure history Set “00”.
20 GOOD WDT timeout history Set “00”. Power-off clears this status.
08 GOOD Input overshoots. Enter a value within the range. Power-off
(Input value is outside the range of -6.3 clears this status.
to 106.3 %)
Table B7.5.3-9 Status Detail Codes (in Style C)

Status de- Self
tail codes check
80 GOOD RJC error Connect the RJC sensor correctly. (*1)
40 GOOD Power failure history or WDT timeout Set “00”.
history
08 GOOD Input overshoots. Enter a value within the range.
04 GOOD Low cut Enter a value larger than the Low cut. (*2)

Status de- Self
tail codes check
02 ERROR EEPROM sum check error history or None
EEPROM error history
01 ERROR A/D error history None
*1: This status detail code is applicable only to ET5 cards.
*2: With the ET5 cards and ER5 cards, this status detail code is not displayed.
l Low cut (B07)

This parameter is applicable to EA5 in style B and C cards, EH5 cards, and EP3 in style A
cards.
This parameter needs to be defined when you change the input processing from linearization
computation to square root computation.
For the EA5 in style B and C cards, and EH5 cards, the values 0.3 to 100 % can be set to this
parameter. The factory-preset default is 0.6 %. The hysteresis value for the Low cut is 0.2 %
of the span and is fixed. The Low cut value for EA5 in style A cards and EH5 cards is fixed to
0.6 %.
For the EP3 in style A cards, the values between 0 through 30000 Hz can be set to this pa-
rameter. The factory-preset default is 0.01 Hz. The hysteresis value for the Low cut is 0.1 % of
the span and is fixed.
l Input zero adjustment (C04)

This parameter is applicable to ET5 in style B and C cards, ER5 cards, EM1 cards, EA5
cards, and EH5 cards.
This parameter is for zero adjustment for the input A/D converter. Customer can maintain ac-
curacy after a range change.
“Increase (INC)”, “Decrease (DEC)”, and “Reset correction (RST)” are provided for setting the
“Input zero adjustment”. Repeat the INC, DEC, and RST to perform “Input zero adjustment.”
l Input span adjustment (C05)

This parameter is applicable to ET5 in style B and C cards, ER5 cards, EM1 cards, EA5
cards, and EH5 cards.
This parameter is for span adjustment for the input A/D converter. Customer can maintain ac-
curacy after a range change.
“Increase (INC)”, “Decrease (DEC)”, and “Reset correction (RST)” are provided for setting the
“Input span adjustment”. Repeat the INC, DEC, and RST to perform “Input span adjustment.”
l Input zero adjustment (C06)

This parameter is applicable to ES1 in style B and C cards only.
This parameter is for one-touch range settings. Customer can maintain accuracy after a range
change.
Input 0 % from the field, and with this parameter press the ENTER key twice. The input value
is set as the 0 % for the range.
l Input span adjustment (C07)

This parameter is applicable to ES1 in style B and C cards only.
This parameter is for one-touch range settings. Customer can maintain accuracy after a range
change.
Input 100 % from the field, and with this parameter press the ENTER key twice. The input val-
ue is set as the 100 % for the range.

IMPORTANT
Before tuning the C06 (Input zero adjustment) and C07 (Input span adjustment) parameters
of ES1, it is necessary to check that the parameter of B08 (ES1 total resistance) has been
properly entered.
l RJC ON/OFF (C08)

This parameter is applicable only to ET5 in style C cards.
If this parameter is set to OFF, the RJC (Reference Junction Compensation) function is tem-
porarily halted. This setting is cleared if the power is turned OFF.

B7.5.4 Setting Signal Conditioner Communication Card

Parameters
This section describes the steps to display and change parameters of a signal conditioner
card using the BRAIN Terminal, BT200.
Using ESC*B card, the parameters in not only the signal conditioner card but also the com-
munication card itself can be defined.
TIP With ESC*A card, the parameters of signal conditioner cards can be changed but the parameters of the ESC
card itself cannot.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to use the BRAIN Terminal, BT200, refer to:
n Steps to Display Parameters

1. Power on the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 and connect the cable to an ESC*B card.
2. Press the ENT key. [SLOT PANEL] appears.
SLOT
SLOT NO.
00
CLR
3. Enter the slot number “00,” and then press the ENT key. [INITIAL DATA PANEL] appears.
4. Press the ENT key on [INITIAL DATA PANEL]. [MENU PANEL] appears.
MENU
A:DISPLAY1
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.4-2 MENU PANEL (A:DISPLAY1)
5. Choose the F2 key “SET” or F3 key “ADJ” to change [MENU PANEL].

MENU
D:SET1
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.4-3 MENU PANEL (D:SET1) (Case where the F2 key “SET” is selected)

MENU
P:ADJUST1
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.4-4 MENU PANEL (P:ADJST1) (Case where the F3 key “ADJ” is selected)
6. On [MENU PANEL], choose “A:DISPLAY1”, “D:SET1”, or “P:ADJUST1”, and then press

the ENT key. [PARAMETER PANEL] appears.
PARAM
D01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
D02: TAG NO. 2
D03: COMMENT 1
TOWER
DATA DIAG ESC
Figure B7.5.4-5 PARAMETER PANEL (Case where “D:SET1” is selected on the MENU PANEL)
7. Use the Movement keys and the function keys as necessary to switch panels.
n Steps to Change Parameters

1. Power on the BRAIN Terminal, BT200 and connect the cable to an ESC*B card.
2. Press the ENT key. [SLOT PANEL] appears.
SLOT
SLOT NO.
00
CLR
3. Enter the slot number “00,” and then press the ENT key. [INITIAL DATA PANEL] appears.
4. Press the ENT key on [INITIAL DATA PANEL] . [MENU PANEL] appears.
MENU
A:DISPLAY1
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.4-7 MENU PANEL (A:DISPLAY1)
5. Choose the F2 key “SET” to change [MENU PANEL].

MENU
D:SET1
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Figure B7.5.4-8 MENU PANEL (D:SET) (Case where the F2 key “SET” is selected)
6. Press the ENT key on [MENU PANEL] “D:SET1”. [PARAMETER PANEL] appears.

PARAM
D01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
D02: TAG NO. 2
D03: COMMENT 1
TOWER
DATA DIAG ESC
Figure B7.5.4-9 PARAMETER PANEL
7. Use the Movement keys and select a parameter to be changed, and then press the ENT
key. [SETUP PANEL] appears.
SET
D01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
TIC-101
CODE CAPS CLR ESC
Figure B7.5.4-10 SETUP PANEL (Case where “D01:TAG NO. 1” is selected on the PARAMETER PAN-
EL)
8. Using the Shift key and Alphanumeric keys, enter a new parameter.
SET
D01: TAG NO. 1
TIC-101
TRC-101a
CODE CAPS CLR ESC
Figure B7.5.4-11 SETUP PANEL (Case where “TRC-101a” is entered)
9. Press the ENT key, and the value you entered flashes. Confirm that the value is correct
and press the ENT key again. This will change the parameter stored in the ESC*B card.
SET
D01: TAG NO. 1
TRC-101a
NG OK
Figure B7.5.4-12 SETUP PANEL (when setting is completed)
10. If you complete the setting, press the F4 key “OK”, and [PARAMETER PANEL] will ap-
pear. If you want to undo the setting, press the F3 key “NG”. And then do the setting
again.
n Parameters of ESC*B Card

Table B7.5.4-1 ESC*B Card parameters
No. Item Name Data
01 Model MODEL ESC*B
A Display item 1 DISPLAY1
A18 Rev. No. REV NO n.nnn (n: Rev. No.)

No. Item Name Data
A20 MENU Rev. No. MENU REV n.n (n: Rev. No.)
A60 Self-diagnosis SELF CHK GOOD or ERROR
D Set item 1 SET1
D01 Tag number 1 TAG NO.1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in
the former half of tag number)
D02 Tag number 2 TAG NO.2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in
the latter half of tag number)
D03 Comment 1 COMMENT1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in
the former half of comments)
D04 Comment 2 COMMENT2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 characters in
the latter half of comments)
D60 Self-diagnosis SELF CHK GOOD or ERROR
P Adjust 1 ADJUST1
P60 Self-diagnosis SELF CHK GOOD or ERROR
l Details of Status (A17)
Table B7.5.4-2 Status Detail Codes

Status detail codes Self check Meaning Release conditions
40 GOOD Power failure history Set “00”
20 GOOD WDT timeout history
10 GOOD Brain terminal connected history
08 GOOD Brain terminal adjusted history
02 ERROR EEPROM sum check error history None

Blank Page
CMPL B1-1
Customer Models ANB10S and

Maintenance ANB10D
Parts List Node Unit for ESB Bus
CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E

_
1 ANB10S Node Unit for Single ESB Bus
_
ANB10D Node Unit for Dual-Redundant ESB Bus
Figure CMPL B1-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E
Subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 1st Edition : Sep. 2001 (YK)
11th Edition : May. 2013 (YK)
CMPL B1-2
8 1
10
11
16
13
9
12
2
5
6
15
4
14
Figure CMPL B1-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E 11th Edition : May.2013-00
CMPL B1-3
Qty
ANB10D
ANB10S
Model
Model or
1 – 1 1 Base Unit
2 Below 1 1 Power Supply Module
3 T9088MK 1 1 Cover
4 Below 1 Power Supply Module

5 T9088MK 1 Cover
6 ADCV02 1 Dummy Cover
7 SB401 1 1 ESB Bus Interface Slave Module

8 – 1 1 Connector Unit for ESB Bus (/CU1N, /CU2N)
9 – 1 1 Connector Unit with Terminator for ESB Bus (/CU1T, /CU2T)
10 SB401 1 ESB Bus Interface Slave Module
11 – 1 Connector Unit for ESB Bus (/CU2N)
12 – 1 Connector Unit with Terminator for ESB Bus (/CU2T)

14 T9082QG 1 1 Cable Tray
15 Y9306LK 2 2 Screw with Washer, M3 x 6
16 S9049PM 4 4 Insulating Bushing
Figure CMPL B1-3
Blank Page
CMPL B2-1
Customer Models ANR10S and

Maintenance ANR10D
Parts List Node Unit for ER Bus
CMPL 33Q06Q10-32E

1 ANR10S – Node Unit for Single ER Bus
ANR10D – Node Unit for Dual-Redundant ER Bus
Figure CMPL B2-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06Q10-32E
10th Edition : May. 2013 (YK)
CMPL B2-2
7 12
2
5
6
11
4
10
Figure CMPL B2-2
CMPL B2-3
Qty
ANR10D
ANR10S
Model
Model or
1 – 1 1 Base Unit
3 T9088MK 1 1 Cover

5 T9088MK 1 Cover
7 EB501 1 1 ER Bus Interface Slave Module

8 EB501 1 ER Bus Interface Slave Module
10 T9082QA 1 1 Cable Tray
Figure CMPL B2-3
Blank Page
CMPL B3-1
Customer Models ANB11S and ANB11D

Maintenance Optical ESB Bus Node Unit
Parts List (for AFV30 □ /AFV40 □ )
CMPL 33K50F30-50E

_
1 ANB11S Node Unit for Single ESB Bus with Optical Repeater
_
ANB11D Node Unit for Dual-Redundant ESB Bus with Optical Repeater
Figure CMPL B3-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2011, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33K50F30-50E
3rd Edition : May. 2013 (YK)
CMPL B3-2
1
8
12
13
20
17
14
10
3
15
2
11 5
6
4
16
19
18
Figure CMPL B3-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2011, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33K50F30-50E 3rd Edition : May.2013-00
CMPL B3-3
Qty
ANB11D
ANB11S
Model
Model or
1 – 1 1 Base Unit
3 T9088MK 1 1 Cover

5 T9088MK 1 Cover
7 ANT502-*1 1 1 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module

ANT512-*1 1 1 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module for long distance
8 – 1 1 Connector unit with HKU I/F for item 7 (/HU1B, /HU2B)
9 – 1 1 Connector unit with ESB Bus connector and HKU I/F for item 7 (/HU1A, /HU2A)
10 – 1 1 Connector unit for item 7 (/BU1B,/BU2B)
11 – 1 1 Connector unit with ESB Bus connector for item 7 (/BU1A, /BU2A)
12 ANT502-*1 1 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module

ANT512-*1 1 Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module for long distance
13 – 1 Connector unit with HKU I/F for item 12 (/HU2B)
14 – 1 Connector unit with ESB Bus connector and HKU I/F for item 12 (/HU2A)
15 – 1 Connector unit for item 12 (/BU2B)
16 – 1 Connector unit with ESB Bus connector for item 12 (/BU2A)

Note *1: For suffix code details, refer to General Specifications.
Figure CMPL B3-3
Blank Page
CMPL B4-1
Customer Model ANT10U

Maintenance Unit for Optical ESB Bus
Repeater Module
Parts List (19-inch Rack Mountable)
CMPL 33K50F50-50E

_
1 ANT10U Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module
Figure CMPL B4-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2011, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33K50F50-50E
3rd Edition : May. 2013 (YK)
CMPL B4-2
2
5
6
Figure CMPL B4-2
CMPL B4-3
Qty
ANT10U-3
ANT10U-4
Model
Model or
1 – 1 1 Base Unit
3 T9088MK 1 1 Cover
5 T9088MK 1 Cover
Figure CMPL B4-3
Blank Page
CMPL B5-1
Customer Models ARM15A, ARM55D,

ARM55W, ARM55T, ARM55C,
Maintenance ARS15B, ARS15M and ARS55M
Parts List Relay Boards (for FIO)
CMPL 33Q06R90-31E
Mechanical Relay Boards

Model ARM15A
To Cabinet or Rack
2
Hole for wall mounting

M5 screw hole 4-position
7
4
6 5
2 1 8
Model ARM55D
To Cabinet or Rack

6 4
5
2 1 8
Figure CMPL B5-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2002, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06R90-31E
CMPL B5-2
Mechanical Relay Boards

Models ARM55W and ARM55T
To Cabinet or Rack

7
4
6 5
2 1 3 8
Model ARM55C
To Cabinet or Rack

4
5
2 1 8
Figure CMPL B5-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2002, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06R90-31E 6th Edition : Jun.2009-00
CMPL B5-3
Qty
ARM55W
ARM55D
ARM55C
ARM15A
ARM55T
Model
1 S9165VM 32 32 32 Relay
S9163VM 32 Relay
2 S9527VK 3 Fuse (1.0 A)
S9528VK 1 1 Fuse (1.6 A)
S9529VK 1 Fuse (2.0 A)
3 A1422EF 64 Fuse (1.6 A)

4 T9012WT 1 1 1 1 Cover
5 Y9406LB 2 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M4 x 6
6 A1700JT 2 2 2 Cover (accessory)
A1705JT 2 Cover (accessory)
7 Y9306LB 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M3 x 6
8 T9082TX 2 2 2 Wall Mount Bracket (option code : /BR3)
T9082TY 2 Wall Mount Bracket (option code : /BR4)
Figure CMPL B5-3
CMPL B5-4
Solid State Relay Board

Model ARS15B
To Cabinet or Rack

2 M5 screw hole 4-position
1 4 3

1 S9527VK 1 Fuse (1.0 A)
2 A1422EF 1 Fuse (1.6 A)
3 T9012WT 1 Cover
4 Y9406LB 2 B. H. Screw, M4 x 6
5 S9381VK 2 Cover
6 Y9306LB 4 B. H. Screw, M3 x 6
7 T9082TX 2 Wall Mount Bracket (option code : /BR3)
Figure CMPL B5-4
CMPL B5-5
Solid State Relay Board

Models ARS15M and ARS55M
5
6
1 2
Qty 3
ARS15M
ARS55M
Model

1 S9529VK 1 1 Fuse (2.0 A)
2 A1208PC 32 Solid State Relay (for 100 V AC input module)
A1209PC 32 Solid State Relay (for 220 V AC input module)
A1210PC 32 Solid State Relay (for 10 to 30 V DC input module)
3 A1205PC 32 Solid State Relay (for 100 V AC output module)
A1206PC 32 Solid State Relay (for 220 V AC output module)

A1207PC 32 Solid State Relay (for 5 to 60 V DC output module)
4 A1554EF 1 Fuse (4 A)
5 T9012WT 1 1 Cover
6 Y9406LB 2 2 B. H. Screw, M4 x 6
Figure CMPL B5-5
Blank Page
CMPL B6-1
Customer Terminal Blocks

Maintenance Terminal Boards
Parts List Relay Boards
CMPL 33Y06K50-31E
Terminal Blocks
To Cabinet or Rack To Cabinet or Rack
1 5
2 6
To Cabinet or Rack To Cabinet or Rack
3 7
4 8

1 TE16 – 16-point Terminal Block
2 T9041RY 1 Cover
3 TE32 – 32-point Terminal Block
4 T9041RZ 1 Cover
5 TETC – Terminal Block for Thermocouple
6 T9041RY 1 Cover
7 TERT – Terminal Block for RTS
8 T9041RZ 1 Cover
Figure CMPL B6-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E
Subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 1st Edition : Dec. 2003 (YK)
CMPL B6-2
General-Purpose Terminal Board (Connector Type, for Digital Input Module)
1 8
2 To Cabinet To Cabinet
or Rack or Rack
9
2 9
3 10
4 11
To Cabinet
To Cabinet
or Rack
or Rack
4 11
To Cabinet or Rack
7
6
5
Figure CMPL B6-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 5th Edition : Jun.2009-00
CMPL B6-3

1 MUB – General-purpose Terminal Board
(16 point board x 2)
2 T9041RY 2 Cover
3 MUD – General-purpose Terminal Board
(32 point board x 2 : for ST5, ST6 and ST7)
4 T9041RZ 2 Cover
5 MCM – Terminal Board for Control I/O
6 Y9305LB 2 B.H.Screw, M3 x 5
7 T9041RD 1 Cover
8 MTC – Terminal Board for Thermocouple
9 T9041RY 2 Cover
10 MRT – Terminal Board for RTD
11 T9041RZ 2 Cover
Figure CMPL B6-3
CMPL B6-4
MRI Relay Input Board
To Cabinet
or Rack
10
4
8
2
To Cabinet
or Rack
5
7
7
5
10
7
6
1 2
Figure CMPL B6-4
CMPL B6-5
Qty
MRI-124
MRI-134
MRI-214
MRI-224
MRI-234
MRI-114
Model
1 A1725MR 16 16 16 32 32 32 Relay (24 V)
2 S9528VK 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fuse (1.6 A)
3 S9430VK 1 3 3 Terminal Cover

7 Y9304LB 4 8 8 B. H. Screw, M3 x 4
8 T9056HY 1 1 1 Bracket
9 T9056HV 1 1 1 Bracket
10 Y9314LB 2 2 2 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M3 x 14
Figure CMPL B6-5
CMPL B6-6
MRO Relay Output Board

To Cabinet or Rack
11
9
4
2
7
1
To Cabinet or Rack
5
11
8
10
6
2
7
1
Figure CMPL B6-6
CMPL B6-7
Qty
MRO-124
MRO-134
MRO-144
MRO-154
MRO-164
MRO-214
MRO-224
MRO-234
MRO-244
MRO-254
MRO-264
MRO-114
Model
1 S9165VM 16 16 16 32 32 32 Relay (24 V)
S9162VM 16 16 32 32 Relay (24 V)
S9163VM 16 32 Relay (24 V)
2 S9528VK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fuse (1.6 A)
3 S9430VK 1 3 3 2 Terminal Cover
4 S9431VK 1 1 1 2 2 2 Terminal Cover

5 S9380VK 1 3 3 2 Terminal Cover
6 S9381VK 1 1 1 2 2 2 Terminal Cover
7 S9527VK 16 16 32 64 64 64 Fuse (1.0 A)
8 Y9304LB 4 8 8 4 4 8 B. H. Screw, M3 x 4
9 T9056HQ 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bracket
10 T9056HR 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bracket
11 Y9314LB 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M3 x 14
Figure CMPL B6-7
Blank Page
CMPL B7-1
Customer Models MHC and MHM

Maintenance Signal Conditioner Nests
Parts List Signal Conditioner Cards
CMPL 33Y06V10-31E
10
13
3 5 6 14
11
8
Qty 12
4
MH*-1*
MH*-2*
MH*-5*
MH*-6*
9
Model
15
Model or 16
1 S9101UD 1 1 Power Supply Unit
S9100UD 1 1 Power Supply Unit
2 S9101UD 1 Power Supply Unit
S9100UD 1 Power Supply Unit
3 T9048FL 1 1 Bracket Assembly
4 Y9308LK 2 2 B. H. Screw with Lockwasher, M3 × 8

5 T9019FF 2 2 Retainer
6 – – – – – Signal Conditioner Card (refer to General Specifications)
7 T9048JJ – – – – Dummy Plate (as required)
8 ESC 1 1 1 1 ESC Card (for Model MH*-*1)
9 T9048JD 1 1 1 1 Dummy Plate (for Model MH*-*0)

10 S9049PM 4 4 4 4 Insulating Bushing
11 T9012WS 1 1 1 1 Cover
12 Y9406LB 2 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M4 × 6
13 E9731DP 1 1 1 1 Cover (for model MHM)
14 Y9406LB 2 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M4 × 6 (for item 13)

15 T9012WS 1 1 1 1 Cover
16 Y9406LB 2 2 2 2 B. H. Screw, M4 × 6
Note*: For suffix code details (indicated by ), refer to General Specifications.
Figure CMPL B7-1
CAUTION
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2007, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06V10-31E
Subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 1st Edition : Dec. 2007 (YK)
CMPL B7-2
Models MHC-3* and MHM-3*
1 8
9
4
6
3 10
7
Model or 11
1 − − Signal Conditioner Card (refer to General Specifications)
2 T9048JJ − Dummy Plate (as required)
3 ESC 1 ESC Card (for Model MH*-*1)
4 T9048JD 1 Dummy Plate (for Model MH*-*0)
5 S9049PM 4 Insulating Bushing
6 T9012WS 1 Cover
7 Y9406LB 2 B. H. Screw, M4×6
8 E9731DP 1 Cover (for model MHM)
9 Y9406LB 2 B. H. Screw, M4 × 6 (for item 8)
10 T9012WS 1 Cover
11 Y9406LB 2 B. H. Screw, M4 × 6
Note*: For suffix code details (indicated by ), refer to General Specifications.
Figure CMPL B7-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2007, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06V10-31E 4th Edition : Jun.2012-00
Ind-1
INDEX
Interface Master Module (EB401)........... B2-32
A Interface Slave Module (EB501)............. B2-33
Analog I/O Module Replacing Interface Master Module.........B4-13
AMN11, AMN12 Nest................................ A2-3 Replacing Interface Slave Module...........B4-14
Analog I/O Module.......................... A3-5,B2-40 ESB Bus
Mounting and Demounting........................ A5-9 Exchange Node.......................................B4-25
Signal Cable Connection.........................B3-17 Interface Slave Module (SB401)............. B2-15
Replacing Interface Slave Module...........B4-12
B
BRAIN Terminal.............................................. B7-30
F
FOUNDATION fieldbus Communication Module.....
C ................................................................ B3-61
Communication Card
G
AMN51 Nest.............................................. A2-9
Grounding.......................................................B1-17
Communication Card...............................A3-19
Signal Cable Wiring.................................A4-32 I
I/O Module
AMN33 Nest.............................................. A2-7
Combination of I/O Module Nests............. A3-2
AMN52 Nest............................................ A2-10
Combinations of Input/Output Module and Ter-
Communication Modules.............. A3-18,B2-44
minal Block.........................................B3-2
Signal Cable Connection.........................B3-51
Initialization Settings................................A3-21
Signal Circuits...............................A4-19,A4-25
Mounting and Demounting........................ A5-8
Wiring...................................................... A4-17
Replacing................................................ B4-17
Connection of Ethernet Communication Modules....
Signal Cable Connection (For FIO).. B3-1,B3-2
................................................................ B3-60
Types.........................................................A3-4
Connection via Connectors............................ B3-12
Types (for FIO)........................................ B2-10
Connection via MIL Connectors..................... B3-16
Wiring........................................................ A4-6
Connection with Terminal Boards................... B3-65
I/O Module Nest
Connector I/O Modules AMN32 Nest............... A2-6
Installation Restrictions........................... A2-13
D Mounting and Demounting...................... A5-12
Power Supply Wiring............................... A2-11
Digital I/O Module........................................... A3-15
Types.........................................................A2-2
Digital I/O Modules.................................. B2-43
Input & Output Devices
Signal Cable Connection.........................B3-37
Configuration............................................. A1-4
Wiring (Connector Type)......................... A4-15
For FIO...................................................... B2-1
Wiring (Terminal Type)............................ A4-14
Maintenance..............................................A5-1
E Maintenance (For FIO).............................. B4-1
ER Bus Routine Maintenance........................A5-2,B4-2
Cable Connection....................................B2-37 Types.......................................................B2-10

Ind-2
Inspection by FFCS-V Status Display View......B4-8 Power Supply Wiring...................................... B1-15
Inspection by KFCS Status Display View......... B4-7 Precautions against Static Electricity....... A5-2,B4-2
Inspection by Status Display LEDs...................B4-3 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks
Inspection by Status Display View........... B4-7,B4-8 Direct-Coupled Connection Using Pressure
Inspection Using LFCS Status Display View.... A5-5 Clamp Terminals................................ B3-8
Inspection Using Status Display View.............. A5-5 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks............ B2-47
Installation Restrictions and Precautions......... B2-2 Types.......................................................B3-10
Installation Restrictions for the 19” Rack Mountable
Type Node............................................... A2-16 R
Installation Restrictions for the Cabinet Installation Relay Boards (for FIO)
Type Node............................................... A2-14 Cable Connection......................................B5-5
Circuit Diagrams......................................B5-18
K
Maintenance............................................B5-22
KS Cable Interface Adapters.......................... B2-49 Mounting on a Wall Surface ................... B5-23
Mounting on DIN Rails............................ B5-24
M
Mounting Relay Boards........................... B5-23
Mounting and Demounting of NIU RIO bus Inter- Parts Having Defined Life Spans............ B5-27
face Slave Cards and Power Supply Unit A5-6
Relay Input Board......................................B5-2
Multiplexer Module
Relay Output Board...................................B5-2
Multiplexer Module.................................. A3-12
Wiring Field Equipment............................. B5-9
Wiring (Connector Type)......................... A4-13
Relay Boards (for RIO and ST compatible FIO)
Wiring (Terminal Type)............................ A4-12
Cable Connection......................................B6-5
Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
Cable Connection and Circuit Diagrams. B6-10
AMN34 Nest.............................................. A2-8
Maintenance............................................B6-29
Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module......A3-20
Parts Having Defined Life Spans............ B6-31
Wiring...................................................... A4-35
Relay Input Board......................................B6-2
N Relay Output Board...................................B6-2
Wiring Field Equipment............................. B6-9
Node Unit
Relay I/O Module
Configuration............................................. B1-8
AMN21 Nest.............................................. A2-4
Installation............................................... B1-11
Relay I/O Module.....................................A3-10
Node in FCS Architecture..........................B1-2
Wiring...................................................... A4-11
Node Positioning and Property..................A1-2
Replacing Common Modules........................... B4-9
Setting Node Addresses (ESB Bus)........B2-16
Replacing Power Supply Modules.................. B4-11
Setting Node Number (ER Bus).............. B2-33
RIO bus Interface Slave Card.........................A5-14
Slot Names................................................B2-2
Routine Maintenance by Checking Status Lamps...
Types.........................................................B1-7 .................................................................. A5-3
Notice when EB401 is in single configuration.. B2-5 RS-232C Communication Module.................. A4-18
RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module.................
O ......................................................A4-24,B3-56
Optical ESB Bus
Node Unit(ANB11S,ANB11D)....................B1-9 S
Repeater Master Module (ANT401, ANT411)... Signal Cable
......................................................... B2-18 Common Item for Signal Cable Connection......
Repeater Slave Module (ANT502, ANT512)..... ........................................................... A4-2
......................................................... B2-21 Connection (Connector Type)................... A4-4
Unit for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Mod- How to Connect Signal Cables..................B3-7
ule(ANT10U).................................... B1-10
Procedure Terminal Connection................ A4-3
P Types.........................................................A4-5
Signal Cable Connection
Parts Replacement......................................... A5-16
I/O Module with Built-in Barrier................B3-71
Power Supply Module.....................................B2-14

Ind-3
PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module Control I/O................................................. B7-3
(ALP121).......................................... B3-69 I/O..............................................................B7-3
PROFIBUS-DP Communication Mod- Mounting..................................................B7-19
ule(ALP111)......................................B3-67
Signal Cable Connection to RS-232C Communica- T
tion Module..............................................B3-52
Terminal Boards..............................................B2-50
Signal Conditioner
Terminal I/O Module AMN31 Nest.................... A2-5
Parts Having Defined Life Spans............ B7-28
Signal Conditioner Card W
List.............................................................B7-2
Wiring of Fieldbus Communication Module.... A4-29
Parameters..............................................B7-37
Parameters of ESC*B Card.....................B7-48
Replacing................................................ B7-22
Wiring Field Equipment........................... B7-16
Signal Conditioner Nest
Cautions for Mounting............................. B7-20

Blank Page
Rev-1
Revision Information
Title : Input & Output Modules
Manual No. : IM 33K50G10-50E
Jun. 2013/4th Edition/R5.03 or later*
* : Denotes the release number of the software corresponding to the contents of this user’s manual.
The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.
B2.6 External view of ALP121 is added in "Communication Modules".
B3.5.6 "Signal Cable Connection to PROFIBUS-DP Communication Module (ALP111)" is added.
B4.1.1 Description about ALP121 is added in "Inspection by Status Display LEDs".
B4.3.3 Description about ALP121 is added in "How to Replace Input/Output Modules".
Jun. 2012/3rd Edition/R5.02 or later
Safety Precautions is modified.
Copyright and Trademark notices is modified.
A3.2.1 Description in "■ When Receiving No-Voltage Contact Signals(1)" is added.
A3.2.4 "■ Table Digital I/O Module Types" is modified.
A4.2.1 "■ Table I/O Terminal Types for Analog I/O modules" is modified.
A4.3.2 Description in "Table RS-422/RS485 Interface Terminal" is added.
A5.1.2 Description is modified.
CMPL 33G06K10-11E revised.(CMPL A-1, A-3, A-5. A-6)"
B1 Description is modified.
B2.1 Description of "● For the ESB Bus Node Unit(ANB10S/ANB10D, ANB11S/ANB11D,
ANT10U)" is modified.
B2.2 ALP121 is added in "Table I/O modules(2/2)".
B2.3.2 Description of "■ Setting Node Addresses" is modified.
B2.3.4 Description of "● DIP Switch Settings on Installed Unit" is modified.
B2.3.4 Table is revised.
B2.3.8 Description of "● Setting Node Number of FFCS or FFCS-S" is modified.
B2.6 ALP121 is added.
B2.7.3 Description is added in "Table Terminal Boards".
B3.1 ALP121 is added in "Table Combinations of I/O Module and Terminal Block" of "l Communi-
cation Modules"
B3.1 Description in "Table Combinations of I/O module and Terminal Board" is modified.
B3.2.1 Description in "● Cables used" is modified.
B3.2.2 Description is added in "■ Signal Cable Connection".
B3.5.1 Description of "■ ALR111 FG Connection" is modified.
B3.5.2 Description is added in "Table RS-422/RS-485 Interface Terminal".
B3.5.5 PW604 in "Figure ALF111 Installation Example" is deleted.
B3.5.6 Description of ALP111 is modified.
B3.5.7 ALP121 is added.
B4.3.3 Procedure of Replacing ALP121 is added.
B4.4 "■ Procedure of Changing ER Bus Node Unit" is added.

Rev-2
B5.4.3 Description is added in "● Wires and Ring Terminals Used".
B7.3.2 Description is added in "● Wires and Ring Terminals Used".
B7.3.4 Description is added in "IMPORTANT".
B7.5.3 Description of "■ Parameter Details" is modified.
CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E revised.(CMPL B-1, B-3)
CMPL 33Q06Q10-32E revised.(CMPL B-5, B-6, B-7)
CMPL 33K50F30-50E revised.(CMPL B-9, B-11)
CMPL 33K50F50-50E revised.(CMPL B-13, B-15)
CMPL 33Y06V10-31E revised.(CMPL B-31, B-32)
Dec. 2011/2nd Edition/R5.01.10 or later
B2.3.3 Description in supplementary documents 01 accepted.
B2.3.5 Mistakes corrected.
Sep. 2011/1st Edition/R5.01 or later
Newly published
n For Questions and More Information

If you have any questions, you can send an E-mail to the following address.
E-mail: support-CENTUM@csv.yokogawa.co.jp
n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN
n Printed by KOHOKU PUBLISHING & PRINTING INC.

IM33K50G10 - 50E - 04 - PRT - IOs MODULES PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IM33K50G10 - 50E - 04 - PRT - IOs MODULES PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Input & Output Modules

n Products Explained in This User’s manual

n Organization of This User’s Manual

l PART-A Input & Output Device for RIO

l PART-B Input & Output Devices for FIO

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

CENTUM VP Document Map

Field Control Stations Function Blocks Function Blocks Function Blocks

Function Blocks Human Interface Human Interface Engineering

SEBOL Communication with Communication with Communication

Optional Functions Communication with Compliance with Generic Subsystem

System Integration Unified Gateway Engineering Test

Engineering CENTUM FOUNDATION fieldbus

Operation and Monitoring

HIS Operation Operating Messages

Communication Devices Migrated-FCS(FIO)

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

Safety Precautions for Use

Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.

n Notes on Handling User's Manuals

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

n Warning and Disclaimer

l Model and Suffix Codes

Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent dam-

Identifies additional information.

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

Conformity Standards and Cautions

Table Info-1 Standards

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

n Installation and Maintenance Notes

l Requirements for Installation

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

l Tightening Torque of Screws

Table Info-2 Table of Recommended Tightening Torque

l Power Cable Wiring

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

l I/O Cable Wiring

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

l Modules, Cards, Cables, and Connectors

n Guidelines for Selecting a Power Supply Unit

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

l Notices on Deciding the Output Capacity of Power Supply Unit

Input current waveform Approximately 5 ms

Figure Info-1 Input voltage and current waveforms

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

l How to Decide the Power Supply Unit

l Suppressing Harmonic Current

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

Copyright and Trademark Notices

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

Input & Output Modules

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

Input & Output Modules

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

IM 33K50G10-50E 4th Edition : Jun.28,2013-00

A1. Input & Output Device